]   U  iliiJili    t 


*i)HWl!|iWpMti>(*IIMJMmi)^ 


1 

? 

;■; 

y 

=='- 

1 

RA 

5 

— "    ■ 

8 

ACI 

Ig 

7 

pHOI(T-pAMD,"  ' 


A40RAN, 


liNiilii 


|l«i*iiipW)W(MlpiUtoil{(|piM^^ 


lU'l  III  )r'i«i^>ll*MWIiWWIWWWMKi 


THE  LIBRARY 
OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


■V^iftr 


ijy>     ^^- 


^-  0.  BAITER 
UWr£R 


'f^?? 


^^' 


5^^U^ 


6  (a 


PREFACE. 


To  impart  practical  instructiou   in  tlie  Reporting   Style  of  the 

American  Pitman  Phonography,  the  system  now  employed  by  most 

professional  reporters,  is  the  aim  of  this  work.     The  Corresponding 

Style,  which  cannot  be  made  a  substitute  for  long-hand,  and  serves 

no  end  not  better  met  by  the  briefer  method,  is  for  these  reasons 

discarded.    Heretofore  the  only  accessible  way  to  the  Reporting 

Style  has  been  through  the   Corresponding,  a  circuitous  route, 

eo   requiring  much  needless  time  and  labor.    This  treatise  is  designed 

Jjj    as  a  school  and  college  text-book,  and  is  well  adapted  to  self- 

>-    instruction.     It  is  also  the  basis  of  the  Author's  mode  of  teaching 

or 

g    by  mail,  known  as  the  Perfected  Method  of  Postal  Stenography. 

S    The  best  results  of  his  twelve  years  experience  as  verbatim  reporter 
and  teacher  are  embraced  herein.    Printed  in  separate  sheets,  these 
^^    lessons  have  been  used  for  the  past  three  years  in  giving  instruction 
to  large  classes  in  the  State  University  of  Iowa  School  of  Short- 
3c    Hand.    The  advantages  of  omitting  the  Corresponding  Style,  and 
"^     requiring  speed  in  writing  from  the  first,  have  been  fully  demon- 
strated in  this  Institution,  students  in  some  instances  having  taken 
secretaryships    in   eleven   weeks  from    the   date  of    entry.      The 
C    names  of  a  few  of  the   stenographers  who  became  qualified  iu 
g    this  way  will  be  found  at  the  close  of  the  book. 

An  important  feature  is  the  series  of  lessons  on  professional  report- 
ing, nothing  similar  to  which  is  to  be  found  in  any  other  instruction 
book  whatever.    These  explain  the  forms  and  methods  made  use 

of  in  amanuensis,  convention,  legislative,  and  law  reporting,  with- 

(iii) 


iV  PREFACE. 

out  a  knowledge  of  which  the  art  is  quite  unavailable  as  a  business. 
A  vocabulary  of  all  the  word  and  phrase  signs  in  common  use  is 
appended.  Those  who  have  not  the  assistance  of  a  teacher,  and  are 
desirous  of  progressing  rapidly,  will  be  enabled  to  do  so  by  pro- 
curing instruction  by  mail.  The  first  lessons  are  furnished 
gratuitously  to  those  wishing  to  test  the  efficiency  of  this  method. 

To  all  those  young  meu  and  women  who  have  the  courage  to 
undertake,  and  perseverance  to  master  this  truly  beautiful  art,  the 
present  work  is  inscribed  with  the  sincere  wish  that  it  may  render 
them  genuine  service. 

Finally,  to  his  kind  assistants,  by  whose  careful  labors  he  has 
profited  much,  are  tendered  the  grateful  acknowledgments  of 

THE    AUTHOR. 

Reporters^  Bureau,  Iowa  City,   May,  1884. 


CONTENTS. 


Introductiox      .... 
I.    CoxsoxAXT  Alphabet — 1st  Sec. 
II.  "  "  2xdSec, 

III.  WoRD-SlGXS  .... 

IV.  Ray,  axd   Phraseograpiiy 
V.    LoxG  Vowels     .... 

VI.     DiPiiTHOXGS  axd  the  S-Circle 
VII.     Shout  Vowels 

VIII.      COXSOXANT   PoSITIOX 

IX.  S-Circle  Junctioxs 

X.  Phraseography  . 

XI.  Sez-Circle,  Emp,  axd  Coalescexts 

XII.  Double  Coxsoxants— The  L-Hook 

XIII.  The  E-Hook  Series — 1st  Sec. 

XIV.  "  "  "         2xD  Sec. 
XV.     Triple   Coxsoxaxts 

XVI.  The  Eel-Hook,  axd  the   Aspirate  Tick 

Dot 

XVII.  The  W-Hook       .... 

XVIII.  The  F-Hook         .... 

XIX.  The  N-Hook  Series— 1st  Sec. 

XX.        "  <'  "        2xD  Sec. 

XXI.  The  Shux-Hook 

XXII.  The  S-Shux  axd  Ixitial  N  Hooks 

XXIII.    The  St  axd  Str  Loops. 
(5) 


7 
15 
18 
20 
24 
28 
33 
37 
41 
45 
48 
51 
55 
59 
G3 
G6 

69 
71 
74 
77 
79 
82 
85 
88 


Vi  CONTEXTS. 

LESSON.  PAGE, 

XXIV.    THii  Lengthened  Curve        .            .        .  91 

XXV.    The  Halving  Principle      ....  93 

XXVI.        "           "                "            Added  D     .         .  96 
XXVII.       "           "               "            Shortened    Double 

Consonants 100 

XXVIII.    The    Halving  Principle — Shortened  Final- 
Hook  Consonants             .         .         .  10;} 
XXIX.    The  Halving  Principle — Shortened  Liquids  107 

XXX.     Intervocalization 110 

XXXI.     Prefixes 113 

XXXII.     Affixes 117 

XXXIII.  Expedients  and  Punctuation           .        .  119 

XXXIV.  General  Principles          ....  122 
XXXV.    Proper  Names 125 

XXXVI.     Special  Rules 127 

XXXVII.    Amanuensis  Reporting      ....  130 

XXXVIII.              "                   "             Continued          ,  134 

XXXIX.     Speech  Reporting 139 

XL.      CON\TENTION   REPORTING          ....  143 

XLI.    Law  Reporting— Caption,  Question  and  An- 
swer       148 

XLII.    LaW    Reporting — Objections,    Rulings,  and 

Exceptions 153 

XLIII.    Law  Reporting — Exhibits  and  Indices     .  159 

XLIV.        '<             "              Transcripts            .        .  165 

XLV.       "            "             Professional  Conduct  170 

Vocabulary            177 


INTRODUCTION. 


This  Science  is  still  much  younger  than  manj'  of  its  practitioners. 
The  advancement  made  in  a  few  decades  is  truly  astonishing.  But 
years  of  experiment  and  elaboration  are  still  needed  to  thoroughly 
unify  and  complete  the  system.  The  physician's  art,  old  as  the 
race,  continues  to  be  enriched  by  discoveries,  and  the  methods  of 
instruction  in  its  principles  improved  bj^  the  enlax'gement  of  hos- 
pitals, the  increase  of  clinical  facilities,  and  the  publication  of  better 
illustrated  and  more  methodic  text  books.  But  scientific  short- 
hand is  only  in  its  infancy,  and  it  would  be  sheer  folly  to  disreganl 
the  suggestions  of  the  ingenious  minds  assidiously  at  work  in  every 
corner  of  this  field.  The  standard  systems,  so  called,  which  admit 
of  no  modification,  are  fast  falling  into  disuse.  The  notion  given 
out  by  some,  that  further  improvement  is  impossible  or  useless,  is 
absurd.  Development  gradually  goes  on,  and  the  method  of  teach- 
ing has  been  so  far  perfected  that  the  skill  which  once  demanded 
two  years  to  gain,  may  now  be  acquired  in  four  mouths. 

The  method  of  instruction  here  employed  is  practical  and  pro- 
gressive. The  principles  of  the  system  are  taken  up  and  explained 
in  logical  order,  and  the  student  directed  how  to  apply  them  cor- 
rectly in  the  work  of  forming  the  characters  rapidly  and  artistically. 
Two  or  three  new  principles  only  are  introduced  in  a  single  lesson, 
and  a  list  of  words  inserted  which  are  to  be  written  in  accordance 
therewith.  The  words  chosen  for  this  purpose  are  those  in  common 
use.  The  drill  which  enables  the  student  to  write  and  read 
them  Avith  the  required  speed,  fixes  the  characters  firmly  in  his 
memory.  This  makes  an  extended  vocabulary  unnecessary,  since  an 
outline,  once  well  learned,  will  be  remembered.  No  w^ord  or  phrase 
is  introduced  which  the  learner  has  not  been  fully  directed  how  to 
write  in  the  proper  manner.  It  is  a  loss  instead  of  gain  to  practice 
writing  words  not  found  in  the  regular  lists,  since  in  most  cases 

(7) 


Vm  IXTRODUCTIOX. 

the  outlines  will  necessarily  be  formed  incorrectly.  The  disad- 
vantage of  attempting  words  too  soon  may  be  illustrated  by  an  en- 
graving of  the  characters  produced  by  successive  trial  to  write  Sep- 
tember : 


When  two  lessons  only  are  learned,  the  first  character  will  be 
produced;  when  six  lessons  are  learned,  the  second  character; 
eleven  lessons,  the  third;  thirteen  lessons,  the  fourth;  twenty-four 
lessons,  the  fifth ;  and  twenty-five  lessons,  the  sixth.  The  last  only 
is  correct.  The  practice  of  representing  this  word  by  five  different 
and  erroneous  outlines,  makes  it  the  more  difficult  afterwards  to 
impress  the  right  one  upon  the  mind ;  and  when  the  word  is  to  be 
written,  the  reporter  is  confused  and  bewildered  by  the  jumble  of 
forms  his  recollection  calls  up.  It  has  been  the  aim  in  preparing 
this  work  to  entirely  do  away  all  cause  for  the  criticism  justly  pass- 
ed on  other  instruction  books,  that  words  and  phrases  were  intro- 
duced merely  for  the  student's  practice,  and  Avritten  in  a  dozen 
erroneous  waj^s  before  the  proper  outlines  Avere  taught. 

The  Reporting  Field.  Although  this  art  was  originally  devised 
as  a  means  of  preserving,  word  for  word,  the  speeches  of  great 
orators,  and  the  proceedings  of  legislatures  and  courts,  it  has  been 
found  far  more  valuable  as  a  means  of  expediting  commercial 
transactions.  While  the  services  of  an  expert  reporter  are  alwaj-s 
in  demand,  there  are  at  present  more  frequent  calls  for  secretaries 
who  are  able  to  write  with  a  moderate  degree  of  speed  only.  The 
verbatim  stenographer  must  be  able  to  write  one  hundred  and  sev- 
enty-five to  two  hundred  words  a  minute,  and  it  is  his  business  to 
report  speeches,  and  record  the  proceedings  of  courts  and  thf 
various  kinds  of  public  assemblies.  Plis  aimual  income  ranges 
from  one  to  four  thousand  dollars.  Short-hand  secretaries  arc  em- 
ployed by  all  kinds  of  business  houses,  companies,  and  corporations : 
also,  by  authors,  ministers,  lawyers,  and  professional  men  geniT- 
ally.  Amanuenses  must  be  able  to  write  one  hundred  to  one  hun- 
dred and  fifty  words  a  minute;  and  they   receive   as   compensation 


INTRODUCTIOX.  IX 

from  sixty  to  one  hundrec"  and  fift}'  dollars  a  montli.  Ladies  are 
frequently  employed  in  this  capacity.  There  is  a  large  and  ever 
increasing  demand  for  slvilled  short-hand  writers.  They  succeed 
best  who  are  gifted  with  mental  quickness,  and  wlio  have  good 
memories,  the  kind  especiall}'^  which  enables  them  to  recognize  old 
faces.  These  faculties,  with  perseverance,  will  enable  any  intelli- 
gent young  person  to  acquire  skill  enough  in  a  few  months  for 
amanuensis  work. 

Experience  shows  that  this  art  can  be  successfully  learned  by 
both  old  and  young.  Those  receiving  instruction  at  the  University 
School  of  Short-hand  range  in  age  from  twelve  to  fifty. 

Students  who  wish  to  perfect  themselves  in  the  shortest  time 
possible,  may  do  so  by  applying  to  the  author,  who  will  furnish 
personal  instruction  by  mail,  and  assist  them,  when  competent,  in 
obtaining  situations. 

Short-hand  is  not  only  valuable  as  a  profession;  it  is  equally  use- 
ful as  an  accomplishment.  No  thinking  man  can  afford  to  be  with- 
out this  rapid  method  of  transferring  his  thoughts  to  paper.  By 
means  of  it,  first  draughts  of  letters  and  articles  are  made,  and 
notes  of  lectures,  business  transactions,  and  private  memoranda 
recorded,  much  more  fully  and  in  but  a  fraction  of  the  time  other- 
wise required.  Its  great  utility,  both  as  a  discipline  and  personal 
convenience,  is  abundantly  attested  by  literary  men  of  note  who  are 
skilled  in  its  use. 

The  learner  must  bear  in  mind  at  the  outset,  that  short-hand  is 
something  ^^mc^jcrtZ,  and  that  no  matter  how  carefully  the  theory  is 
studied,  he  will  gain  but  little  proficiency  if  he  does  not  at  the 
same  time  learn  to  form  the  cliaracters  quickly  and  well,  and  read 
his  notes  fluently.  The  common  method  of  learning  all  the  princi- 
ples before  any  effort  is  made  at  rapid  writing,  is  but  a  waste  of 
time.  It  is  more  difflcult  to  execHfe  than  to  memorize  the  chai'ac- 
ters ;  hence,  directions  as  to  the  work  of  getting  up  speed  are  given 
early  in  the  course.  Those  who  intend  making  this  art  a  business, 
should  practice  upon  each  exercise  until  it  can  be  written  in  the 
time  specified.  The  skill  gained  in  this  way  will  be  sufii- 
cient  for  ordinary  amanuensis  work.  Some  will  rise  above,  and 
otiiers,  especially  if  under  sixteen,  will  necessarily  fall  below  the 
speed  here  indicated. 


X  IXTRODUCTIOX. 

Reading  Practice.  The  amount  of  this  that  may  be  necessary  will 
depend  on  yourself.  If  you  read  your  own  writing  with  difficulty, 
you  should  practice  only  so  much  the  more.  Those  who  employ 
their  time  mainly  in  writing,  with  a  view  of  gaining  speed,  produc- 
ing inaccurate  and  misshapen  characters  which  they  rarely  attempt 
to  read,  may  rest  assured  that  they  are  making  progress  backward 
instead  of  forward.  When  all  the  list  words  of  a  single  lesson  have 
been  carefully  written,  they  should  then  be  read  over  and  over 
again,  until  the  whole  can  be  rendered  in  the  time  indicated  by  the 
following  table : 


LESSON   I.— Im. 

LESSON   XII.— 4i.^m. 

LESSON   XXIII.— 2m. 

II.— Im. 

XIII.— 5m. 

XXIV.— Im. 

•      "          III.— 3in. 

XIV.— 2^m. 

XXV.—  4m. 

IV.— 2m. 

XV.— l!.^m. 

XXVI.— 5m. 

v.— 5m 

XVI.— 2m. 

XXVII.— 3m. 

VI.— Om. 

XVII.— !^m. 

XXVIII.— 4ii^m. 

VII.— 4m. 

XVIII.— %m. 

XXIX.— i^m. 

VIII.— 3m. 

XIX.— 3m. 

XXX.— 4m. 

IX.— 3m. 

XX.— SJ^m. 

XXXI.— 5m. 

X.— 2m. 

XXI.— 4m. 

XXXII.— i^m. 

XI.— 2J^m. 

XXll.—l]4m. 

LONG  AND  SHORT  HAND  COMPARED. 


One  is  written  six  times  faster  than  the  other;  and  there  are  six 
general  principles  by  which  the  common  method  of  writing  is 
abbreviated,  six  steps,  so  to  speak,  in  the  ladder  leading  from  the 
long  up  to  the  short-hand  system. 

I.  A  letter  for  a  sound.  In  dotigh  but  two  sounds  are  heard,  those 
of  d  and  o;  nevertheless  fl\'e  letters,  d-o-u-g-h,  are  employed  to 
express  them.     In  short-hand  but  two  letters  are  required,  one  for 

each  sound,  thus  j-  dough. 

II.  A  single  stroke  for  a  letter.  The  long-hand  ez  is  written 
with  five  strokes  of  the  pen,  while  the  short-hand  |  d  requires  but 
one;  tiie  long-hand  ir- requires  four  strokes,  the  short-hand  -  o 
but  one. 


INTRODUCTIOX.  XI 

III.  Omission  of  voioels.  Iii  short-hand,  much  less  than  one 
per  cent,  of  the  vowels  are  actually  written,  but  a  number  sufficient 
to  secure  legibility  are  indicated  by  the  manner  of  writing  the  con- 
sonant signs.  The  consonant  elements  of  a  word  maybe  expressed 
by  several  different  outlines,  the  particular  one  selected  being  de- 
termined by  the  number  of  vowels  contained,  and  the  order  in  which 
they  occur.  Hence,  in  reading  short-hand,  it  becomes  an  easy 
matter  to  supply  those  vowels  upon  which  the  choice  of  the  char- 
acters made  use  of  dii'ectly  depended.  Each  of  the  following  char- 
acters, for  example,  express  the  consonants  s-p-r-t,  being  the  same 
which  occur  in  the  cori'esponding  words : 

Sprite,        spirit,  sprout,  sprat,  sport,        separate, 


■^ "- -^ ■^■ 


•^ -^' -l -A- Jx- 


^ ")■ 


support,  Sparta,  aspirate,  asperity,        sea-port. 

In  sprite,  sprout,  sport,  and  Sparta,  the  vowels  are  written.  Spirit 
and  sprat,  although  written  alike,  are  distinguished  by  the  positions 
which  they  occupy  with  reference  to  the  base  line.  The  characters 
for  the  remaining  words  all  differ  from  each  other,  the  particular 
outline  chosen  in  each  case  indicating  the  number  and  position  of 
vowels  to  be  supplied.  Thus  each  character  is  rendered  legible, 
although  the  consonants  only  are  actually  written.  This  principle 
may  be  illustrated  in  part  by  omitting  the  vowels  from  a  printed 
sentence,  which  will  nevertheless  be  found  easily  decipherable: 
G-d  s-  -d   1-t  th-r-   b-  1-ght,  -nd  th-r-  w-s  1-ght. 

IV.  Th:  use  of  brief  word  signs.  A  large  number  of  abbrevia- 
tions are  used  in  long-hand,  as  Dec,  lb.,  §,  Dr.,  U.  8.,  Hon.,  etc. 
Likewise  in  short-hand,  brief  characters,  called  word-signs,  are  em- 
ployed; e.  g.  xohich  is  signified  by  the  sign  for  /  ch  simply,  think 
by  the  sign  for  (_  th,  etc.  These  short-hand  signs  are  provided  for 
the  most  frequently  recurring  words  only,  as  ^  have,  \  before, 
f~  trill,  " — '  thing,  ^  has,  and  ^  ichat,  which  is  not  true  of  long- 
hand abbreviations. 


Xii  INTRODUCTION. 

V.  Phraseography,  or  joining  loords  together.  lu  loug-haud,  the 
pen  is  lifted  from  tlie  paper  upon  the  completion  of  each  word.  In 
short-hand,  from  three  to  ten  -words  are  written  before  this  is  nec- 
essary; e.  g.: 

It-is-better        to-have-a      lion         at-the-head    of-an-army    of  sheep 


•-W t,--'-^- k^ 


-<■ 


??^kr:^ a. 


than-a      sheep         at-the-head  of-an-army  of-lions 

VI.  The  use  of  expedients.  The  most  frequently  recurring 
phrases  are  represented  by  brief  signs  which  express  two  or  more 
of  the  principal  words  of  each,  thus: 

,       ...» /, 

In-order-to,  hand-in-hand,  on-the-other-Uaud,  from-tlme-to-tlme,  day-after-day. 

GENERAL  DIRECTIONS. 

1.  Hold  your  pen  in  a  position  very  nearly  upright. 

2.  Always  write  on  ruled  paper. 

3.  Use  a  short-nibbed  pen  Avith  moderately  sharp  point.  Gillott, 
Nos.  303  and  404..  the  Esterln'ook  school  pen,  and  some  Nos.  of  the 
Speucerian,  are  recommended.  The  pen  with  which  you  can  pro- 
duce the  most  satisfactory  Avork  is  the  one  best  suited  to  your  hand 
and  style  of  Avriting.  Jet  black,  easily  flowing  ink  should  be  used, 
and  the  bottle  kept  corked.  Carter's  koal  black  ink  is  recommended. 

4.  Read  over  at  least  once  everything  you  write. 

5.  Do  not  allow  a  day  to  pass  Avithout  devoting  some  time  to 
practice,  if  only  a  fcAV  minutes. 

0.  Rigidly  abstain  from  practicing  on  words  and  sentences  not 
found  in  the  lessons  Avhich  have  been  learned. 

7.  It  is  very  important  that  you  Avrite  the  exercises  as  they  are 
distinctly  read  to  you.  A  felloAV  student,  Avho  has  an  interest  in  the 
Avork  himself, Avill  generally  prove  most  serviceable  for  this  purpose. 
The  habit  of  Avriting  by  sound,  that  is,  recordhig  Avords  that  are 


INTRODUCTIOX.  XIU 

hPMvd  rather  than  merely  seen,  is  simply  indispensal)le  to  the  student 
who  intends  using  short-hand  for  reporting  purposes. 

8.  About  one-third  of  the  time  set  apart  for  reading  should  be 
spent  in  translating  exercises  written  one  or  two  v.eeks  previously. 

9.  In  writing  an  exercise  for  the  first  time  you  should  form  the 
characters  slowly.  When  you  have  executed  the  whole  in  a  proper 
manner,  copy  it  over  and  over  again  until  you  can  write  it  at  the 
specified  rate  of  .speed. 

10.  The  learner  cannot  become  too  familiar  with  the  manner  of 
wi'itiug  the  words  given  in  these  lists,  as  they  are  always  expressed 
by  the  same  chai'acters  which  here  denote  them.  The  word  and 
phrase  signs  given  in  the  vocal)ulary  should  be  thoroughly  learned. 

11.  The  student  should  give  especial  attention  to  phraseography, 
as  this  important  part  of  the  system  is  often  neglected. 

12.  Beginners  commonly  write  the  characters  too  large.  The 
standard,  one-sixth  of  an  inch,  should  be  as  closely  adhered  to  as 
possible.  This  size  of  writing  can  best  be  secured  by  making  use 
of  stenographic  practice  books  such  as  are  supplied  by  the  Report- 
ers' Bureau. 

13.  When  practicing,  the  note-book  or  paper  should  be  held  firm 
by  placing  the  thumb  and  first  fingers  of  the  left  hand  one  or  two 
inches  above  the  line  of  writing. 

14.  After  thirty-six  lessons  are  learned  the  student's  practice 
need  not  be  limited  to  the  exercises  here  given,  but  easy  news- 
paper articles,  the  prose  part  of  school  readers,  printed  collections 
of  business  letters,  and  published  reports  of  law  and  convention 
proceedings,  may  be  profitably  used  for  this  purpose.  Great  care 
should  be  taken  to  write  each  article  properly  the  first  time,  and  to 
rewTite  it  afterwards  not  less  than  three  or  four  times  Avith  gradu- 
ally increased  speed. 

15.  Carry  a  list  of  word  and  phrase  signs,  and  a  copy  of  5^our 
last  written  exercise,  in  your  pocket,  to  read  over  and  memorize  at 
leisure  moments. 

10.  In  making  memoranda,  or  in  corresponding  with  those  who 
understand  them,  you  should  employ  the  short-hand  characters  as 
fast  as  learned. 

17.     You  will  find  the  study  more  interesting,  and  progress  faster, 


Xiv  INTRODUCTION. 

b.y  having  a  fellow  student  with  whom  to  meet  at  slated  times  for 
practice. 

18.  Not  only  can  a  more  lively  interest  in  the  work  be  kept  up, 
but  real  advantage  is  gained,  by  students  corresponding  with  each 
other  in  the  stenographic  characters.  The  author,  when  applied 
to,  will  be  pleased  to  introduce  those  wishing  to  enter  into  such  an 
arrangement 


Note.— The  attention  of  the  student  is  called  to  the  explanation 
of  our  method  of  giving  lessons  by  mail  and  of  instructing  cor- 
respondence classes,  found  at  the  close  of  the  book. 


The  Reporting  Style  of  Short-Hand. 


LESSON     I. 


1. 


CONSONANT  ALPHABET,  SEC.  i. 

5.  chay      /     choice,  each. 

6.  jay      /     joy,  gem,   edge. 

7.  kay       kite,  lack. 

8.  gay       go,  log. 


1.  pe  \  pit,  lip. 

2.  be  ^^  boat,  tub 

3.  te       I  top,   mat 

4.  de      I  do,  sad. 


2.  Each  of  the  short -hand  letters  here  given  represents  an  ele- 
mentary consonant  sound,  and  has  a  force  equivalent  to  the  full- 
faced  type  in  the  corresponding  words.  Each  is  to  be  used  when- 
ever, and  only  ivhen,  its  particular  sound  is  heard.    The  character 

\  pe,  for  example,  signifies  the  breath  sound  of  p  in  pie  or  ape, 
and  is  employed  only  when  this  occurs.  It  will  be  observed,  how- 
ever, that  this  sound  does  not  recur  as  frequentlj'-  as  the  common  or 
long-hand  p.  In  sophist,  for  example,  this  element  is  not  found, 
the  long-hand  p  being  taken  with  h  to  represent  the  force  of  /.  In 
copper,  this  sound  occurs  but  once,  the  first  p  being  used  merely  to 
indicate  that  o  is  short. 

3.  In  sound-writing,  only  as  many  letters  are  employed  as  there 
are  distinct  sounds  heard;  thus  fo,  foe,  na,  nay;  lo,  low;  felo,  fel- 
low; do,  dough;  fabl,  fable;  fonograf,  phonograph;  inikst,  mixed; 
kwil,  quill;  hwen,  when.  There  are  no  silent  letters,  as  b  in  lamb; 
no  unnecessary  letters,  as  x  and  c,  which  could  be  dispensed  with, 
X  having  the  force  as  ks,  as  in  tax,  or  of  gz,  as  in  example,  and  c 
that  comiuouly  of  either  s,  as  in  face,  or  k,  as  income;  sometimes 

(15) 


16  REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

of  sh,  as  in  vicious.  Hence  the  usual  manner  of  spelling  a  word  has 
nothing  lohatever  to  do  in  determining  the  way  in  which  it  is  written 
in  short-hand. 

4.  The  characters  which  express  the  consonant  sounds  of  a 
word,  when  written  In  the  order  in  which  they  occur,  are  called  its 
consonant  delineation.  For  example,  for  take,  te-kay  is  the  delinea- 
tion; for  jug,  jay-gay;  for  keg,  kay-gay;  etc. 

5.  These,  when  joined  or  written  together,  are  called  a  conso- 
nant outline,  as  in  betake,  or  digit.  This  should  be  executed  with- 
out lifting  the  pen  from  the  paper,  each  successive  letter  being 
written  in  its  proper  direction,  beginning  where  the  preceding  ends, 
thus, 

Book      deck      copy        betake         digit        cook 


jug        cage      check      dodge      jacket      judge 

6.  The  rule  for  placing  outlines  is  that  the  fimt  descending  letter 
should  rest  on  the  line.  This  requires  that  some  letters  be  written 
one  space  above,  as  —  kay  in  co2)y,  which  is  necessary  in  this  case,  in 
order  that    \  pe,  the  first  downward  letter,  may  rest  upon  it. 

7 .  Write  each  letter  longer  or  shorter  with  reference  to  a  fixed 
standard,  which  should  not  vary  much  from  the  sixth  of  an  inch. 
Assuming  j  te  to  be  the  standard,  all  other  ve'rtical  letters  should 
be  the  same  height.  Kay,  also,  should  be  the  same  length,  and  other 
horizontal  consonants  should  occupy  an  equal  space  along  the  line. 
All  slanting  letters  are  written  the  same  height  as  te,  their  length 
depending  on  the  degree  of  inclination. 

8.  The  side  of  a  square  in  the  stenographic  practice  book  is  one 
sixth  of  an  inch.  The  proper  length  for  I'jtters  is  secui'ed  by 
writing  each  only  as  long  as  the  square  will  allow,  as  shown  by  the 
figure : 


,i-^kJ 


CONSONANT   ALPHABET.  17 

9.  Caution. — The  student  is  apt,  at  first,  to  incline  te  and  de 
somewhat  to  the  right,  and  to  give  too  little  slant  to  inclined  letters. 
This  fault  may  be  overcome  by  writing  te,  and  other  upright  letters, 
so  as" to  correspond  with  the  vertical  lines  in  the  practice  book ; 
also,  by  writing  pe,  cliay,  and  other  slanting  letters  in  such  a  man- 
ner as  to  extend  diagonally  across  the  square. 

10.  The  first  six  letters  are  always  written  downward;  but  hori- 
zontal letters,  as kay  and  __  gay,   are  executed  from   left  to 

right. 

11.  Give  each  letter  its  proper  attitude,  as  follows:  j  te  and 
I  de,  vertical ;  \  pe  and  \  be,  right  slant;  /  chay  and/^  jay, 
left  slant,  at  an  angle  of  forty-five  degrees  with  the  horizontal. 
Care  should  be  taken  to  make  the  light  letters  thin  as  possible,  and 
the  heavy  ones  thick  enough  only  to  be  readily  distinguished  from 
the  light. 

12.  Each  letter,  when  standing  alone,  should  rest  on  the  line. 

13.  The  pen  should  be  held  between  the  thumb  and  first  and 
second  fingers,  not  far  from  the  nib,  and  in  a  nearly  upright  posi- 
tion, as  shown  in  the  first  figure.  The  practical  stenographer  will, 
however,  derive  rest  from  an  occasional  change  to  the  position 
shown  in  the  second  figure . 


14.  Copy  Sec.  1  of  the  alphabet  forty  to  fifty  times,  or  until  you 
can  make  every  character  accurately  soon  as  read  to  you. 

15.  The  student  will  observe  that  several  different  words  may 
have  the  same  outline,  as  te-kay  for  both  take  and  took,  gay-de  for 
guide  and  giddy,  be-gay  for  big  and  beg.  But  this  is  merely  acci- 
dental, and  no  ambiguity  results  from  it.  In  the  sentence,  for  in- 
stance, "ThnspiX         boysx         bread"  the  context  enables  the 

2 


18 


KEPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAXD. 


reader  to  determine  when  this  character  signifies  hirj  and  ■nhen  teg. 
Here  be-gay  denotes  first  an  adjective,  tlien  a  verb;  and  it  is  a  rule 
that  the  same  cliaracter  may  represent  two  or  more  different  parts 
of  speech  witliout  danger  of  ambiguity. 

EXERCISE  1. 
16.  Write  the  consonant  outlines  for  the  following  v/ords : 
Take,  deck,  pick,  check,  keep,  took,  deep,  guide,  dog,  jug,  do,  pay, 
up,  it,  be,  go,  cage,  ditch,  pig,  budge,  dodge,  pitch,  judge,  page, 
betake,  bedeck,  touch,  copy,  pity,  abate,  abode,  giddy,  body,  edit, 
book,  deputy,  jacket,  pocket,  bucket,  ducat.     (Twice  in  3  miu.) 


LESSON  II. 


CONSONANT  ALPHABET,   SEC.  2. 


17.9.  ef     v_  fan,  laugh,  physic. 

10.  ve    ^  vine,  love. 

11.  itli   (  think,  both. 

12.  the  (  them,  soothe. 

13.  as      ^,  so,  face. 

14.  ze    )  zeal,  was. 

15.  isli J  shall,  vicious. 

16.  zhe  _•  seizure,  pleasure. 


17.  lay  f^   light,  bell. 

IS.  ar  I    arm,  furrow. 

19.  em  ''    ^  nie,  him. 

20.  en    ^_>   no,  i.i. 

21.  ing  -^^     ing,  i  ili. 

22.  way     )    woe,  away. 

23.  yea  ^    your. 

24.  hay    /^  he. 


18.     Table  showing  directions  in  which  all  the  alphabetic  letters 
are  to  be  written : 

Downward:  W   |    \   /  /   \^\^  [  {   ))  J  J  ^-\  T 

To  the  right:    —  —  '^^  v_^  ^-^  ;  Upward:    (^   ^ 


COXSOXAXT  ALPHABET.  19 

19.  straight  letters  should  be  made  without  crook  or  curvature. 
Curves  should  be  bent  uniformly  throughout,  aud  the  thickened 
ones  allowed  to  taper  at  tlie  extremities. 

20.  The  student  should  spend  at  least  fifteen  minutes  a  daj^  for 
one  or  two  weeks  in  the  oral  outlining  of  words.  Beginning  with 
any  list  found  in  this  book,  first  pronounce  the  word  aloud,  and 
then  name  the  letters  in  the  order,  which,  if  written,  would  consti- 
tute its  consonant  delineation.  Thus,  system  would  be  spelled, 
es-es-te-em;  short-hand,  ish-ar-te-hay-eu-de;  stenography,  es-te- 
eu-gay-ar-ef ;  tax,  te-kay-es;  example,  gay-ze-em-pe-lay;  quill, 
kay-way-lay;  lohite,  hay-way-te;  erasure,  ar-zhe-ar. 

21.  Short-hand  is  very  different  from  a  mere  abbreviated  long- 
hand. In  writing  it  you  should  not  attempt  to  spell  out  words,  as 
you  do  in  long-hand,  but  simply  write  the  consonant  sounds  that 
are  actually  heard.  In  lodge  (lay-jay),  for  example,  there  is  no 
de;  in  bell  (be-lay),  there  is  but  one  lay;  in  arrow,  but  one  ar. 
Final  y  is  never  yea,  but  always  a  vowel.  (Vowels  will  be  explamed 
in  a  subsequent  lesson.) 

22.  In  common  long-hand  an  elementary  sound  is  sometimes 
represented  by  one  letter  aud  sometimes  by  another;  as,  for  exam- 
ple, the  force  of  f  is  also  given  to  ph.  But  in  short-hand  each 
distinct  sound  is  provided  with  a  separate  character,  which  always 
denotes  that  particular  sound,  and  can  never  denote  any  other. 

23.  The  perfect  adaptation  of  the  written  characters  to  the 
sounds  which  they  express  is  shown  in  part  by  the  following  exam- 
ples: The  two  similar  and  cognate  sounds,  \  pe  and  ^^  be,  are 
denoted  by  two  similar  characters,  the  aspirate  pe  being  appropri- 
ately expressed  by  a  light,  and  the  subvocal  be  by  a  shaded,  stroke. 
Be  differs  from  pe  only  in  point  of  shade,  which  is  sufficient  dis- 
tinction, since,  should  pe  be  shaded  too  much,  or  be  too  little,  no 
uncertainty  of  meaning  would  result;  e.  (/.,  the  sentence,  "It  is 
pest  to  bay  as  you  go,"  is  of  no  doubtful  signification.  The  same 
principle  applies  in  the  case  of  each  other  pair  of  cognates :  te  and 
de,  kay  and  gay,  ef  and  ve,  etc.  Also,  observe  that  the  explodents 
are  appropriately  expressed  by  straight  letters,  while  the  coutiuu- 
ents  and  liquids  are  indicated  by  curves. 

24.  Copy  Sec.   2  of  the  alphabet  many  times,  until  you  can 


20  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND, 

write  all  the  characters  readily  at  dictation.  Then  practice  on  the 
entire  alphabet  until  you  can  write  all  the  letters  in  proper  order 
from  memory. 

25.  Words  whose  outlines  are  horizontal,  as  make  (em-kay),  or 
mimic  (em-em-kay),  should  be  written  on  the  line. 

26.  EXEKCISE  2. 

Take  make  hotel  jug  bank  oral 

deluge        anthem        demolish      behead      Chicago      Louisiana. 

Arm,  mail,  neck,  early,  fail,  daily,  bill,  being,  bell,  lay,  may,  no, 
show,  own,  say,  so,  way,  became,  came,  deluge,  demolish,  avenge, 
mimic,  money,  name,  thick,  wake,  picnic,  polish,  shame,  among, 
ask,  death.  Ascending  letters,  when  initial,  should  begin  on  the 
line:  Lady,  love,  head,  heavy,  lake,  alarm,  also,  length,  long,  live. 
(2  min) . 


LESSON    III. 


WORD-SIGNS. 

Lay       el      ish    shay    hay  (not  thus)  Alabama  behead  duet  keg  annul  period 

Tj.c..4^...£-.'fr::.-<^...C^s::i-.ir.^.^.>!~ 

anatomy    nothing    asylum    fail    gypsy    ink    thumb    Asiatic    bishop. 

27.  Proper  names  are  underscored  with  a  double  dash,  as  in 
Alabama. 

28.  The   initial  tick  of  hay  should  be  written  in  a  horizontal 
position,  and  not  alloAved  to  incline  in  such  a  manner  as  to  form  a 


WORD-SIGXS.  21 

hook.  It  is  sometimes  inconvenient  to  write  this  tick  when  haj'  is 
medial.  lu  such  cases  it  is  indicated  merel}',  by  retracing  the  pre- 
ceding letter,  as  in  behead. 

29.  Such  words  as  duet  aud  kecj  are  written  witli  a  single  stroke 
of  the  pen,  and  should  taper  or  thicken  gradually. 

30.  The  liquid  I  is  sometimes  written  downward,  and  is  then 
called  el  to  distinguish  it  from  lay  (upward) .  Ish,  when  struck 
upward,  is  called  shay.  The  student  should  always  use  lay  and  ish, 
unless  el  or  shuy  is  specified. 

31.  One  of  the  purposes  in  sometimes  using  el  instead  of  lay, 
aud  shay  instead  of  ish,  is  to  secure  better  angles  at  their  junctures 
with  other  letters.  The  legibility  of  au  outline  depends  to  a  large 
extent  upon  its  angularity.  For  this  reason,  a  distinct  angle  should 
be  made  in  joining  ith  and  ef,  ef  and  en,  ith  and  ing,  as  in  nothing, 
and  other  letters  making  similar  junctions. 

32.  The  participial  ending,  i-n-g,  is  denoted  by  the  consonant 
^^iug. 

33.  Bern.  Legibility  in  short-hand  is  even  more  important 
than  speed ;  for  of  what  consequence  is  rapid  writing,  if  the  char- 
acters cannot  afterwards  be  read?  Legibility  depends  in  part  upon 
the  accurate  formation  of  the  characters;  but  in  order  that  a  char- 
acter may  be  formed  accurately,  it  is  not  necessary  to  write  it  slow- 
ly ;  on  the  contrary,  experienced  stenographers  produce  the  more 
perfect  outlines  with  a  somewha-t  rapid  movement,  just  as  an 
ornamental  penman  executes  the  most  graceful  curve  or  flourish 
with  a  quick  stroke,  rather  than  by  tediously  drawing  it.  The  stu- 
dent should  learn  from  the  flrst  to  write  the  characters  rather  than 
irnw  them.  It  is  a  loss  instead  of  gain  to  continue  forming  them 
slowly  in  order  to  secure  mathematical  precision. 

34.  The  learner's  method  should  be,  to  write  a  given  Avora 
slowly  several  times,  until  its  outline  is  well  fixed  in  the  mind; 
then  write  it  rapidly,  and  continue  doing  so  until  it  can  be  formed 
both  accurately  and  quickly. 

EXERCISE  3. 

35.  Wait,  botany,  bulk,  l)ehead,  bar,  damage,  depth,  deviate, 
dialogue,  effect,  eflicacy,  elligy,  epitome,  error,  escape,  wade,  fare. 


22 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 


farm,  obviate,  remedy,  policy,  agency,  apology,  milk,  army,  eclectic, 
delay,  am,  waking,  embody,  engage,  enough,  envy,  image,  inch,  in- 
demnify, inform,  ingenuity,  intimacy,  unto,  invoke,  involve,  shape, 
know,  month,  nominate,  nothing,  comic,  shadow,  share,  adore, 
allopathy,  arc,  assassin,  asylum,  azure,  bachelor,  baggage,  bath, 
below,  beneath,  betime,  both,  buffalo,  colleague,  cab,  cabbage, 
chaos,  delay,  demagogue,  detach,  detail,  dialect,  dig,  dilemma,  dish, 
dogma,  effeminate,  enigma,  dull,  epidemic,  aesthetic,  fair,  far,  fel- 
low, fetch,  fish,  gash,  gum,  gush,  gypsy,  hack,  hedge,  hitch,  honey, 
hook,  hush,  infect,  ink,  lavish,  levity,  link,  lodge,  log,  monk,  omit, 
pair,  pang,  pathetic,  ramify,  remove,  shake,  sham,  shove,  going, 
tank,  thief,  thumb,  tick,  timid,  top,  topic,  vacate,  fatigue,  Anthony, 
Jacob,  Lewis,  Matthew,  Timothy,  Fanny,  Lilly,  Lucy,  Dakota,  Dick, 
Jack,  Tennessee,  Alabama,  Louisiana,  Asiatic.  Using  shay  (up- 
ward), bishop;  using  el  (downward),  along,  denial,  vowel,  manual, 
annul.     (5  m.) 

36.  A  large  number  of  the  commonest  words  are  indicated  l)y 
brief  characters,  called  Word-signs.  These  are  merely  abbreviated 
forms  expressing  one  or  more  of  the  principal  sounds  of  the  words 
they  are  used  to  represent,— as  in  long-hand  are  the  abbreviations 
Rev.,  A.  D.,  P.  M.,  Co.,  Aus.,  etc.  These  are  not  arbitrary  charac- 
ters, but  express  some  of  the  leading  consonant  or  vowel  sounds  of 
the  words  for  which  they  stand. 

37.  Word-signs:    /  which, come,  V^  for,  ^  have,  i  they, 

them,  )  was,  _J  shall,  _J  usual-ly,  (^  will,  .^.  him,  (^  your, 
,^  together,  (   think,  \  object. 

Advantage 


language 
change 


dignity- 
essential 
faith-ful 


health 
income 
November 


efficient 
become 
chapter 

he 

help 

never 


38.  The  word- signs  cannot  be  too  thoroughly  committed  to 
memory,  since  the  words  they  represent  are  those  which  recur  the 
most   frequently.     Remember  always  to  use  the  proper  word-sign, 


PHRASEOGRAPHY.  23 

and  not  the  full  oiitliue,  ^Yhenever  any  sign-word  occurs;  e.  g. 
use  kay,  never  kay-em,  for  come;  chay,  not  hay-way-chay,  for 
which. 

39.  Write: 

..^.r...v.....c:..,.>...r....vz:....V2 

Will    your   big   hack  fetch    my   bulky     baggage  ? 

(6  times  in  1  m.) 

40.  TRAXSLATE. 


34 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SIIORT-IIAXD. 


LESSON    IV. 


41. 

Arc 
wreck 
ferry 

forehead 

tyranny 

are-many 

he-has-no 

will-you-come 

he-aaay-think 


RAY  (or  upward  R),  AND  PHRASEOGRAPHY. 


he-is- wrong 
are-you-ready. 


42.  For  the  purpose  of  securing  greater  speed,  angularitj'  of 
outline,  and  also  to  prevent  the  too  great  downward  tendency  of 
many  Avords,  the  liquid  B  is  also  written  with  an  upward  stroke, 
called  Bay.  This  character  is  precisely  like  hay  with  the  initial 
tick  omitted. 

43.  The  student  should  use  ray  in  all  cases  where  ar  is  not 
specified. 

44.  Using  ray,  write:  Ring,  road,  revive,  reveal,  revenue, 
teacly,  repeal,  rash,  rate,  range,  wreck,  wrong,  abhor,  apothecary, 
birth,  bureau,  arrive,  earth,  heretic,  mai'ch,  mark,  marry,  marriage, 
married,  memorial  (el),  merry,  admire,  memory,  mirror,  narrow, 
notary,  period,  perish,  rare,  rarify,  injury,  theory,  thorough,  torna- 
do, tyrann}^,  variety,  victory,  hurry,  ferry,  poetry,  Arizona,  dare, 
allegory  (el),  arch,  arduous,  burial  (ol),  bury,  carry,  cherry,  cohere, 
forehead,  forge,  harsh,  horror,  inferior,  morrow,  ravage,  red,  re- 
pair, repel,  retire,  revenge,  revoke,  revolve,  rich,  rush,  tard}',  ter- 
ror, torch,  upright,  urge,  vary,  verify,  votary,  wrath,  wretch,  noto- 
riety, Darius,  Ezra,  Mark,  Theodore,  Marion,  Mary,  Rachel,  Rosa, 
Ruth,   Barrett. 

45.  Rem.  Ray  is  more  quickly  Avritten,  and  much  oftener  used 
than  ar,  and  its  employmeut  more  frequently  secures  angularity  of 
outline. 

46.  Ar  is  always  used  before  em,  never  before  '^e  or  de,  and 
rarely  after  kay;  while  ray  is  used  after  eai,  and  befo>-e  en  and  ing. 

47.  In  beginning  an  outline,  it  is  evident  that  either  ar  or  ray 


PIIRASEOGRAPHY. 


25 


makes  a  distinct  augle  by  junction  -with  a  following  kay  or  gay. 
The  choice  in  such  cases  is  determined  in  favor  of  ar  by  the  fact  of 
a  preceding  vowel,  as  in  arc;  but  in  the  absence  of  such  vowel,  ray 
is  used,  as  in  loreck.  Ray  is  employed,  when  final,  if  followed  by  a 
vowel,  as  in  ferry. 

48.  WORD-SIGNS. 


In,   any 


is,  his 


s- 


notwithstanding 

are 

represent- ed 
irregular,  argue 


legible     f  / 


illegible 


/V. 


perform 


magnanimous 


New  Yorli  j[ 


majesty 


.:2. 


republic 


peculiar-ity 


PHRASEOGRAPHY. 


49.  In  short-hand,  two  or  more  commonly  recurring  words  are 
often  written  together,  without  the  pen  being  lifted  from  the  pa- 
per.   An  assom))l;ige  of  words  which  may  be  thus  joined,  is  called  a 


26  REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SIIOKT-IIAXD. 

phraseogram,  and  the  character  which  expresses  them,  a  plu-aseo- 
graph. 
Much  speed  is  gained  by  phrasing,  with  no  sacrifice  of  legibility. 


50.  PHRASEOGRAPHS. 


I-aay  -^ 1 l-guide 


_  I-am 


he-became  '  '       ^  ^  lie-wil! 


you-will        -d. ^^.  '  you-know 


51.  In  phraseographj',  only  half  the  sign  for  I  is  commonly 
written,  whichever  "tick"  makes  the  best  angle  witli  the  word  to 
whicli  it  is  joined;  e.  g.,  in  I-gidde,  the  downward  stroke  is  used; 
but  when  the  second  tick  is  employed,  it  is  invariably  struck  npioard, 
as  in  I-do.  With  es,  ze,  ish,  and  zhe,  the  whole  sign  for  I  should 
be  written,  as  in  I-say. 

■  52.  The  sign  for  /,  when  standing  alone,  or  when  it  begins  a 
phraseograph,  is  always  written  above  the  line,  and  the  words  com- 
bined with  it  must  adapt  themselves  to  its  position.  E.  g.,  I-am  is 
written  above  the  line,  although  am,  when  it  stands  alone,  is  placed 
upon  it. 

53.  He,  in  phraseography,  is  indicated  by  a  tick  precisely  like 
the  second  stroke  of  the  sign  for  I,  excepting  that  it  is  always  struck 
downward,  as  in  he-became. 

54.  When  this  stroke  does  not  make  an  angle  with  the  following 
word,  he  may  be  expressed  by  the  joined  hay,  written  half  its  usual 
length,  as  in  he-hurried. 

55.  He,  diffei-ent  from  /,  has  no  position  of  its  own,  but  adapts 
itself  to  that  of  the  word  to  which  it  is  joined.  E.  g.,  he-may  is 
written  on  the  line,  while  in  he-was  the  tick  is  necessarily  above 
the  line. 

56.  The  sign  for  yo^l  is  inverted  in  phraseography,  when  neces- 
sary to  secure  a  good  angle,  as  in  you-know 


PnUASEOGRAPIIY.  27 

57.  Are  is  expressed  by  ar  instead  of  ray,  when  angularity  re- 
quires, as  in  are-many. 

EXERCISE  4. 

58.  Join  tlie  words  connected  by  a  liyphen.  I-think,  you-are, 
I-am-going,  he-will-be,  he-has-no,  you-will-have-them,  he-may- 
arrive,  I-abhor,  I-perish,  I-delay,  you-represeut,  do-you-have, 
will-you-come. 

1.  He-may-think  he-is-wrong.  2.  Are-j-ou-ready?  3.  I-am- 
hiirrying  notwithstanding  your  delay.  4.  I-am-going-into  Xew- 
York.  5.  He-will  argue  it.  G.  I-shall  reform-them.  7.  I-tliink 
he-will-be  popular  enough  as  deputy.  8.  I-say  Tom  Avill-do 
nothing  for-them.  9.  I-will-inform-you  that-it-may-do  for-March, 
never  for-Noveniber.  10.  His  daily  income  will-make-him  rich 
enough.  11.  I-judge  that  Theodore  Avill  go-up  into  Dakota, 
Wyoming,  especially  Nevada.  12.  Among-so-many,  your  book 
will-havc-no  advantage.  13.  Ezra  Bari'ett  is  rather  peculiar. 
14.  They-may-never  do-so.  15.  Darius  will-never-march  any  reg- 
ular army  into  Arizona.  1(3.  As-you-may  know,  his  help,  as-usual, 
is  efficient.     (4  m.) 

59.  Will-you-keep-}-our  November-magazine  for  Mark  Mere- 
dith ?     (4  times  in  1  m.) 

60.  TR^VXSLATE 

0 


,.^..I^....^...:^..:r::::'..<::^.^..r^^<^^ 

..\^....:^..£..-^...C:^..'-^...6r^...^.^. 


.a..f\^..(\^. 


6„ 


^_-p 


28  REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAXD. 

LESSON    V. 


LONG  VOWELS. 

61. 

SCALE. 

r     e  in  me 

j  ~    aw  in  law 

•     a  "  make 

j~    0      "     ope 

.     a  "  father 

\m    00    "    boot 

..lJL 


key 


peak 


V--^ 


park 


pshaw 


62.  The  six  long  vowels  are  denoted  by  a  shaded  dot  and  dash, 
placed  heside  the  consonant  signs  at  three  different  points',  called 
the  first,  second  and  tJiird  vowel  places,  being  respectively  at  the 
begiiming,  middle,  and  end  of  the  jconsonant.steni.  The  long  sound 
of  e  is  expressed  by  placing  the  large  dot  in  the  first  place,  or  at  the 
beginning  of  the  consonant,  as  in  eat  or  key;  the  sound  of  o,  l)y 
writing  the  dash  in  the  second  place,  or  at  the  middle  of  the  letter,  as 
in  oak. 

63.  These  arc  tleiioinrhated  ;/?rs<,  second,  and  third  place  vowels, 
according  as  they  occupy  the  first,  second,  or  tliird  vonel  positions. 


LONG  VOWELS.  29 

64.  Vowels  placed  above  the  horizontal,  or  at  the  left  of  the 
upright  and  slanting  signs,  are  read  Ijefore  them,  as  in  oak  and  eat. 
When  placed  below,  or  at  the  right  of  theni,  thej'  are  read  after- 
ward, as  in  key  and  hoe. 

65.  Dash  vowels  should  invariably  be  written  perpendicularly  to 
the  consonants  beside  which  they  are  placed,  as  in  oak  and  raio. 

66.  A  word  is  said  to  be  vocalized  wdien  the  vowel  signs  are  add- 
ed to  its  outline.  The  Nominal  Consonant  is  any  letter,  as  te  or 
chay,  cancelled,  its  office  being  simply  to  indicate  position,  when 
Avords  having  no  consonant  are  to  be  written,  as  ah  and  awe. 

67.  Vocalize:  Eat,  ate,  tea,  toe,  ace,  saw,  sea,  low,  oaf,  foe, 
oak,  ache,  key,  coo,  gay,  aid,  dough,  awl,  ale,  lea,  ape.  Foe,  paw, 
Joe,  shoe,  eve,  thaw,  p.shaw,  jaw,  fee,  aim,  ma,  woe,  hoe,  gnaw, 
knee,  nay,  Esau,  row,  raw,  oar,  era,  ado,  age,  ah,  aught,  awe,  bay, 
bee,  fee,  hay,  Jew,  low,  oat,  ode,  sew,  sue. 

68.  In  the  following  words  the  vowel  occurs  between  two  con- 
sonants, and  should  be  placed  beside  the  first,  as  in  peak  and  coach. 

First  place  vowels :  Beat,  cheek,  chalk,  heap,  heed,  tall,  leaf, 
league,  leap,  meal,  peal,  ball,  beach,  beak,  beam,  beer,  hawk, 
kneel  (el),  leak,  peach,  peak,  reap,  sheep,  team,  teeth,  wreath, 
wreathe,  Neal  (el),  Paul,  Maud. 

69.  Second  place  :  Cake,  coach,  coal,  comb,  dale,  dame,  bail, 
bowl,  cape,  joke,  fame,  gale,  game,  jail,  choke,  knave,  lame,  loaf, 
nail  (el),  pole,  porch,  tale,  tame,  vale,  yoke,  abate,  bore,  roam  (ar), 
rogue,  rope,  babe,  bait,  pale,  dome,  goal,  loathe,  mail,  pail,  poke, 
pope,  rake,  robe,  tail,  tape,  vague.  Job. 

70.  Third-place  vowels  should  be  written  beside  the  second  of 
the  two  consonants  between  which  they  occur,  as  in  coop  :  Pool, 
tool,  root,  balm,  boom,  calm,  rood,  touib ;  (using  ar)  lark,  tar,  czar, 
tour,  jar. 

71.  Using  only  the  long  vowels:  Antique,  aurora  (ar),  bouquet, 
foliage,  elate,  jubilee,  oatmeal,  parade,  pillow,  pony,  potato,  up- 
roar, yellow,  Ada,  Cora,  Edith,  Eva,  Laura,  Nora,  lower  (ar) . 

72.  The  lists  of  words  given  in  this  book  as  a  rule  should  not 
be  vocalized,  except  in  special  cases  where  one  or  two  vowels  are 
required  to  render  an  outline  unambiguous.  Isolated  words  com- 
monly require  vocalization. 

73.  Rem.     Only  one  out  of  many  hundred  vowels  is  actually 


30  KEPORTIXG   STYLE   OF   SHOKT-HAND. 

■wi'itten  in  short-hand;  but  enough  more  are  indicated  by  the  man- 
ner of  combining  the  consonant  signs  to  malie  the  system  entirely 
legible. 

The  possibility  of  reading  from  the  consonants  alone  may  be 
shown  by  the  fact  that  a  page  of  print  is  easily  decipherable,  all  the 
vowels  having  been  previousl}'  blotted  out;  for  not  only  would  the 
spaces  remain  which  set  off  the  words,  but  those  also  which  indi- 
cate where  vowels  are  to  be  supplied.  This  crudely  illustrates  the 
method  employed  in  short-hand. 

74.  A  thorough  acquaintance  with  the  vowel  signs  is  essential, 
nevertheless ;  that  they  may  be  written  quickly  in  the  few  instances 
in  which  they  are  used,  and  that  the  principles  of  consonant  combi- 
nation by  which  they  are  indicated,  may  be  understood.  The  long 
vowels,  especially,  should  be  well  memorized,  since  they  are  em- 
ployed much  more  frequently  than  the  short. 

75.  The  rule  for  placing  vowels  between  two  consecutive  con- 
sonants must  not  be  neglected ;  otherwise  a  vowel  might  be  placed 
at  the  angle  of  two  letters,  which  would  occasion  ambiguity;  e.g., 
pe-ray,  with  a  large  dot  written  within  the  angle,  thus  X^/ ,  may 
be  read  either  par  or  peer. 

76.  Caution.  The  student  must  not  forget  that  short-hand  is 
written  by  sound.  Vowels,  in  the  sense  here  used,  do  not  refer  to 
the  letters  a,  e,  i,  etc.,  but  to  the  vocal  sounds  that  are  actually 
heard  in  the  distinct  utterance  of  any  word.  Hence,  to  write  a 
word  properly,  no  regard  whatever  should  be  had  to  its  spelling. 
In  yoke,  for  instance,  there  is  but  one  vowel,  that  of  o  long;  final  e, 
being  silent,  is  not  represented.  A  good  plan  is  to  speak  each  word 
aloud  before  Avriting  it ;  or,  better  still,  to  have  the  lists  distinctly 
pronounced  to  you  by  another  person. 

77.  The  first  vowel  position  being  at  the  beginning  of  the  con- 
sonant, first-place  vowels  should  be  written  at  the  top  of  downward 
letters,  as  in  psliaio,  and  at  the  bottom  of  the  upward,  as  in  raio. 

78.  As  a  rule,  the  vocalized  words  given  in  this  and  the  two 
following  lessons  should  always  be  Avritten  with  the  vowels. 

79.  To  this,  however,  exceptions  are  sometimes  made,  especial- 
ly in  verbatim  reporting,  Avhere  time  does  not  allow ;  also,  in  cases 
where  any  particular  word  occurs  frequently  in  the  same  report, 
and  for  which  the  simple  outline  would  be  unmistakable. 


LONG  VOWELS.  31 

80.  WORD-SIGNS. 

rpjjg  •         •  already 

an,  and 


all 
too,  two 

* 
1 

ought 
before,  oh 

of 
who 

on  (upward) 
should  (upward 

---     — 

1 

1 

or 
but 

to 

81.  PHRASEOGRAPHS. 

the-loaf  \/^     V   .        \^^^       the-porch 


a-gulde 

82.  Any  one  of  the  three  ticks  which  denote  I  or  he  may  be  used 
to  indicate  the,  that  one  always  being  selected  which  secures  the 
best  angle.  This  sign,  when  it  represents  the,  invariably  adapts 
itself  to  the  position  of  the  word  to  which  it  is  joined;  e.  g.,  in 
the-loaf,  it  rests  on  the  line,  while  in  the-porch,  it  is  one  space 
above.  No  ambiguity  can  result  from  the  use  of  the  same  sign  for 
the  article  the,  and  the  i)ronouns  /and  he. 

83.  A,  an,  and,  are  all  denoted  in  phraseography  by  a  brief  tick, 
written  horizontally  or  vertically  (downward),  as  angle  may  re- 
quire, as  in  a-book-and  a-guide. 

84.  The  dot,  or  vowel  word-signs  for  a,  and,  an,  and  the  are 
rarely  used;  only  when  the  tick  does  not  make  a  good  angle. 

EXERCISE  5. 

85.  The-day,  the-object,  the-usual,  the-many,  the-name,  the- 
bishop,    the-shadow,   the-chapter,    the-essential,   and-it,  and-do, 


32 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHOKT-HAXD. 


and-go,  and-make,  and-will,  and-know,  and-rcpresent,  and-be, 
and-the,  aud-never,  a-cliauge,  a-cliapter,  a-tornado,  a-ratlier,  au- 
illegible,  and-j'ou-may,  and-lie-ma.v,  and-I-may,  and-I-will, 
a-lake-and-a-farm,  a-loug-delay,  he-lias-come-to  take-the-maga- 
zine. 

1.  The-day  is  coming,  and-you-may-look-for-a  victory  before- 
long.  2.  Should-you-comc-to-day,  Maud  and-Laura  will-make- 
a  bouquet  and-au  antique  foliage  wreath  for-you.  3.  Are-you- 
going-to-go-to  sea  to-day?  4.  Paul,  take-your  oar  and-go-and 
row  a-league.  5.  The-knave  is-taking  coal  iuto-tbe  coach. 
6.  They-have-a  tall  coop  in-the  park.     (4  m.) 

86.  Cora,  you-may-go-aud  help  Laura  make  oatmeal  cake  for 
tea.     (6  times  iu  2  m.) 


87.  TRANSLATE. 

..«....^..-rr::..."r?r...u.Sc.,.^./..*...-?f.><...lr:?:. 
,^.x\„v<:^...v:..^....A ,(j. 

..■^.X.Vr<K.V..^.»'....fe.C 

.•:Ct7rT...Vr...,?-./.I....l\:.:w,.rl.T:rr:r..W..i:r 


DIPHTHONGS   AND   THE   S-CIRCLE. 


33 


LESSON    VI. 


DIPHTHONGS  AND  THE  S-CIRCLE. 
88. 

Cow  .rrrr^./lL. on 

zinc  -4^----'i^r...-  zeal 

ooze  Sr^ -if. sea 

viola  "^--.'^rT.Vrssj..  surveyor 

type  I            \                           boy 

vow  V^A \  wire 

sense  ^ J>  \/  spell 

search  __0^/            <^                   goes 

T   C 

seed  I         >vp voice 

'  X/'^  ^^''^'^^^    Tom's   bells  ring. 

89.  Write  the  following  exercise,  using  the  diphthongs  7,  as  in 
type^  oil  3.S  in  hoxj.,  ow,  as  in  vow,  and  the  triphthong  xvi,  as  in 
10  ire. 

Tie,  t3'pe,  pipe,  vile,  knife,  mile,  defy,  boy,  boil,  coil,  oil,  Illinois 

(el-eu-oi),  foil,  row,  vow,  wire,  toy,  vouch,  Guy,  buy,  chime,  couch, 

cow,  coy,  dike,  foul,  hide,  nigh,  owl,  fowl,  pike,  pile,  rhyme,  shy, 

sigh,  spike,  dye,  thigh,  tire,  toil,  annoy,  diet,  envoy,  loyal,  roj'al, 

3 


34  REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SH0RT-HA>:D. 

Isaac,  sour  (ar) .    Using  long  vowels  also :     assignee,  voyage,  Ely, 
Elijah,  Eliza,  Ida,  Myra,  Viola. 

THE    S-CIRCLE. 

90.  Es  and  ze  are  denoted  in  outlines  by  a  small  circle.  This, 
when  joined  to  curved  letters,  is  written  within,  or  following  the 
direction  of  the  curve,  as  in  sense. 

91.  AVhen  joined  to  straight  letters,  the  circle  is  always  written 
upon  the  right  of  downward  letters,  as  in  s2)ell;  on  the  left  of 
upward  letters,  as  in  search;  and  upper  side  of  horizontal  letters, 
as  in  goes.  When  the  circle  is  initial,  it  is  read  before  the  vowels, 
as  in  seed,  and  when  final,  after  them,  as  in  voice. 

92.  TABLE   OF    S-CIRCLE   JOININGS. 

This  table  should  be  copied  many  times,  until  the  student  can 
without  taking  thought,  join  the  circle  properly.  Written  exercises 
should  also  be  compared  with  it  every  day,  uutil  errors  cease  to  be 
found.  When  joined  to  straight  letters,  the  circle  is  executed 
from  right  to  left,  as  the  letter  o  is  written  in  long-hand.  This 
rule  will  enable  the  student  to  test  the  accuracy  of  his  own  work. 
For  convenience  in  teaching,  these  characters  are  sometimes  named, 
spe,  pes,  seb,  bes,  ste,  tes,  sed,  des,  sef,  efs,  sev,  sith,  sel,  sem, 
ways,  &c. 

Es  and  ze,  being  cognates,  are  both  represented  by  a  single  sign, 
namely,  the  circle,  with  no  danger  of  ambiguity, 

93.  The  circle  is  not  employed,  however,  to  denote  ze,  when 
initial,  as  in  zeal,  zinc,  zoology,  the  full  length  consonant  being  used 
instead. 

94.  The  possessive  or  plural  of  a  word,  which  is  formed  in 
long-hand  by  the  addition  of  s  or  es,  is  formed  in  short-lunid  by 
affixing  the  s-cii'cle  to  its  word-sign  or  outline;  e.g.,  Tom^s  bells 
ring. 

95.  Es  and  ze,  when  standing  alone,  as  in  ooze  or  sea,  cannot 
be  represented  by  the  circle,  which  it  is  impossible  to  vocalize. 

96.  Using  the  s- circle,  write:  Case,  face,  save,  safe,  sale,  sake. 


BIPIITIIOXGS   AND   THE   S-CIRCLE.  35 

said,  same,  eminence,  endorse,  famous,  flx,  harness,  immense, 
less,  Sabbath,  safety,  savage,  scale,  sell,  senate,  sense,  sketch, 
small,  smith,  son,  smoke,  solid,  slave,  suppose,  spell,  study,  sin, 
Sunday,  space,  this,  yes,  honesty,  Saturday,  alliance,  announce, 
apologize,  assets,  audacious,  avarice,  cell,  cemeterj',  debase,  deli- 
cious, depose,  devise,  diffuse,  dubious,  factious,  fictitious,  notice, 
obvious,  paradise,  sex,  sink,  skip,  sledge,  slim,  sling,  slip,  spare, 
spark,  spool,  such,  sun,  surface,  surge,  surpass,  sur\^ey,  surveyor, 
survive,  swallow,  swing,  Swiss,  switch,  twice,  valise,  various,  vase, 
vex,  wages,  wax,  Horace,  James,  Marcus,  Nicholas,  Rufus,  Samuel, 
Thomas,  Stella;  (using  ar)  cellar,  circuitous,  severe,  Cffisar, 
enforce,  force. 

97.  Vocalize:  Lace,  seal,  seat,  site,  slow,  snow,  sail,  choose, 
dose,  abase,  choice,  geese,  gaze,  score,  spoil,  stay,  vice,  pause, 
voice,  invoice,  nice,  noise,  spj',  ail,  soul,  chase,  cheese,  dice,  entice, 
race,  sage,  sauce,  siege,  skj-,  slay,  sleeve,  slope,  sly,  snail,  snake, 
soap,  sole,  spire,  stale,  sty,  repose,  sway,  Maurice,  Miles,  Saul, 
Sarah;  (using  ar)  soar,  sore. 

98.  WORD-SIGXS. 

How,  '  high,  j^  its,  \^  several.  Savior,  \  special,  \  subject, 
^  advantageous. 

EXERCISE  C. 

99.  1.  That  boy  of -yours  makes  enough  noise.  2.  Do-you-say 
he-is  going-to  tie  the-rope  to-the  cow's  neck?  3.  He-ought-to- 
make  less  noise,  so-that-he-may-keop  his  seat  in-the-Senate. 
4.  May  honesty  be-your  policy  notwithstanding  your  name-may 
become  less  famous.  5.  I-will-help-you  take-an  invoice  of  all- 
your-stock.  6.  You-should-never  for-any  reason,  or-ou-any-day, 
make-a  foolish  vow.  7.  Do-you  indorse  the-study  of-such-a- 
subject  as-this?  8.  Yes,  and-I-thiuk-you-should  study  it  thor- 
oughly on-all-days  but  Sundays.  9.  I-suppose  you-will-make-it- 
your  special  object  to  know  it  all  before-the-month  of  November. 
10.  Several  boys  have-come  to-day  to-sell  milk.  11.  You-will- 
have-no  magazine  for  sale  iu-this-language  for-several-days.    12. 


iQ  KEPORTIN'G  STYLE   OF   SHORT -HAND. 

It-"was-said  in-the-Senate  of-Illinois  that-for-the  space-of  two- 
daj'S  all  bells  should  ring  the-alarm.  13.  The-Senate  of-this- 
republic  will-long-be  famous  for  its  safe  and-dignified  policy. 
(4m  30s). 

100.  How-many-days  do-you-suppose  he-will-be  in-surveying 
enough-space  for-the-cemetery?     (10  times  in  2  m) . 

101.  TRANSLATE. 


SHUKX   VUWELS.  37 

LESSON  VII. 


102. 


SHORT  VOWELS. 

SCALE. 

i  in  pit 

j        0  in  cot 

e    "  pet 

—    u  "  cut 

a    "  pat 

1  _    00  "  to0k 

Big 

A-^U 

tack 

beg 


\.._^=;^ 


lazy 


.0= =£ 


4^ 


The  short-vowel  signs  differ  from  tlie  long  only  in  point  of 
siiade,  tlie  dot  and  dash  being  made  large  or  small  according  as 
long  or  short  vowels  are  to  be  expressed. 

103.  Write:  Big,  fill,  ill,  job,  kicl^,  kill,  knock,  lock,  rock, 
chorus,  echo,  edge,  egg,  elbow,  else,  guess,  kiss,  mass,  haughty, 
enemy,  ahis,  Asia. 

104.  The  following  third-place  vowels,  coming  between  two 
consecutive  consonants,  should  be  placed  beside  the  second,  as  iu 
tack:    Tack,  valley,  malice. 

106.  Second-place  short  vowels,  coming  between  two  consecu- 
tive consonants,  are  placed  beside  the  second,  ( unlike 
second-place  long  vowels,  which  are  written  with  the  first) .  Beg, 
tup,  gem,  autumn,  lion. 


452285 


38  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

106.  When  two  vowels,  either  long  or  short,  occur  between  two 
consecutive  consonants,  the  first  is  placed  beside  the  first  conso- 
nant, and  the  other  beside  the  second,  as  in  poem.  Idiom,  idiot, 
poem,  maniac. 

107.  The  entire  rule  for  placing  vowels,  both  long  and  short, 
between  two  consecutive  consonants  is,  briefly ; 

Write  beside  the  first  consonant; 
First-place  long  vowels, 
First-place  short  vowels. 
Second-place  long  vowels. 

108.  Beside  the  second  consonant; 

Second-place  short  vowels. 

Third-place  short  vowels, 

Third-place  long  vowels. 
,fmy^^         Diagram  showing  the  assignment  of    vowels    when 
l*~i  ■^       occurring  between  two  consecutive  consonants. 

109.  Besides  keeping  vowels  out  of  angles,  a  further  advantage 
of  this  rule  is  that  second-place  vowels,  though  they  be  insufficient- 
ly or  wrongly  shaded,  are  known  by  the  position  which  they  occupy 
beside  the  first  or  second  consonant. 

No  symbol  is  provided  for  the  sound  of  e  in  sermon,  which  should 
be  indicated  by  the  sign  for  e  in  met  (not  by  that  for  u  in  up) . 

Some  other  shades  of  vowel  sound  are  not  provided  for  in  the 
short-hand  vowel  scale ;  but  these,  for  all  practical  pui'poses,  are 
clearly  enough  indicated  by  the  signs  for  those  vowels  which  most 
nearly  approach  them. 

110.  When  two  vowels  are  to  be  placed  beside  one  consonant, 
they  are  written  at  unequal  distances  from  it,  according  to  the 
order  in  which  the  sounds  occur,  as  in  j  '^-  Dio. 

INITIAL    AND    FINAL    ES    AND    ZE, 

111.  Since  the  circle  cannot  be  vocalized,  when  es  follows  an 
initial,  or  es  or  ze  precede  a  final  vowel,  the  stroke  and  not  the  circle 
es  or  ze  is  used;  as  in  assail  or  lazy.  This  rule  holds  good  in  all 
cases,  whether  the  vowels  are  actually  written  or  not,  since  the  use 
of  the  stroke  consonant  in  these  circumstances  indicates  where  the 
vowels  are  to  be  supplied ;  e.  g.,  the  alphabetic  letters  are  used  in 


SHORT  VOWELS. 


39 


essence  and  easy,  and  the  circle  in  sense  and  rose.    Vocalize:     Racy, 
mazy,  dozy,  posy,  daisy,  gauzy,  dizzy,  hazy,  noisy,  essence,  espy. 

112.  In  the  following  list,  write  both  long  and  short  vowels. 
Special  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  proper  placing  of  them  be- 
side the  consonants. 

Acme,  agony,  alimony,  allure,  ally,  alto,  apathy,  apex,  appal, 
appease,  Arab,  array,  audit,  bang,  barrow,  botch,  buggy,  cameo, 
chip,  chop,  col),  coffee,  oog,  dairy,  duck,  dumb,  Dutch,  epic,  essay, 
ethics,  fiat,  fogy,  gang,  gas,  gaudy,  hiatus,  hobby,  job,  lag,  lap, 
lash,  latch,  lath,  leg,  lip,  luck,  lung,  mellow,  melodious,  mess,  mob, 
odd,  opcia,  palace,  palm,  parody,  pith,  rack,  shock,  silk,  solemn, 
Stoic,  tally,  tear,  Adam,  Amos,  Caleb,  Ellis,  Emory,  Enoch,  Jesse, 
Agnes,  Alice,  Anna,  Ella, Emily,  Emma,  Hannah;  (using ar)  arrow, 
attire,  err. 

113.  Without  vowels:  Veracious,  custom,  device,  disengage, 
fallacious,  auspicious,  hasten,  swell,  visit,  celerity,  paradox,  reason, 
receive,  restore,  race,  raise,  summer,  service;  (using  ar)  circus, 
erroneous,  resume. 


114. 


WORD-SIGNS. 


C  C 

C    3 


With,  2  pos.  were 
would 


Acknowledge 

catholic 

disadvantage 

exchange 

expect 

forsake,  for-the-sake-of 


New  York  City 
public-ish-ed 


for-the-purpose-ot 


EXERCISE  7. 

115.      1.    Wliat-do-you    guess    is-in-the-post-office    for-you? 
2.  I-think-it-is-a  sketch,  "The-Lion  on-the  Rock"  being-the-sub- 


40  REPORTING   STYLE   OK    SHORT-HAND. 

ject,  aud-a  poem  on  "The-Idiot  and-the  Maniac,"  which  I -shall - 
receive  aud-take-to-the  notary.  3.  Will-you-acknoAvledge  that- 
the  valley  is  liazy  in  autumn?  4.  Yes,  but  it-is-never  so  in  summer; 
6.  I-have-no-memory-of  any-such  tale  as-that-in-your  book. 
6.  To  edit  such-a-book  is-a-big  job.  7.  It-is-in-uo-way  sufficient, 
so-you-will-have-to  exchange  it  for-something-else  (el) .  8.  The- 
enemy  has  knowledge -and-reason,  but  it-is  erroneous  to  say-that- 
he-has  riches.  9.  Shall  we-take-the  team  aud-buggy  and-hasten 
to-visit-the  circus  to-day?  10.  It-is-the-custom  with-them  to  eat 
nothing  but-milk-aud-eggs  on-Sunday.  11.  AU-the  ships  of-the 
navy  will  soon  sail  into-the  sea  aud-engage  with-the  haughty 
enemy.     (4  m.) 

116.  What-would-be-the-advantage  in  restoring  the-domestic 
ciistoms  of-a-race  of-which-we-have  scarcely  any-knowledge  ? 
(8  times  in  2  m.) 

117.  TRANSLATE 

..4..^...>:^..C.P....^...C/C...?.>'..<?r..r^..>.<^ 


CONSONANT   POSITION. 


41 


LESSON    VIII. 


118. 


CONSONANT   POSITION. 


King 


i 


deep 


nigh 


119.  Among  the  contrivances  made  use  of  to  indicate  vowels 
without  actually  writing  them,  one  of  the  most  simple  and  import- 
ant is  that  of  consonant  position.  'By  means  of  this,  the  leading 
vowel  of  any  word,  that  is,  the  vowel  contained  iu  the  accented 
syllable,  is  denotod  by  the  position  given  its  outline. 

120.  With  reference  to  the  line  of  writing,  words  occupy  three 
different  places,  known  as  the  first,  second,  and  third  consonant 
positions. 

121.  Second-position  words  rest  on  the  line,  where  all  words 
heretofore  introduced  are  written. 

122.  First-position  horizontal  words  are  written  one  space 
above  the  line,  as  king. 

123.  Other  first -position  words  are  written  half  a  space  above 


42  REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

the  Hue;  e.  g.,  in  deep,  de,  the  first  descending  letter,  rests  half 
a  space  above  the  line,  pe  being  bisected  by  it. 

124.  Third-position  horizontal  words  are  written  just  below 
the  line,  as  music. 

125.  Other  third-position  words  rest  half  a  space  below  the  line ; 
e.  g.,  in  attack,  te,  instead  of  resting  on  the  line  is  bisected  by  it. 

126.  The  place  of  the  accented  vowel  is  signified  by  the  position 
of  the  outline.  Writing  a  word  in  the  first-position  signifies 
that  its  accented  vowel  is  first-place  (as  ee,  aw,  oi,  etc.).  E.  g., 
short  0,  the  acccated  vowel  in  occupy,  is  implied  by  the  position  of 
the  word  above  the  line.  Writing  it  in  the  third  position  signifies 
that  its  accented  vowel  is  third-place  (ah,  ow,  oo,  etc.).  E.  g., 
010,  the  accented  vowel  in  allowed,  is  signified  by  the  position  of 
the  word  through  tlie  line. 

127.  Write  in.  first -position:  Deal,  abide,  by,  body,  time,  deep, 
deny,  die,  dime,  she,  ease,  easy,  easily,  enjoy,  fall,  feel,  female, 
joy,  joyous  (jay-es),  king,  law,  leave,  lie,  life,  life-time,  like, 
me.  meek,  avoid,  mill,  my,  occupy,  thy,  thee,  if,  off,  pity,  see, 
talk,  teach,  week,  weak,  assign,  write,  right,  reach,  alleviate, 
cheap.  Deity,  dock,  dominate,  miss,  mock,  nick,  seam,  series, 
size,  speedy;  (ar)  fear,  form,  fire,  sphere. 

128.  Third-position:  Allow,  assume,  at,  out,  atom,  attach, 
attack,  beauty,  back,  cap,  catch,  cash,  cavity,  cool,  aloud,  allowed, 
few,  hat,  huge,  Jewish,  jury,  lack,  lad,  laugh,  map,  match,  mouth, 
move,  path,  view,  abuse,  academy,  academic,  eulogy  (el- jay),  fool, 
loose,  factory,  outrage,  pure,  renew,  review,  ruin,  add,  adduce, 
ensue,  lose,  pack,  purity,  purify,  salute,  sat,  suit;  (ar)  power, 
poor,  room,  our,  hour. 

Exceptional  words,  3rd.  pos.:    Away,  awake,  await,  July,  advice. 

129.  Evidently  the  greatest  speed  is  attainable  when  one  posi- 
tion only  is  observed  in  writing.  For  this  reason,  words  are 
commonly  placed  on  the  line,  and  ai'e  put  in  other  positions  only 
when  speed  is  actually  gained  by  it,  that  is  to  say,  when  they 
would  otherwise  have  to  be  vocalized,  which  would  require  more 
time  than  the  other.  It  must  not  be  supposed  that  all  words 
which  contain  first  or  third  place  accented  vowels,  are  to  be 
written  in  the  first  or  tliird  positions.  These  are  made  use  of 
only  Avheu  the  writing  of  vowels  can  thereby  be  saved.     It  is  a 


CONSONANT   POSITION.  43 

frequent  case  of  two  or  more  words  having  the  same  consonant 
outline,  none  of  which  need  vocalizing,  if  all  are  different  parts 
of  speech.  But  ambiguity  would  result  from  the  use  of  laj^-ve  to 
represent  the  two  verbs  love  and  leave.  In  this  case,  the  writing 
of  vowels,  otherwise  necessary,  is  saved  by  placing  leave,  Avhicli 
contains  the  first-place  vowel,  in  the  first  position.  The  use  of 
te-chay  for  both  touch  and  teach  would  also  be  ambiguous;  hence, 
to  denote  teach,  this  outline  is  also  written  in  the  first  position. 

130.  But  it  sometimes  transpires  that  the  accented  vowels  of 
both  words  are  second  place,  as  in  the  case  of  loait  and  await. 
This  would  determine  both  for  the  second  position;  but  neverthe- 
less, as  a  matter  of  con\-enience  in  such  cases,  one  of  the  words  is 
Avritten  in  eit'.ier  tlie  first  or  third  position,  according  as  some 
unaccented  first  or  third  place  vowel  which  it  may  contain,  would 
indicate.  E.  g.,  aioait  and  awake  are  W'ritten  in  the  third  position, 
in  order  to  be  distinguished  from  the  second  position  words,  toait 
and  vKike,  which  have  the  same  outlines. 

131.  In  all  such  cases  the  most  commonly  recurring  word  is 
given  the  second  position. 

132.  Vocalized  words  commonly  occupy  the  second  position; 
but  the  legibility  of  short-hand  writing  is  increased  by  occasionally 
giving  these  also  the  positions  indicated  by  their  accented  vowels. 
This  is  more  especially  practiced  in  the  case  of  words  with  hori- 
zontal outlines,  as  nigh,  sky,  etc. 

133.  WORD-SIGNS — 1st  POS. 

Common,      each,     watch,     ear,     hear,     her,     ever,     give-n,     dollar,     thing. 

-       //^^"^V-       I        - 


EXERCISE  8. 

134.  1.  You-may-write-a  review  of  all-our  doings  at-the- 
acadcmy  on-the  fourth  Sunday  of-February.  2.  We-all  know-that 
fire  ruius  many  factories  and-mills.  3.  You-may-copy  off-the 
eulogy  on-the-life,  laws,  and-power  of-the  Jewish  king.  4.  Talks 
on-the-subject  of-electricity  will-ba  given-in-both  academies  in- 


4i  P.EPORTING   STYLE   OF   SIIORT-IIAXD. 

the-month  of  July.  5.  It-is-a-common-thiiig-to  lieur  her  laugh 
aloud  at-that  huge  fool's-cap.  6.  I-will  carry  that  small  watch 
this-week,  and-if-the-right  time  it-keeps,  I-will-give-you  #25.00 
for-the-same.  7.  The-judge  said-that  the-jury  should  occupy  this 
cool  room,  and-at  no-time  be  allowed  to-leave-it  before -they  say 
what-the  damages  in-this-case  shall-be.  8.  It-is-our-custom  to- 
sell-for  cash,  but-you-will-be  allowed  to-exchauge  your-map  for- 
a  hat  or  cap,  or  auything-else  (cl)  that-you-may  lack.  9.  The- 
huge  earth  moves  along-its  path  many-miles  an-hour.     (4m) . 

135.  To-study  the-lives-and  laws   of -the  Jewish  kiugs    is-a- 
common-thiug  iu-our  day-aud-age.     (9  times  iu  2m). 

136.  TRANSLATE. 

,.\...W..<f....<.^ ...,-/L../^...^T:^ti^i".. 


.^s..}:-..^^     ,^k.^. 


J,. 


.j,..:)..r^2.}..e^...- ...^, 

^f..VT"..^.v.^..^::::rr.2/.*..:«.0w^.../., 


S-CIRCLE   JUNCTIONS.  45 

LESSON  IX. 


137.     .  S-CIRCLE  JUNCTIONS 

Desk  ^ — S ^ 


lesson 


_d^ it-is 


facility         >b      I and-his-life 

it-is-of -advantage 


i 


138.  The  rule  laid  clown  in  Lesson  VI.  for  joining  the  s-circle, 
applies  only  when  it  occurs  at  the  beginning  or  end  of  words. 

139.  But  when  the  circle  occurs  at  the  juncture  of  two  conso- 
nants, it  should  be  written  according  to  the  following  directions : 

140.  When  the  circle  is  to  be  written — 

1.  At  the  juncture  of  two  straight  letters,  it  should  be  placed 
outside  the  angle,  as  in  desk. 

141.  2.  At  the  juncture  of  a  straight  letter  and  a  curve,  it 
should  follow  the  direction  of  the  curve,  as  in  maxim. 

142.  3.  At  the  juncture  of  tAvo  curv^es,  if  it  cannot  follow  the 
direction  of  both,  as  it  does  in  lesson,  it  should  be  written  in  the 
manner  found  most  convenient,  as  in  facility. 

143.  These  directions  apply  also  to  phraseographs ;  c.  g.,  it-is- 
tOy  and-his-life,  it-is-of-advantage. 

144.  In  the  following  list,  the  s-circle  occurs  between  tAVO 
straight  letters ;  Custody,  deposit,  desk,  dispatch,  discuss,  disobey, 
dispose,  exhibit,  dispel,  expel,  gazette,  gospel,  indispose,  justice, 
succeed,  capacity,  Mexico,  Tuesday,  audacity,  besiege,  bestow, 
caustic,  chastise,  luxury,  depository,  disguise,  despair,  dusk,  exodus, 
expire,  extinguish,  gasp,  gossip,  hostile,  outside,  parasite,  receipt, 
restless,  upset,  et-cetera,  Augustus,  Justus,  Augusta. 


46 


REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 


145.  Between  a  straight  and  curved  letter:  Citizen,  desire, 
desirous,  disarm,  dislike,  dismal,  dismay,  dissolve,  egotism,  excel, 
Harrison,  immensity,  maxim,  maximum,  message,  music,  resolve, 
cohesive,  instil,  musical,  pacific,  society,  solicit,  specify,  vestige, 
veracity,  Massachusetts,  Minnesota,  axiom,  answer,  castle,  casualty, 
decimal,  dismiss,  dissolve,  elastic,  exile,  felicity,  garrison,  offset, 
pacify,  parasol,  spasm,  specify,  tenacity,  velocity,  visitor,  Absalom, 
Erastus  (ar),  Joseph,  Missouri. 

146.  Between  two  curves:  Atheism,  counsel  (el),  facility,  in- 
cendiary, innocence,  insanity,  lesson  (el),  mason,  muscle,  pencil  (el), 
vessel  (el),  Cincinnati,  officer,  despair,  exterior,  risk,  rustic, 
cancel  (el),  sarcasm  (ar),  chancellor  (el),  counsellor  (el),  damsel, 
denizen,  domicile,  fasten,  gymnasium,  license,  lyceum,  offensive, 
submissive;  (also)  salary,  search,  decorus,  solitary,  sophomore, 
sorrow,  story,  sir  (ar),  scarce  (ar),  genius,  malicious,  science, 
select,  sublime,  Minneapolis. 


147. 


WORD-SIGNS — 3   PCS. 


However 
issue 
home,  whom 

.(^..J^, 

//■^- 

advertise-ed-ment 
had,  due 
half,  few 

large 
much 
thank,  j-outh 

••/■/-(■ 

(y^- 

though,  thou 
whole,  allow 
young 

us,  use  (noun) 
whose,  use  (verb) 
hope,  happy 

->->-\-' 

■^■■\- 

salvation 
to- tie 
ago 

EXEEC 

ISE  9. 

148.  1.  The-Gazette  says  that  Harrison's  army  -will-leave  Mex- 
ico on-Saturday  of-this-week,  aud-march  all-the-way-to  Minneap- 
olis, Minnesota,  by- way-of -Missouri.  2.  The-citizeu  deposits  his 
salary    iu-the-bank-of     Massachusetts    ■vvith-scarcely    any    risk. 

3.  The-rustic,  taking-counsel  with-the  judge  for  half-an-hour,  says 
nothing,   but  foi'-some  purpose  dispatches  his  son  to-Cincinuati. 

4.  The-justice  informs  counsel  that-they-may,  if-they  wish,  discuss- 
the-case  before -the- jury  for-two-hours.  5.  Do-you-think-thal- 
the  jury  Avill-say  the-youth  is  insane?  G.  Yes,  they-have  alreatly 
said-so;  he-receives-the-message  in  despair,  and-many  also  re- 


S-CIRCLE  JUXCTIONS.  47 

ceive-it  with  sorrow  aud-dismay.  7.  The-officers  are-taking  him 
iuto-custody,  aud-vvill  keep-hira  safely  in-a  solitary  room .  8.  The- 
j-oung  sophomore,  they-say,  has-a  rare  genius  for  poetry  and- 
music.  9.  I-hope  the-saying  has-no  sarcasm  in-it.  10.  I-know, 
however,  that-he-excels  in-scieuce,  and-never  fails  to  exhibit 
vivacity  in-society,  11.  Instil  right  maxims  iuto-the  soul  of-a- 
youth,  aud-you-will  see  that-his  life  wi]l-be-the  purer,  {im.  30  s.) 

149.  I-hope,  however,  that-you-will  give-the-youth  whom-you 
teach  the-whole  story  of  young  Absalom.     (8  times  in  2  m.) 

150.  TRANSLATE. 

./<..tt.,^...^.^f::.^..|,...u,,^..af. 

..^...YP..,.r?fr...*a...>rAi^..(^..>^..<*..^...^...Jg^ 

.5..Y.^r^:^..i..:r>).,^..r^?:}s^..,^..|?.> 

A.-^.{^..i^^..f..^...kC...6!..j:aid...U. 


48  EKPOKTIXG   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 


LESSON  X. 


151.  PHRASEOGRAPHY. 


1± 


l-think-that 


I-do 


I-know-you 


pay-him  \  ^ 1  pos.  altogether 

152.  Everj^  stenographer  must  determine  for  himself  the  precise 
extent  to  which  he  can  apply  phraseography  to  advantage.  Many 
do  not  phrase  enough;  while,  possibly,  some  do  too  much. 
Students,  accustomed  in  long-hand  to  disjoin  words,  invariably  find 
phraseography  a  hindrance  at  first;  but  the  practice,  once  acquired, 
lessens  the  labor  of  rei^ortiug,  and  adds  to  both  speed  and  legibility. 
Three  Avords  can  be  phrased  while  two  of  them  are  being  Avritten 
separately;  hence  the  g:un  in  speed.  Bi:t  icords  separnted  bi/  the 
slightest  rhetorical  pause,  or  mark  of  punctuation,  should  not  he 
joined  together.  This  adaptation  of  phraseography  to  syntax,  renders 
short-hand  notes  far  more  legible  than  they  would  otherwise  be. 

153.  The  first  word,  which  is  called  the  Leader,  should  be  written 
in  its  proper  position,  and  the  others  allowed  to  occupy  whatever 
place  the  phraseograph,  in  due  course,  may  give  them.  E.  g.,  /  is 
the  leader  of  the  phrase,  I-think-that;  give,  the  leader  in  give-me,  etc. 

154.  But  many  phraseographs  can  be  so  written  that  both  the 
leader  and  word  to  which  it  is  joined,  shall  occupy  their  appropriate 
positions,  as  in  I-had. 

155.  The  necessity  phraseography  imposes  upon  the  writer  of 
locating  Avords  out  of  their  proper  positions,  occasions  no  draw- 
back upon  legibility.    The  reader  does  not  regard  the  position  of 


PHRASEOGRAPHY. 


49 


words  after  the  first  or  .second,  but  relies  upon  the  context,  whicli 
is  a  sure  guide. 

156.  The  phraseograph  should  be  discontinued  when  an  unusual 
word  occurs,  or  one  which  must  be  written  in  its  proper  position  in 
order  to  be  unambiguous.  E.  g.,  give  him,  and  p«y  me,  should  not 
be  joined,  for  fear  of  conflict  with  give-me,  and  pay -him. 

157.  1  pos.  (using  the  s  -  circle) :  Cause,  cease,  city,  office, 
oppose,  peace,  rise,  seen,  scene,  sing,  accede,  seem,  seed,  seek,  side, 
sight,  since,  police,  these,  wise,  song,  besides,  disease,  deceit, 
deceive,  decide,  design,  despise,  decease,  excite,  exceed,  false, 
insight,  incite,  inside,  likewise,  business,  mix,  offence,  scheme, 
Scotch,  sleep,  sweep,  epistle,  alike  (el),  miserj',  reside,  resign, 
revise,  righteous,  sincere,  recite,  rejoice,  arise  (ar). 

158.  3  pos.:  Amuse,  soon,  accuse,  pass,  passage,  passive,  sad, 
sagacity,  anxiety,  nuisance,  induce,  excuse,  anxious,  animosity, 
atlas,  casual,  beauteous  (be-tes),  absence,  apostle,  south,  subdue, 
task,  tax,  absorb,  refuse,  house,  refusal,  rescue,  reduce. 

Also  write  (3  pos.),  anatomy,  animate;   (ar),  affair,  argue. 


159. 


WORD-SIGNS. 


Lawyer 

influence 

similar 

because 

signiflcant-ance 

insigniflcant-ance 

falsehood 
company 
hence 

mostly 
December 
those,  thus 


similarity 
mistake 
speech,  speak 

post-mark 

justice-of-the-peace 

continue 


happiness 

holiness 

enlarge 


EXERCISE  10. 

160.  1.  A-rogue,  whose  name  is  Esau,  takes-away  the-cow  of 
Paul  the-rustic.  2.  He-also  carries  off  some  of  Paul's  sheep,  and- 
designs  taking-his  dog  too.  3.  But-the  dog  barks,  and-Esau  fear- 
ing he-will-be-seen,  hastens  home.    4.    Paul  informs-an-officer, 


50  REPORTIXG  STYLE   OF   SHORT-H-^:^'D. 

who,  with-the-help  of-the-police,  soon-succeeds  in  arresting-the 
rogue.  5.  Thej--take-the  anxious  Esau  to-the  city,  and-lock  him 
in-the-south  room  of -the  jail.  6.  Esau  is  accused  by  Paul  of- 
having  carried  off-his  live-stocli.  7.  Esau  denies  all  knowledge  of- 
the  affair,  and-goes  to  seek-the  advice  of  counsel.  8.  He-goes-to- 
the  office  of-the  sagacious  Scotch  lawyer,  Jackson,  who,  sitting 
pensive  in-his  chair,  asks-him  what  he-wishes.  9.  I-have  come, 
says  Esau,  to  induce  you  to-argue  iu-my  behalf  in-the-cause  in- 
which  I-am-accused  by  Paul.  10.  But-the  lawj^er,  refusing  to- 
help-him,  says,  I-think-you-will-never  pay  me.  11.  At-the  sight, 
however,  of-the  rogue's  pile  of-money,  Jackson  informs-him  that- 
his  side  of-the-case  is-the-right-side.  12.  Esau,  rejoicing  exceed- 
ingly, says  he-hopes  it-is-no-mistake.  13.  Thc-cause  comes  on 
for  hearing  before-a-jury  and-a  justice-of-the-peace,  whose-name 
is  Isaac.  14.  The-lawyer  Jackson  thinks  because  both-the  Justice 
and-the-accused  are  Jews,  that-it-would-be-a  wise  scheme  to- 
have-the  Squire  dismiss-the-jury,  aud-with-no^help  to  hear  and- 
decide  the-cause.  15.  Hence  the-accused,  by-his-lawyer,  moves- 
the  Squire  that-this-be-carried  out;  and-the- Justice  so  deciding, 
the-jury  goes.  16.  The-Justice  sits  and-hears  the-testimony  of- 
each  witness  in-the-case,  which-is  altogether  insufficient  to  show 
that-the-accused  is-the  thief.  17.  The-lawyer  thinks-it  useless  to- 
make-a  speech,  and-so  leaves-the-case  Avholly  at-the  disposal  of- 
thc-Squire.  18.  The-Justice  says  the-accused  may  rise  up,  and- 
Esau  does-so  with-no-fear.  19.  The-Justice  also  saj-s:  "The- 
bulk  of-the  testimony  is  Insufficient  to  show-you  to-be -the  th'ef; 
but  I-rather  think-that-the  testimony  is  mostly  wrong.  20.  Hence, 
what-I-decide  in-this-case  is-this;  that-you  continue  in-jail  for- 
two-weeks,  and-also  that-you  pass  two-weeks  on-the  public  rock- 
pile!"     (8  m.  30  s.) 

161.  As-to-his  design  in-seeking-th«  house  of-the  justice-of- 
the-peace,  the-witness  spoke-a-falsehood  in-giviug-his  testimony 
to-the-jury.     (7  times  in  2  m.) 


162. 


THE   SEZ-CIRCLE. 
TRAlfSLATE 


../!...!..(/...'...:........kI.^...V^.A;- 


tr^ 


\ 


51 


LESSON     XL 


THE  SEZ-CIRCLE,  EMP,  AND  COALESCENTS. 


163. 


System 

enthusiast 

successes 

ambiguous 

weave 

wife 

ague 
wipe 
annual 


164.  The  syllables  sis,  sys,  sez,  ces,  sus,  and  others  similar, 
are  denoted  by  a  large  circle,  as  in  system  and  successes. 

Write:  Cases,  paces,  necessary,  success,  successor,  subsist, 
decisive,  desist,  excess,  excessive,  exercise,  exist,  hypothesis, 
necessity,  insist,  system,  emphasis,  emphasize,  analysis  (el), 
Mississippi,   Texas,  Jesus,  exercises,  successes,  accessory,  axis. 


52 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND 


diagnosis,  enthusiast,  recess,  suspicious,  thesis,  possessor,  Moses; 
1  pos.,  exhaust. 

^■^   EMP. 

165.  The  cognates  pe  and  be,  when  occurring  after  em,  are 
sometimes  indicated  by  a  sliading  of  tliis  consonant,  as  in  camp,  or 
ambitious.  This  tliickened  em  is  called  emp,  and  has  the  force  of 
em-pe,  or  em-be. 

166.  Write:  Pump,  ample,  camp,  campaign,  damp,  encamp, 
example,  lamp,  lump,  sample,  sympath}',  sympathize,  temple, 
ambitious,  imbecile,  ambassador,  ambiguity,  ambiguous,  embark, 
embellish,  embezzle,  empire,  limp,  pomp,  symbol,  symptom, 
thump. 

TABLE   OF   COALESCENTS. 

167 .  The  signs  here  given  have  the  force  of  the  full-faced  type 
in  the  corresponding  words. 

LONG.  SHORT. 

W  Series.  We  walk        with  '''-        wot 


c!i. 


y;;> 


!! 

J  It. 

twang      *•''■'      wool 


T  Series. 


yawn        yi 


V," 


yea 


yoke 


yet 


"l!" 


TRIPHTHONGS. 


yarn 


yam 


wife  ■  '1      ■wound 

MNEMONIC    FIGURES. 


ajMA 


W  dasb 
"  dot 


coalescents  bow  to  right.     ^^    -@j.     Y  dash  coalescents  bow  upward 
"  "     "    left.      v(       Jta      "  dot  "  "   downwai 


COALESCENTS.  63 

168.  The  unobstructed  consonants  lo  and  y  are  commonly 
called  coalesceuts,  from  the  quality  which  they  possess  of  readily 
uniting,  or  coalescing,  with  the  vowel  sounds.  The  double  sounds 
toe,  ye,  you,  etc.,  formed  by  combining  to  or  y  with  a  succeeding 
vowel,  are  frequently  expressed  by  a  small  semi-circle  written  in 
the  three  vowel  places,  as  vm  in  wave,  ya  in  yarn. 

169.  Write:  Dwell,  wade,  duke,  hew,  mule,  muse,  quack, 
squeeze,  wed,  wet,  wood,  Hugh,  Julius,  Luke,  Celia,  Delia, 
Eugenia,  Utah. 

170.  When  convenient,  first  and  third  place  coalesceuts  and 
diphthongs  are  joined  to  the  consonant  stems  in  connection  with 
which  they  occur,  as  in  weave,  wife,  endow,  highly. 

171.  Write:  Walk,  wash,  equip,  ice,  endow,  Irish  (shay), 
irony  (ar),  item,  liquid,  war,  weave,  wife,  wit,  wing,  Idaho, 
Quebec,  ague,  dew,  nephew,  weed,  widow,  wipe. 

Omitting  the  coalescents:  Acquiesce,  anguish,  annual  (el), 
avenue,  barrier,  exquisite,  genial  (el),  ingenious,  languish, 
luxurious,  requisite,  tedious;  3  pos.,  cube,  cubic,  duel. 

PIIRASEOGRAPHY. 

172.  The  principles  of  abbreviation  explained  in  this  lesson  are 
also  made  use  of  in  phraseography.  lu^— v  may-he,  for  example, 
/-^,  the  sign  for  may,  is  shaded  to  denote  the  following  \^  be. 
.--^  Emp  in  this  case  is  in  reality  an  abbi'cviated  i^hraseograph,  and 

is  called  a  phrase-sign.  The  words  "is-saiU"  are  expressed  by 
the  phrase-sign  sezde,  which  is  obtained  by  enlarging  the  circle  in 
said.  A  phrase-sign  is  a  contracted  outline  representing  a  number 
of  words  as  though  they  were  but  so  many  syllables ;  whereas  a 
phraseograph  is  obtained  by  raei'ely  linking  a  number  of  words 
together. 

173.  The  coalescent  and  diphthongal  signs  are  always  \vritten 
in  a  vertical  or  horizontal  position,  and  do  not,  like  the  dash 
vowels,  adapt  themselves  to  their  consonant  stems  by  always 
being  written  at  right  angles  with  them. 

174.  The  sez-circle  should  be  written  several  times  larger  than 
the  simple  s-circle,  so  as  to  be  readily  distinguishable  from  it. 


54 


EEPORTIXG   STYLE   OF   SlIORT-HAXD. 


175. 

Important-ce 

improve-d-ment 

situple-y 

quiet 

acquit 

acute 

United  States 
liigli,  eye 
tieiglit 

howsoever 

wiiite 

yet 

water 
quick 
what 

is-said 
highly 
it-is-slmply 

is-his,  his-is,  Is-aa 
as-has,  as-is,  as-his 

has-his 
as-soon-as 


WORD    AXD   PHRASE    SIGNS. 


<r\ 


n 


vX> 


■-'•■^- 

V        M 


•t 


...1..... 


T) 


o  dp 


o 


,.U^, 


n  0 


'impossible 

temperance-ate 

square 

senior 
junior 
failure 


higher 
•1       liighway,  Iowa 
/...  idea 


6 


_c> 


A 


uniform 
unite-ity 
Europe 

ye,  year-s 

beyond 

is-seen 

this-is 
this-system 

gives-US 

is-such 

takes-u8 

.  loves-ua 


EXERCISE  11. 
176.  1.  You-may--\vrite-this  and-all-succeecling  exercises  with 
red  ink,  if-you-wish,  but-\ve-\vould-ratlier  you-would-use  simply 
the-common  ink.  2.  The-Yankee's  Irish  wife  said  she  saw-a-large 
lamp  sitting  on-the  top  of  the  white  temple.  3.  Our  temperance- 
speaker  possesses  a-geuius  for  war,  aud-is-quick  in-wit,  with- 
which  he-unites  much  irony.  4.  He-has-an  idea  of  uniting  Texas, 
Iowa,  Idaho,  and-Utah  by-a-common  highway,  but-the-thing  is- 
simply-impossible.  5.  This-is-our  regular  summer  uniform,  and- 
is-seen-in-the  United-States-camps  always  at-this-time  of  year, 
but-is-never-to-be  seen-in  Europe.  6.  He-loves-us,  aud-it-may- 
be  that-that-is  why  he-would-have  us  enjoy  so-many  of -the 
exquisite  views  in  Utah.  7.  Hugh  takes-us  to  see-many  sample 
dwellings  on-the  avenue,  but  I-thiuk-that-many-of-them  lack- 
some  necessary  improvements.  8.  How-mauy-years  will-it-be, 
do-you-think,  before-this-system  will-have  come-iuto  common 
use  in-the  United-States,  especially  in-the  large  cities?  9.  Our 
sagacious  justice-of-the-peace  subsists  by  hearing  and-decidiug 
various  petty  cases.     (5  in) . 


DOUBLE   CORSON AXTS.  55 

177.  That-the-health  of-the  United-States  armj'  iiiay-be-im- 
provccl,  it-is-iinportaut-that  all-(jfRcei-s  should  set-au  example  of- 
temperance  to  inferiors.     (11  times  in  3  m). 

178.  TRANSLATE. 


..^..:).x...'-^..5..-..^.:::^^r..<. 


LESSON  XII. 


DOUBLE  CONSONANTS.— THE  L-HOOK. 

179.  The  liquids  I  and  r,  by  reason  of  the  vowel  element  which 
they  possess,  partially  coalesce  with  other  consonants  which 
immediately  precede  them:  e.  g.,  I  unites  very  nearly  with  p  in 
pht'j,  and  yvithfinfli/;  r  unites  closely  with  p  iu  pry,  and  with  /  in 
offer.  These  consonant  double-sounds  are  of  very  frequent  occur- 
rence in  our  language,  and  are  usually  expressed  by  a  modification 
of  the  stem  of  the  first  consonant. 


56  KEPORTLXG  STYLE   OF   SHOKT-nA>'D. 

THE    L-HOOK. 

180.  The  consonants  of  the  1-hook  series  are : 

Pel  bel  tel  del  chel  jel    kel   gel     fel    vel     thl  the!    shel    (upward). 
...'\.lIf../Z.feT.ft-r..L.C^..C.C,f^f. 

,...'v'..r:<-../..?r-..  ^..w^  yr^..\j..^.. 

blow  bowl  glass  settle  sickle  playful  ankle    nickel  bushel  collegiate 

181.  To  express  the  added  I,  straight  consonant  letters  are 
written  witli  a  small  hook  atthe  beginning,  placed  on  the  right, 
or  s-circle  side;  e.  g.,  this  character  \  ,  called  pel,  has  the  force  of 
pe-hiy,  as  in  playful.  This  hook  is  written  within,  or  following 
the  direction  of  curved  letters. 

182.  These  hooked,  or  double  letters,  are  vocalized  like  other 
consonant  stems,  as  in  bloio,  or  glass.  But  the  double  letter  is  not 
used  if  the  vowel  occurs  between  the  two  consonant  sounds 
denoted  by  it;  e.  g.,  in  bowl,  the  hook  cannot  be  employed,  the 
vowel  o  coming  between  be  and  lay;  but  in  bloio,  the  double 
consonant  bcl  is  used,  no  vowel  occurring  between  be  and  the 
liquid,  0,  the  only  vowel  in  the  word,  being  final. 

183.  The  s-circle  is  prefixed  to  double  consonants  of  the 
1-hook  series  by  being  written  within  the  hook,  as  in  settle  and 
sickle. 

181.  The  adjective  ending  ful  is  usually  expressed  by  the 
double  consonant /eZ,  as  \\\  playful. 

185.  All  hooked  consonants  should  be  -written  with  one  stroke 
of  the  pen.  This  practice  not  only  increases  the  speed  of  writing, 
but  lessens  the  liability  to  form  the  hook  too  large  or  too  cramped. 

186.  Write :  Ankle,  angle,  assemble,  assembly,  available, 
battle,  black,  blame,  blameless,  blank,  blush,  chapel,  circle,  claim, 
class,  clergy,  climax,  close,  club,  clumsy,  clothe,  declaim,  diploma, 
■double,  emblem,  employ,  enclose,  English,  entitle,  fable,  faculty, 
festival,  imply,  implicit,  globe,  legal,  illegal  (el),  inflame,  level, 
local,  mingle,  admirable,  novelty,  noble,  oblige,  obstacle,  parable, 
place,  pledge,  poetical,  radical,  reflect,  stable,  staple,  table, 
technical,  tenable,  total,  dimple,  unable,  social,  syllable,  delicacj'. 


THE   L-IIOOK. 


57 


ancle,  variable,  vital,  vocal,  ability,  Florida,  display,  disclaim, 
disclose,  exclaim,  invisible,  possible,  visible,  academical,  acclim- 
atize, amiable,  amicable,  bashful,  Bible,  blemish,  bliss,  block, 
blossom,  cattle,  chemical,  classify,  closet,  coeval,  collegiate,  couple, 
culpable,  declivity,  despicable,  devil,  displace,  dissemble.  Episcopal, 
fallible,  fatal,  flesh,  fling,  flour,  fluency,  foretell  (ar),  gable, 
glimpse,  gloom,  horrible,  invariable,  inviolable,  jingle,  joyful, 
label,  miserable,  naval,  nimble,  pistol,  placid,  plague,  plank, 
plastic,  plausible,  pliable,  pliant,  plum,  plump,  plus,  ply,  rival, 
shelf,  shingle,  smuggle,  stubble,  subtile,  survival,  tackle,  tangle, 
terrible,  tickle,  tumble,  typical,  village,  vehicle,  wrinkle,  Clarence, 
Hannibal,  Clara,  Flora,  Florence ;  (using  ar)  clear,  clerk,  declare, 
implore,  deplore,  desirable,  ramble,  irresistible  (sez) ;  (vocalize) 
applause,  bleak,  clay,  clue,  fleece,  glue,  plume,  ply,  Abel,  Michael, 
Mabel,  blue;  1  pos.  audible,  awful,  clock,  clog,  gloss,  clause, 
climb,  calling,  evil,  feeble,  initial,  liable,  likely,  ofiicial,  please, 
reply,  title,  idle;  3  pos.  allowable,  anatomical,  clash,  claspj 
pupil,  suitable,  affable. 


187= 


P 


WORD   AND    PHRASE    SIGNS. 

1  Pos.  till,  2  tell,  it-will,  3  until,  at-all. 

1  comply,  2  people,  3  apply. 

1  belong,  2  able,  3  blew. 

1  follow,  awful,  2  full,  3  flew. 


A 


1  each-will,  2  whlch-wlll,  children,  3  much-will. 


I  call,  equal,  2  difficult-y,  3  clew. 


58 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHOUT-IIAND. 


develop-ment 
glory,  u«oglorious 
bumble 

recollect 

respect-able 

quality 

respectability 

collect 

influential. 


138 


EXERCISE  12. 


1.  Philosophy  will  clip-an  angel's  wings.  2.  It-will  never-do  at- 
all  for-you  to-emphasize  the-wrong  syllable  in-class.  3.  Official 
people  say  they-will  in-time  become-respectable  ancl-influential, 
whicli-will-be  a-glorious-thing,  if  each-will  at-the  same-time  be 
humble,  i.  You-should  use  Ihis-system  as-soon-as  j^ou-are-able; 
much-will-be-the-time-that  it-will-save-you,  because-it-is-as 
speedy  as-any,  besides  being-fai'  easier.     (Im  45s). 


189. 


THE-ASP    AND-THE    EAGLE. — .ESOP. 


1.  This-fable  tells  of-a  snake  declaring  war  on-an-eagle,  aud- 
how  they-engage  in-fearful  battle.  2.  They-display  no  delicacy, 
nevertheless  they-never-make-the  air  vocal  with-the-clash  of-arms 
or-the  thump  of-clumsy  clubs.  3.  The-snake  has-the-advantage, 
and-will-likely  kill-the-poor  eagle.  4.  But-a  rustic  sees  them, 
and-hurrying,  he-comes-up  and-looses  the-coil  of-the-snake,  aud- 
allows  the-eagle  to  fly  away.  5.  The-escape  of-the  eagle  inflames 
the-snake,  so-tha*:-he  allows  his  poison  to  fly  into-the  water 
bottle  of-the  rustic.  6.  The-rustic,  knowing-nothing  of-the- 
possible  evil,  applies  the-bottle  to-his  lips.  7.  But-the  eagle, 
flying  back,  delivers  him,  by-giving  his  right-arm  a-blow  with-his 
wing,  and-by  seizing  the-bottle  with-his  claws,  and-carrying  it- 
up  into-the  sky.     (3m  30s). 

190.  They-will-contiaue  to-come  until-you  tcll-him-that  it- 
will  most-likely-be  unnecessary  to-collect-the-class  together. 
(9  times  in  2m) . 


THE   L-HOOK, 
191.  TRAXSLATE. 

,l<../h:^.^...^{.>^.^^/.....S-:^^. ).frrf^^....-/Z 

^..^^.C.^A^Cff...':^..^:3^...fe.... 


59 


LESSON  XIII. 


THE     R-HOOK     SERIES    OF     DOUBLE    CONSONANTS- 
SEC.  I. 

Per         ber         ter         der         cher         jer        ker         ger 


'"^  x..!^ 1......1 Z...Z. 

.::^....<r-:....|..::^ .:^.. 


pray       gray     destroy    exaggerate      criticism       programme 


60  REPORTIXG  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND 

193.  Another  initial  lioolv,  written  on  the  left  of  the  consonant, 
or  side  opposite  the  1-hook,  indicates  the  added  r  as  in  pray,  or 
gray.  The  alphabetic  letters,  modified  by  the  attachment  of  this 
hook,  are  denominated  per,  ber,  ter,  etc.,  and  have  the  force  of 
pe-ar,  be-ar,  etc.  This  hook  is  joined  to  all  the  cousouauls  except 
es,  ze,  ar,  ing,  way,  yea,  hay,  ray,  and  emp. 

194.  In  order  that  the  r-hook  may  be  prefixed  to  a  medial  con- 
sonant, a  preceding  s-circle  is  written  out  of  its  usual  position: 
e.  g.,  in  destroy,  the  circle  is  placed  on  the  left  side  of  de  in  order 
that  the  r-hook  may  appear  to  be  attached  to  te.  The  hook  is 
sometimes  expressed,  also,  bj'  retracing  a  preceding  consonant, 
as  in  programme. 

195.  Write,  using  the  r-hook  and  vowels :  Brace,  breech,  bribe, 
broil,  gray,  grow,  brake,  praise,  pray,  tribe,  utter,  acre,  brawl, 
brow,  caprice,  crape,  crawl,  crew,  cross-eyed,  crow,  dray,  grape, 
grass,  growl,  loiter,  odor,  oyster,  pauper,  powder,  prize,  prosa, 
pry,  quaker,  slaughter,  taper,  tx'ace,  trail,  turmoil,  ultra,  Beatrice, 
Bertha,  Grace;  1  pos.  Greece,  cry,  creek,  Greek.  Without  the 
vowels:  Abbreviate,  approach,  appropriate,  attorney,  break, 
baker,  broke,  breathe,  brevit}',  breach,  bring,  courage,  crazy,  create, 
creator,  critic,  cruel,  crusade,  crystal,  currency  decrease,  democra- 
cy, depress,  destroy,  diagram,  distress,  disturb,  drug,  dress,  drill, 
drink,  drop,  drum,  drunk,  educator,  embrace,  encourage,  exagger- 
ate, extra,  extreme,  criticism,  proceed,  trump,  gradual,  grasp, 
gravity,  grocer,  impress,  industry,  industrious,  keeper,  labor, 
laborious,  ledger,  liberal,  lucre,  ludicrous,  major,  maker,  matrimo- 
ny, microscope,  mistress,  Nebraska,  neighbor,  operate,  operator, 
paper,  parallel,  precious,  presence,  press,  pearl,  prepare,  pretty, 
prscede,  process  (sez),  produce,  programme,  progress,  propose, 
prosper,  provoke,  redress,  reproach,  soldier,  treason,  triumph,  va- 
por, vigor,  abridge,  aggregate,  altar,  alternate,  apostrophe,  April, 
arbitrary,  alter,  ardor,  aristocracy,  ascribe,  astrology,  banker,  bar- 
ber, beggar,  betraj',  produce,  brass,  broker,  broom,  brush,  bur- 
lesque, butcher,  cathedral,  charter,  chemistiy,  cherish,  chronome- 
ter, copper,  courageous,  courtesy,  cracker,  grul),  crayon,  crib, 
crimson,  criticise,  crook,  crop,  crucify,  crumb,  crush,  crutch,  cy- 
press, deter,  Deuteronomy,  dexterous,  dictator,  digress,  dipper, 
cream,  trespass,  fibre,  Peter,  garter,  gracious,  grass,  grumble,  har- 


THE   R-HOOK. 


61 


bor,  Sebrew,  inebriate,  ingratiate,  intrigue,  laboratory,  literary, 
messenger,  ministry,  monogram,  mutter,  nectar,  obtrusive,  patiol, 
pernicious,  personate,  poker,  trustee,  trap,  trick,  trim,  tropic, 
trnnk,  Ambrose,  Andrew,  Edgar,  Patrick;  1  pos.  agree,  crime, 
••"^^ss,   c**ughter,  draw,  dream,  dry,  aci'oss,  eager,  increase,  preach. 


19«^ 


1 
/ 


WORD    AXD    PHRASE    SIGNS. 

1  Pos.  appear,  2  principle-al,  3  practice-al. 

1  liberty,  2  re-member,  3  brether,  number. 

1  try,  2  truth,  3  true. 

1  doctor,  2  dear,  3  during,  dark. 

1  each-are,  2  which-are,  3  much-are. 

1  Christian-ity,  2  care,  occur,  3  cure. 

2  danger,  3  larger. 


Corre  ct 

character 

degree 

liberty-of  -the-peo- 

ple 
llberty-of-the-press  ' 
Member  -  of  -  Con- 


.n.::^.?^. 


accuracy 

inaccurate 

Dear-Sir 

Member-of-the 

Bar 
Member-of  -the 

IjBKislature 
practicable. 


EXERCISE  13. 

197.  1.  He-that-takes-a  wife  takes  care.  2.  If-you-would 
create  something,  you-must-be-somethiug.  3.  Prayer  is-the  voice 
of-faith.  4.  All  things  with-which  we-deal  preach  to-us.  5.  What 
vigor  absence  adds  to-love!  6.  Characters  never  change.  7.  The- 
drama  is-the-book  of-the  people.     8.  The  eye  sees  what-it  brings 


62  REPOETIKG  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

the-power  to  see.  9.  Geuius  is-the  faculty  of  growth.  10.  Life 
is-a  comedy  to-him  who  thinks,  aud-a  tragedy  to-him  who  feels. 
11.  The-truth  of-truths  is  love.     (2  m). 

THE-CROW   AND-THE    PITCHER. — ^SOP. 

198.  1.  A-crow,  perishing  for-lack  of-water,  sees-a  pitcher, 
and-hoping  that-it  possesses  some  of-the  liquid,  flies  to-it  witli- 
much  joy.  2.  On  reaching  it  he-sees,  to-his  sorrow,  that-the- 
water  is-of  so-small  depth  that-he-is  totally  unable  to-reach  it,  so- 
that  all-his  industry  avails  nothing.  3.  Later,  he-collects  as-many 
rocks  as-it-is-possible  for-him  to-carry,  and-with-his  beak  drops 
them  slowly  into-the-pitcher,  until  he-brings-the-water  up  so  high 
that-it-is-possible  for-him  to-reach  it,  and-in-this-way  saves-his 
life.     (2  m  30  s). 

199.  A-member-of-the-bar,  on-becoming  a-Member-of-Con- 
gress,  spoke  in  praise  of-the  liberty -of-the -press,  and-said-that 
as-long-as-it  published  but-the  simple-truth,  the-liberty-of-the- 
people  would-be  in-no-danger.     (5  times  in  2  m) . 

200.  TRANSLATE. 


}..Tl..>Jir^.:...z3..^cr>....(i.v.lvrr...u:% 
A7..1...°A^....^i-.,..l.v^lr..l>, 


THE  R-HOOK.  €3 


LESSON   XIV. 


201.  THE  R-HOOK  SERIES— SEC.  2. 

Fer         ver         thr         ther  sher       zhr         mer 


y..6. 


tiger 
,^_^-^      generous 
'  uumerous 


7         V  apprehend 

■" i3^....t  Christmaa. 

202.  Siuce  a  hook  can  be  attached  to  but  one  side  of  a  curved 
letter,  and  siuce  the  r  and  1  hooks  are  written  on  opposite  sides 
of  consonant  stems,  the  natural  positions  of  certain  curves  are 
reversed  in  order  to  render  these  hooks  distinguishable.  These 
curves  are  ef,  ve,  ith,  and  the,  which,  when  the  r-hook  is  prefixed, 
are  written  fer,  ver,  thr,  and  ther,  as  shown  in  the  engraving,  and 
appear  like  ar,  way,  es,  and  zo,  with  an  initial  hook.  But  these 
characters,  it  will  be  observed,  are  obtained  by  reversing  fel,  vel, 
thl,  and  thel,  which  is  done  in  order  that  the  hook  may  be  brought 
to  the  left  side.  This  practice  gives  rise  to  no  ambiguity,  siuce, 
as  has  been  stated,  the  r-hook  is  not  attached  to  ar,  way,  es, 
and  ze. 

203.  To  express  the  added  ar,  em  and  en  are  modified  by  both  pre- 
fixing the  hook,  and  thickeuing  the  stem,  thus  if— ^^ler,  and  c^^ner. 
No  ambiguity  results  from  this  shading  of  the  consonants  em  and 
en,  since  no  hook  is  attached  to  either  emp  or  ing. 

204.  In  some  outlines,  where  it  caunot  be  convenientlj'  joined, 
the  hook  is  omitted,  the  shaded  em  simply  being  used  iu  lieu  of 
mer,  as  in  farmer. 

205.  "Write:  Rumor,  tremor.  Homer,  energy,  dinner,  banner, 
exlionorate,  lunar,  over,  farmer,  generous,  numerous,  tanner, 
merge,  offer,  philosopher,  phrase,  camphor,  Christopher,  Francis, 
Frank,  average,  Denver,  favor,  oversight,  Friday,  silver,  traverse. 


64 


EEPORTIXG  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 


leisure,  measure,  pressure,  treasure,  censure,  exposure,  macliiuery, 
aniversary,  diverge,  diverse,  livery,  manoeuver,  Lutlier,  Lutlieraii, 
disliouor,  perverse,  tliresli,  tlirong,  verb,  verge,  verse,  Oliver,  Yir- 
r^inia,  wager,  Artliur,  Bertram,  Oscar,  Frank,  Roger,  Victor,  treacli- 
erous,  favorite,  proverb,  tributary,  gather,  slieriff,  umbrella,  re- 
press, slipper,  spider,  sugar  (shay),  tiger,  tragedy,  tragic,  traitor, 
probate,  problem,  profess,  professor,  prolong,  propriety,  recur, 
prairie,  preface,  premier,  premise,  premium,  primary,  prior. 
Vocalize,  throw;  1  pos.  autliorize,  authority,  crisis  (sez),  decree, 
former,  fever,  free,  preside,  prime,  minor,  oppress,  oppressive, 
precise  (sez),  price,  Christmas;  3  pos.  abstruse,  address,  adverse, 
affirm,  apprehend,  apprehensive,  presume,  scatter,  assure,  grew, 
troop. 


206. 


WORD   AND   PHRASE    SIGNS. 


<r\ 


1  Pos.  author,  2  three,  3  through. 


1  either,  2  their,  there,  they-are,  3  other. 


1  Mr.,  mere,  remark-able,  2  more,  mercy,  3  humor. 


1  near,  nor,  honor,  2  manner,   3  owner. 


From 

every, very 
pleasure 

in-reference-to 

in-respect-to 

honorable 


D...^..rP.. 


hn- 


:.=^.^ 


therefore 
Thursday 
Friday 

commercial 
University 
San  Francisco. 


EXERCISE  U. 

207.  1.  He-remarks  to-his  brother-members  that-to  encourage 
such-pleasures  Is-in-a-high  degree  dangerous  to-every-priuciple 
of-Christian-liberty.  2.  The-doctor's  practice  in- San -Francisco 
gradually  increases,  and-his  skill  has-no  parallel .  3.  The-author 
of-the  ludicrous  "Dream  of-the  Major's  Daughter"  exaggex'ates 
beyond-measure  in-speaking  of -the-crimes  of -war.     (1  m  15  s) 


THE   R-HOOK.  65 

THE-DOG   AXD-THE    SHADOW. — .ESOP. 

208.  1.  A-dog  crossing-a  bridge  over-a-creek  with-a  piece  of- 
flesh  in-his  mouth,  sees  his  own  shadow  in-the-water,  and-takes- 
it  for  that  of-some-other  dog,  with-a  piece-of  game  double  his 
own  in  size.  2.  He-therefore  drops  his  own  piece,  and-furiouslj' 
attacks-tlie-other  dog  with-the  view  of-takiug-his  larger  piece 
from-him.  3.  He-thus  looses  both;  that-which  he-grasps  for  in- 
the-water,  because-it-was-a  shadow;  aud-his  own,  because -the- 
creek  washes  it-away.     (2  m) . 

209.  1.  So  sad,  so  fresh,  the-days  that-are  no-more.  2.  You- 
arrive  at  truth  through  poetry,  and -I  arrive  at  poetry  through 
truth.  3.  Lay  a-bridge  of-silver  for-a  flying  enemy.  4.  What-is 
becoming  is  honorable,  and-what-is  honorable  is  becoming. 
5.  The-eyes  of-other  people  are-the  eyes  that  ruin  us.  6.  Wise 
judges  are-we  of-each-other.     (1  m  30  s). 

210.  It-is-the-more  remarkable,  for  I-supposed  that-he-had 
too-much  honor  to-be  author-of-such-a  rumor  as-this  iu-refer- 
euce-to  Oliver  the-philosopher.     (10  times  in  3  m). 

211.  TRANSLATE. 


.,\^.^...e...i:^..''...d..)...^...].'°..]-.fc 


66 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAXD. 


LESSON  XV. 


212  THE    TRIPLE-CONSONANT  SERIES. 

s-pr         s-br  s-tr        s-dr         s-chr      s-jr       s-kr  s-gr 


..^^..-.'S.....! .1 l.J... 


Spree 

soaker 

cider 

suffer 

discourage 

subscrbe 


.l...o:fr..l 


!i.:r^c^, 


zd3.1:\ 


cradle 

enclosure 

shelter 

secrecy 

sister 

prescribe. 


213.  When  the  s-circle  is  to  be  prefixed  to  per,  the  hook  is 
omitted,  and  the  circle  written  on  tlie  r-hoolc  side  of  the  consonant ; 
thus,  the  character    \  sper  has  the  force  of  es-pe-ar,  as  in  spree. 

214.  The  triple  consonant  sper  is  more  easily  written  than 
though  the  circle  were  placed  within  the  hook ;  and  it  will  not  be 
mistaken  for  \  spe  simply,  since  in  sper  the  circle  is  placed  on 
the  opposite  side  of  the  consonant.  All  other  straight  stems  of 
the  r-hook  series  are  modified  in  the  same  manner  to  express  a 
preceding  s,  as  in  soaker  and  cider. 

215.  But  when  the  circle  is  to  be  prefixed  to  "^  fer,  it  must 
be  written  within  the  hook,  as  in  suffer;  otherwise  it  would  be 
written  ^  ser,  and  have  the  force  of  es-ar,  instead  of  es-ef-ar. 
The  same  principle  holds  true  of  all  curved  double  consonants, 
ver,  ther,  etc. 

216.  In  the  outlines  for  a  few  such  words  as  discourarje  and 
subscribe,  where  it  is  inconvenient  to  wi'ite  the  r-hook,  it  is  entirely 
omitted,  r  being  readily  supplied  from  the  context. 

217.  Write:  String,  spring,  struck,  strong,  scourge,  scribe, 
secrecy,  sober,  sister,  suffer,  discourage,  discriminate,  disgrace, 
subscribe,  sacrifice,  scrub,  separate,  skirmish,  strap,  stress, 
stretch,    succor,     supercede,    superstitious,     supper,    supremacy. 


TRIPLE   COXSOXANTS. 


67 


supremo;  1  pos.  strike,  prescribe,  scream;  3  pos.  scrap, 
scratch,  strew.  Vocalize,  strow,  stray,  streak.  Using  botli  tlie 
1  and  r  hooks:  agreeable,  brutal,  clamor,  clatter,  flatter,  flavor, 
proclaim,  travel,  triangle,  trouble,  verbal,  calibre,  chronicle, 
clapper,  clever,  clover,  cradle,  flutter,  gii-dle,  glitter,  grapple, 
inclosure,  perplex,  propel,  shelter,  trifle,  triple,  tropical,  scruple, 
struggle. 

218. 


WORD    AND    PHRASE    SIGNS. 


Merciful 
mortgage 
teigiiborhood 

proper-ty 
universal 
New-Hampshire 

West-Virginia 

disappear 

disagree 

ejcpress 
surprise 
suppress 


C^— 


ovcrwiielm 
probable-ly 
probability 

forgive 

North- America 
South-America 

everlasting 
strength  ,  exter- 
nal 
as-it-were 

Scripture,  de- 
scribe 
secure 

such-are.  3  such 
were 


EXERCISE  15. 

219.  1.  Their-sisters  in-South-America  subscribe  for-the  Uni- 
versity papers  published  in  New-Hampshire  aud-West-Virginia. 
2.  The-philosopher  expresses  surprise  at-the-large  number  of- 
sacrifices  which-the  Scriptures  describe.  3.  America,  in-her 
dealings,  is-fair  and-honorable,  and-has-no  troubles  with-other 
peoples.  4.  Such-were-their  brutal  clamors for-more  of-the  silver 
treasure,  that-we-had-to  suffer,  as-it-were,  a-cruel  scourge. 
(Im  30s) . 

220.  THE-CEDAR    TREE    AND-THE    BRAMBLE. — ^SOP. 

1.  A-cedar  tree,  bragging,  says-to-the  bramble,  "You-are 
useful  for-nothing  at-all,  but  in-all-places  people  use  me  for 
houses  and-stables."  2.  The-bramble  answers :  "You  poor  thing, 
if-you-would-but  remember-the  axes  and-saws  which-are  soon-to 
hew  you  to  pieces,  you-would-have-reasou  to  wish  that-you-were- 
a  bramble  also,  as-I-am.    3.  Riches  bring  cares.     (Ira  30s). 


68  REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAXD 

4.  The-devil  can  cite  Scripture  for-his-pnrpose.  5.  Know  how 
sublime  it-is  to-suffer  and-be  strong.  6.  All  cruelty  springs  from 
weakness. 

221.  They- will-set  out  on-the  fourth  Thursday  of-April,  and- 
travel  from-North  to-South-America  for-pleasure  merely.  (15 
times  in  3m)  • 

222.  TRANSLATE. 

-.;S.l<:::a..Xr..'D..lr^.«^...:r<,r..L:^.jL,. 

..l..^..?N..sJ,„.^.,Wr\..^..\.:::>.?:::N^^^.. 

J..ki..«.fe.fc,.^..5...i^„_..l..k,. 
,>,..o:^...l.:X^.-.,.:r:!:^....,4i..l:^>. 


THE   REL-HOOK,     ASPIliATE   TICK   A^D   DOT. 


69 


LESSON  XVI. 


THE  REL-HOOK,  AND  THE  ASPIRATE  TICK  AND  DOT. 
223. 

Mel     nel        rel  ler      hw         hi  hr        hm  hn       hng 


Daniel 

hail 

whisper 


harm                  ^ 
hem  i-'-s 

Henry     '^"^ 


224.  The  liquid  I  occurs  so  frequently  in  connection  with  raj', 
em,  and  en,  as  in  choral,  camel,  and  tunnel,  that  it  has  been 
found  expedient  to  denote  the  double  sounds  rl,  ml,  and  nl,  by 
attaching  a  large  initial  hook  to  the  stems  ray,  em,  and  en,  the 
double  letters  thus  obtained  being  named  mel,  nel,  and  rel. 

225.  A  large  initial  hook  attached  to  lay  signifies  that  ar  is  to 
be  added,  the  character  ler  being  equivalent  to  lay-ar,  as  in  color. 

226.  Write:  Animal,  tunnel,  signal,  penal,  color,  diagonal, 
finally,  family,  nominal,  original,  Colorado,  relish,  paternal,  relic, 
globular,  criminal,  colonel,  scholar,  necessarily,  centennial, 
abdominal,  analyze,  arsenal  (ar),  autumnal,  barrel,  canal,  chron- 
ology* giillery,  jocular,  millennial,  millennium,  polar,  sentinel, 
spinal,  relate,  temporal  (emp),  tribunal,  venal,  Daniel.  1  pas. 
collar,  rely,    release,  reliance.    3  pos.  plural,  analogy. 


THE    ASPIRATE    TICK. 


227.    A  short  initial  tick,    derived  from  hay,    signifying   the 
aspirate  h,  and  so  written  as  to  form  an  acute  angle  with  the 


70 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 


consonant  to  which  it  is  joined,  is  prefixed  to  waj',  el,  ar,  en,  em, 
iug,  kay  and  gay,  as  in  hale,  or  iohis2)er. 

228.  Write:  Hang,  harp,  harm,  holiday,  whisper,  whiskey, 
hell,  hem,  homicide,  wheel,  Avhip,  whistle,  hair;  1  pos.  horse. 
Vocalize,  hare,  heal,  whale,  hum,  hale,  hall,  hire,  hollow. 

THE     ASPIRATE    DOT. 

229.  Hay,  when  medial,  sometimes  fails  to  make  a  good  angle 
by  its  junction  with  other  letters;  as,  for  instance,  when  it  occurs 
before  em.  In  such  cases  the  aspirate  is  signified  by  a  small  dot 
written  just  before  the  vowel,  as  in  Abraham,  mayhem. 

Using  the  dot:  Abraham,  Heury,  mayhem.  Omitting  the  dot: 
hither,  likelihood,  alcohol,  adhere. 


230. 


WORD    AXD    PHRASE    SIGNS. 


railroad 

railway-car 

behalf 

relinquish 

only    Christ 
Lord    Jesus 
Christ. 


231. 


EXERCISE  16. 


1.  A-thing-of  beauty  is-a  joy  forever.  2.  Custom  is-the-law  of 
fools.  3.  Faith  is-necessary  to  victory.  4.  Fear  has-many  eyes. 
5.  Gaiety  is-the  soul's  health;  sadness  is-its  poison.  G.  Her 
ample  page  rich  with-the  spoils  of-time.  7.  For  hope  is  but-the 
dream  of-those-that  wake.  8.  Unto-the -pure  all  things  are  pure. 
9.  Innocence  is  always  unsuspicious.  10.  Kings  ought-to-be  kings 
in-all  things.  11.  Knowledge  is  power.  12.  Laugh  if-you-are 
wise.  13.  And-he  that-lives  to-live -forever  never  fears  dying. 
14.  To-live-long,  it-is-necessary  to-live  slowly.  15.  Study  to-be 
quiet.     (2m  30s). 

232.  While-the  railway-car  is  ti'aveling-to  Denver,  he-thinks- 
it-possible  for-the  colonel  to-ride  there  on  horse-back.  (15  times 
in  3m). 


233. 


THE  W-HOOK. 
TKAXSLATE, 


71 


J^.^..C..l^l.'k:d..A..y::::..Crrr..^l.. 

..:r^^...iiA^r.ly..L^..cd..::::'..:%^^..^.. 


c     «^ 


,ri. 


,^ 


LESSON     XVII. 


m 


THE  W-HOOK. 


Wei 
Tver 
wem 

quail 

quorum 

swim 


wen 
sail 


•^ —  *^ — .  sail 


swear 

Wednesday 

wilderjess. 


235.  A  small  initial  hook,  representing  the  consonant  ?';,  is  at- 
^tched  to  lay,  ray,  em,  and  en,  the  characters  thus  formed  being 
warned  wel,  wer,  Avem,  and  wen. 

236.  The  w-hook  is  derived  from  the  coalescent  semi -circle 
^  weh,  Avhich,  when  prefixed  to  these  consonants,  is  so  adapted  as 

to  form  a  hook.  The  w-hook  differs  essentially  from  the  r,  1,  and 
rel  hook  series.  The  Av-hook  itself,  after  the  analogy  of  the  s-cir- 
cle,  denotes  the  consonant  way;  e.  g.,  in  sail  and  loail,  both  the 
circle  and  hook  are  read  before  lay.  Whereas,  in  the  other  series 
above  named,  the  hook  itself  does  not  represent  I  or  /•,  but  is  sim- 


72 


KEPOKTLXG  STYLK   OF   SHOKT-HAXD. 


ply  a  moditicatiou  of  the  cousouaut  stem  to  denote  that  one  or  the 
other  of  these  liquids  is  to  be  added;  e.  g.,  the  character  ^-1— «o'e 
is  not  read  rake,  as  it  would  be  did  the  hook  itself,  which  is  formed 
first,  denote  r.  The  w-hook  is  itself  the  sign  for  w,  while  in  the 
double  consonant  (the  1,  r,  and  rel  hook)  series,  each  hooked  letter 
is  an  indivisible  character  representing  pZ,  pr,  ler,  etc. 

237.  Write:  Quill,  quire,  quorum,  swim,  ware,  wealth, 
Wednesday,  welfare,  wilderness,  Avolf,  worm,  Edwin,  Walter,  Wil- 
liam, work,  worth,  worthy,  well,  willing,  window,  one,  wear,  warm, 
swear,  acquire,  beware.  Vocalize,  choir,  weary,  quail,  wall,  wine, 
wool. 


238. 


^ 


c^ 


When,  win 
one,  won 
worshi  p 

we-may-be 
as-well-as 
may-as-weU,most 
ly 


WORD   AXD   PHRASE   SIGXS. 


1  Pos.  we-are,  2  where,  3  aware. 


1  while,  we-will,  2  well,  3  awhile. 


1  with-me,  2  we-may,  with-him,  3  with-whom. 


nywhere,  inquirc-y,  2  nowaere,  3  unaware. 


'^T^..'^.^ 


welcome 
whensoever 
■  commonwealth 

with-reference-to 

with-respect-to 

for-the-sake-of. 


EXERCISE  i; 


239.  1.  Necessity  does  everything  well.  2.  We-are  near  waking 
wheu-we  dream  that-we  dream.  3.  Whcn-j'ou-give,  give  with- 
joyand-smiling.  4.  Hope  is-a-willing  slave.  6.  They  laugh  that- 
win.  6.  Law  should-be-like  death,  which  spares  no-one.  7.  Love 
may  hope,  where  reason  would-despair.  8.  The-scholarlj'  colonel 
gives-US  reliable  news  with-reference-to-the  Colorado  railroads. 
9.  The-prize  the-teacher  offers  for-a  really  correct  exercise  is-a 
family  horse  of  bay  color,  and-every   pupil    should  trj'  to  win-it  if- 


THE  w-iiooK.  73 

possible.  10.  There-is-no  harm  ia-haviag-a  holiday  once-in-a 
while,  but  it-would-be  well  if-the  scholar  should-take-them  only 
rarely.     (2  m  30  s). 

THE    HARE    AXD-THE    TORTOISE. — .ESOP. 

240.  1.  The  hare  one -day  laughs  at-the  stubby  legs  and-slow 
pace  of-the  tortoise.  2.  Thc-kitter,  laughing,  said,  "Though-j^ou 
travellike-a  railway-car  I-will-win  in-a-race  with-you."  3.  The 
hare,  deeming  what-slie  affirms  to-be-simply-impossible,  agrees  to- 
the  proposal.  4.  They-also  agree  that-the  fox  shall  choose  the- 
race-track,  and-flx  the-goal.  6.  On  Wednesday,  the-day  which- 
the  fox  selects  for-the-race,  they-set  out  together.  6.  The-tor- 
toise  never  pauses  at-all,  but-travels  on-with-a  slow  and-uniform 
pace  until  she  finally  reaches  the-tree.  7.  The  hare,  relying  ou-his 
original  quickness,  has-no-anxiety  as-to-the  outcome  of-the -race, 
but  leisurely  eats  his  dinner  by-the  wayside  and -falls  asleep. 
8.  Finally,  waking  up,  and-moving  quickly  as-possible,  he -sees 
the-tortoise  already  at-the  goal,  and-quietly  dozing  there.     (3  m). 

241.  Beware  of-:-;ittiug  by-the  railway-car  window  while-we- 
are  crossing  over-the  dangerous  bridge.     (12  times  in  2  m). 

242.  TRANSLATE. 


.tn 


'..^...'^...o..>'...^...^.^...^... 


74 


REPORTING   STYLE  Ot    SIIOKT-IIAND. 


LESSON     XVIII. 


THE  F-HOOK. 
24"?. 

Pef      bef       tef      def       chef    Jpf     kef      gef 


\..S....L±...A.^...r:r^.:re...f€.^... 


Cough 

cave 

hoofs 

knave 

griet'-ve 

dwarf 


X  A^ 


strives 

rove 

heave 


-X  .      prophesy 

Vs—ty       havoc 
provjneiai. 


244.  A  final  hook,  signifying  ef  or  ve,  is  written  on  tlie  s-circle 
side  of  all  straight  letters;  e.  g.the  character  A-e/ signifies  kay-ef,  as 
in  cough,  and  kay-ve,  as  in  cave.  A  following  s-circle  is  written 
within  the  hook,  as  in  hoofs  or  strives. 

245.  Using  the  f-hook  and  vowels:  Cuff,  cough,  beer,  cave, 
Jove,  devout,  crave,  hive.  Without  vowels:  Bereave,  beverage, 
cuff,  bluff,  cavalry,  cavil,  deaf,  dwarf,  gave,  glove,  gruff,  incentive, 
lithograph,  octave,  primitive,  prophesy,  havoc,  province,  provincial, 
puff,  river,  roof,  rough,  relief  (rel),  scoff,  sensitive,  staff,  strife, 
strive,  tough,  David,  Stephen;     1  pos.  drive,  grieve,  grief. 

246.  Bern.  The  fact  that  either  one  of  any  two  cognate  sounds 
may  be  represented  by  the  same  sign  without  daugtr  of  ambiguity, 
has  been  fully  shown  in  the  case  of  the  s  and  z  circle.  The  same 
principle  applies  in  the  case  of  the  f-hook,  which  is  used  for  either 
of  the  two  sounds,  /  and  v,  without  ambiguity,  as  in  the  sentence, 
"They  may  well  c — ^,  considering  their  cause  ofc — ^"  The  student 
will  observe  that  the  f-hook,  which  is  always  written  on  the 
s-circle  side  of  consonants,  appears  ou  the  left  side  of  hay  and  ray, 
as  in  rove  and  heave.  As  this  hook  is  attached  to  straight  letters  only, 
the  alphabetic  V_  ef  and  V^  ve  must  be  used  whenever  a  curve 


THE   F-HOOK. 


immediately  precedes  them.  E.  g.  knave  is  uritten  "«'itli  tlie  full- 
length  eu-ve,  since  the  hook  caunot  be  used  for  ve  after  the 
curve  en. 


247. 


WORD   AND    PHRASE  SIGNS. 


L 
/ 


1  Po3.  ought-to-have,  it-ought-to-have,  2  whatever,  3  out-of,it-would-have. 


1  which-ought-to-have,  2  whichever,  which-have,  3  which-would-have. 


1  sucii-ought-to-have,  2  such-have,  3  such-would-have. 


1  perfect,  2  proof,  prove,  3  approve. 


1  each-will-have,  2  which-will-have,  3  much-will-have. 


Careful-ly 

belief-ve 

differ-eut-ce 

everlasting-life 

just-had 

must-give 

laws-of-life 

laws-of-health 

must-have 

must-do 
must-be 
must-come 


try-to-have 

ever-and-ever 

for-ever-and-ever 

poverty 

derive 

twelve,  it-will-have 

set-off,  2  set-forth 

which-are-to-hv,  3  wch- 

were-to-have. 
such-are-to-hv.,  3  such- 

were-to-hv. 
govern -ed-ment 
said-to-have 
whoever,  who-have. 


EXERCISE  18. 

248  THE    WIDOW    AND-TUE    SHEEP. — ^SOP. 

1.  A-poor  widow  had-one  solitary  sheep.  2.  At  shearing-time, 
wishing-to-take  its  fleece  and-to  avoid  pa}'ing  out-a-vcry  large 
sum  of-money,  she-took-it  with  her  shears  so  uuskillfully,  that- 
with-the  fleece  she-took-the  flesh.  3.  The-sheep,  writhing  becausc- 
of-the  injury,  said,  "Why  do-you  do  me  so-much  harm?  4.  What- 
weight  does-my-life  add  to-the  wool?    5.  If-you-wish  my  flesh, 


76  REPORTtXG  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAXD. 

there-is-the  butcher  who- will  kill  me  in-a  trice.  (^.  But  if-jou- 
wish  to-take  my  fleece  only,  there-is-the  shearer,  who-will  shear 
me  and-do  no  harm."  7.  Much  loss  may-be-caused  by-making 
too-small  au-outlay.     (2ra). 

249.  You-should  obey  the -laws-of -health  if-you-would-have 
relief  now;  and-be  governed  by  wise  proverbs,  if-you-would-have 
everlasting-life.     (8  times  in  2m) . 

250.  TRANSLATE. 


A 


f 


}..^..^....(;....W:>^.«.<i.^..C..<{...Lr... 
„..L.X..l!)^....'<d>.A..j..D.:::XJ...S:r.. 

.1 >...,!^.-..^..4 -i^-. 


■?/ 


v:>,//.-.,...... iR.A..... 


THE   N-HOOK. 


77 


LESSON  XIX. 


251. 


Pen 


THE  N-HOOK. 

ten  den  chon  jen   ken   gen   hen 


\..X...Ll...'-f...^.. 


Tone 
roan 
twine 

abstinence 

economy 

brain 

chagrin 
cistern 
strain 


.d-^Jl 


■t' 


.:i^. 


nc/      ,/^^     Eu-ene 
'  adjourn 


/")  Q  sustain 

,1     \/\/^7  barbariai 

U...\r..\:..,.'rrP...    stricken 


tangible 
Unitarian 
■1     sanguine. 


252.  Another  final  hook,  signifying  n,  is  annexed  to  both  straight 
and  curved  letters.  Wlieu  joined  to  straight  stems,  it  is  written  on 
the  side  opposite  the  f-hook,  as  in  tone  or  roan. 

253.  Vocalize:  Cane,  chain,  dawn,  dine,  pain,  rainbow,  stain, 
tone,  canopy,  acorn,  bane,  bean,  bone,  dean,  deign,  drone,  pan,  pin, 
pine,  twine,  reign,  Eugene,  Jane,  Jean;  1  pos.  keen,  coin,  queen. 
Without  vowels :  Again,  been,  can,  run,  stone,  ten,  gain,  abandon, 
abstain,  abstinence,  chaplain,  adjourn,  branch,  bunch,  burn,  corn, 
cotton,  deacon,  denounce,  detain,  libertine,  discipline,  disdain, 
economy,  kitchen,  Latin,  mechanic,  mourn,  obtain,  train,  candy, 
ordain,  organ  (ar),  origin,  pagan,  reckon,  retain,  scorn,  southern, 
drench,  planet,  Spanish,  sudden,  sustain,  taken,  turn,  obstinate, 
torn,  vacancy,  beacon,  jiropound,  denote,  wagon,  Michigan,  Oregon 
(ar),  banish,  barbarian,  barn,  beckon,  bench,  blown,  born,  bounty, 
canton,  canvass,  stricken,  captain,  cavern,  chagrin,  chicken,  chin, 
cistern,  county,  cunning,  dainty,  den,  din,  disjoin,  expunge,  for- 
eign, gentile,  glen,  groan,  grown,  hinge,  hurricane,  laconic,  maiden, 
marine,  mitten,  panic,  pen,  pinch,  plunge,  retrench,  ribbon,  san- 


78 


REPORTING  STYLE  OF   SHORT-HAND 


guine,  skin,  span,  sponge,  strain,  surgeon,  tangible,  tenacious, 
tinge,  ton,  treucli,  Unitarian,  virgin,  waken,  weapon,  ■wrench, 
Austin,  Conrad,  Dan,  John,  Blanch;  1  pos.  spine,  tin,  join,  enjoin, 
chronic;  3  pos.  attune,  attain,  brown,  June,  town,  spoon. 


254. 

Upon 

happen,  punish-ecl- 

rueat 
spoken 

denominate-tion 

dune 

down,  providential 

doctrine 

darken 

eternal 

benevolent-ence 

Western 

North-western 

Washington 

beneficial 

larger-than 


WORD    AND   PHRASE   SIGNS. 


determine 

niatrnificent-ence 

question 

European 
such-a-one 
,  at-length 

rather-than 
agaiu-and-again 
over-and-o  ver-again 


EXERCISE  19. 

256.  1.  Pain  maj'^-be-said  to-follow  pleasure  as-its  shadow. 
2.  Peace  is  rarely  denied  to-the  peaceful.  3.  Pity  is  akin  to-love. 
4.  Pity  is  love  when-grown  into  excess.  5.  Pi'ayer  is-to  religion 
what  thinking  is-to  philosophy.  6.  To-pray  is-to-make  religion. 
7.  Ple-that-has-uo  cross  deserves  no-crown.  8.  The-Bible  is-a- 
window  in-this  prison  of  hope,  through  wliich-we  look  iuto-eter- 
nity.     (Im30s). 

256.  It-has-been  spoken  again-and-again  by-the  chaplain  that- 
the-doctrine  of-the  Christian-religion  is-that-life  is  eternal,  rather- 
than-a-brief  span  only.      (7  times  in  2  m) . 


THK   X-HOOK. 
257.  TRAXSLATE. 

...H^.c.f..,^.^,  >^ 
.c^.[.>,.A.>,..z::rr:....i. iT.oZ' 

.A..^...'^..,..^.'OZZ.l^....c>J....rr^..... 


70 


LESSON  XX. 


THE  N-HOOK— CONTINUED. 


258. 


Fen  ven  thn  then  esn  zen  shen  zhen  Ian  arn  men  nen  wayn  yen 


Thence 
means 
iron 

dense 

chance 

learn 

financial 

ransom 

Kansas 


"^ 


^ 


1^..^.. 


3^...<i^..^.- 


^^^-<^y!3i.CMCi^.. 


mechanism 

density 

transpire 

amanuensis 

resistance 

tavern 

Bilence 

delineation 

lantern. 


80  REPORTING   STYLE   OK   SIIOKT-HAXD. 

259.  Since  a  hook  can  bo  conveniently  written  only  -within, 
or  following  the  direction  of  curves,  but  one  flnal  hook  can  be 
joined  to  these  letters.  This  is  properly  chosen  to  represent  n, 
which  occurs  much  more  frequently  than  f  and  v. 

260.  Vocalize:  Lean,  loan,  iron,  noun,  Ethan,  Julian,  Adaline. 
Without  vowels:  Man,  main,  known,  none,  Maine,  cannon,  coffin, 
cognomen,  dominion,  earn  (ar),  examine,  fancy,  finish,  infancy, 
arrange  (ar),  Italian,  learn,  lengthen,  machine,  maintain,  manage, 
manager,  minute,  saloon,  Monday,  monarch,  monotonous,  Roman, 
season,  sermon  (ar),  situation,  menace,  then,  specimen,  vanity, 
vanish,  villain,  vain,  anonymous,  German,  French,  London, 
admonish,  affront,  almanac,  amanuensis,  amen,  arraign  (ar), 
battalion,  brilliancy,  clemency,  delineation,  diminish,  diminution, 
diminutive,  domain,  feminine,  finance,  financial,  fringe,  frown,  fun, 
infringe,  lantern,  launch,  lone,  lunatic,  lunch,  minimum,  monopolize, 
monopoly,  moon,  muslin,  ocean,  omen,  orphan,  outline,  permanence, 
million  (mel),  phenomenon,  Prussian,  raven,  refine,  refrain,  sliun, 
summon,  sunshine,  tavemi,  thin,  throne,  tuition,  urn  (ar),  van, 
varnish,  vein,  venom,  vine,  violin,  Avorkman,  Aaron,  Allen,  Alonzo, 
Benjamin,  Franklin,  Jonathan,  Napoleon,  Nathan,  Orlando, 
Solomon,  Helen,  Josephine,  Lillian,  Susan.  1  pos.  men,  even, 
evening,  often,  line,  mine,  mean,  meaning,  fine,  shine,  thine; 
3  pos.  than,  noon. 

261.  When  the  n-hook  is  attached  to  curves,  a  following 
s-circle  is  expressed  by  being  written  within  the  hook,  as  in  thence, 
or  means. 

262.  Write,  fence,  lance,  opulence,  pestilence,  ransom,  renounce, 
patience,  excellence,  thence,  violence,  France,  silence,  lonesome, 
specimens. 

263.  At|the  end  of_,words,  this  consonant  is  expressed  after  straight 
letters  by  locating  the  s-circle  on  the  n-hook  side,  as  in  dense,  or 
chance. 

264.  Write:  Cadence,  credence,  decadence,  glance,  guidance, 
occurrence,  bronze,  intense,  prince,  residence,  resistance,  sem- 
blance, tense,  distance,  pretense,  expense,  trance,  transitory, 
vengeance,  dense,  instance,  dispense,  abundance,  extensive, 
eloquence  (el),  disdains,  detains,  Lawrence,  Kansas;  3  pos. 
chance,  dance,  towns,  appliance. 


THE   X-HOOK. 


81 


265.  But  the  circle  is  written  witliin  tlie  hoolc  wheu  medial, 
althougli  annexed  to  a  straiglit  letter,  as  in  mechanism.  In  density, 
however,  and  a  few  words  having  similar  outlines,  the  hook  is 
implied  by  the  manner  in  which  the  circle  is  wi'itteu.  The  writing 
of  the  medial  n,  when  its  hook  cannot  be  easily  expressed,  is 
often  entirely  omitted,  as  in  transpire,  this  consonant  in  such 
cases  being  readily  supplied  from  the  context. 

266.  Write :  Pennsylvania,  transpose,  transpire,  organism, 
mechanism,  Wisconsin,  density,  intrinsic,  transverse,  minstrel, 
transcribe. 


267. 


WORD    AND    PHRASE    SIGNS. 


.Human 

audience 

providence 

heaven 

ten 

experience 

June 

obedience 

responsible 


■J 


more-than 

at-once  ^_^  c^ 

everyone        CT"^       j       J 


v3' 


■3 


•^-'»-^- 


opinion 

union 

within,  heathen 

organize 

darliens-ness 

cross-examine 

opens,  upon-his 

some-one 
our-own 

fnr-instance 

in-his-situution 

human-life. 


c 


268. 


EXERCISE  20. 


I.  To  ootain  excellence  in-any  language  requires  much  study- 
and  patience;  especially  is-this  true  of  Latin  and-Grcek.  2.  She 
receives-lessons  in  French  every  ]\Ionday,  and-in  Spanish  every 
Thursday.  3.  That-she-may  thoroughly  learn  her  lessons,  she- 
writes  every-line  over-aud-over-again.  4.  She  will-make  use  of- 
these  languages  in-her  European  travels.  5.  In-his-situation,  he- 
would-be-likely-to  Improve  his  health  the-more  by  sailing  to- 
London,   rather-than  going  all-the-way  iu-a-wagon.     (ImSOs). 

269.  1.  Men  are  April  when-they  woo,  December  when-they 
wed.  2.  All  of  heaven  we-have  below.  3.  Nothing  maintains  its 
bloom  forever;  age  succeeds  to-age.  4.  To-err  is  human;  to- 
forgive,  divine.  5.  Many-men  know  how  to-flatter,  few-men 
know  how  to-praise.  G.  Learn-to-labor  aud-to  wait.  7.  No-man 
6 


82 


REPORTING   STYLE    OF   SHORT-H.OfD. 


flatters  the--vvomaii  he-trul}'  loves.  8.  Love  is-a-reality  which-is 
born  in-the  fairy  regions  of  romance.  9.  Shallow  men  believe  in 
luck;  strong  men  believe  in-cause-and-effoct.     (1  m  45  s). 

270.  Every-one  who  begins  the-stndy  of  human-life  will- 
believe  more-than  ever-before  in  Providential  guidance.  (5  times 
in  1  m). 


271. 


TRANSLATE. 


"f-H-- 


LESSON  XXI. 


272. 


THE  SHUN-HOOK. 


Ambition 
occasion 
associations 

diction 
section 
missionary 

separation 

suppression 

election 


o.7^.}^..J.T:^c^.W?.v:^.. 


...43:^<cv^ 


!\). 


.te.^..>r?. 


^3^.l.75..3S.c^.. 


remuneration 

veneration 

portion 

transgression 

translation 

assertion 

exceptional 

exhibition 

relations. 


THE    SHUX-IIOOK.  83 

273.  A  large  final  hook,  corresponding  in  size  with  the  rel-hook, 
is  used  to  denote  tlie  frequent  endings  tiun,  cion,  sion,  etc.  This 
hook  is  written  within  curves,  as  in  ambition,  and  on  the  s-circle 
side  of  straight  letters,  as  in  occasion.  Like  the  hook  for  /  and  v, 
this  also,  as  shown  by  the  examples  just  given,  represents  two 
cognate  sounds,  viz.  shn  and  zhn. 

274.  Vocalize:  Emotion;  1  pos.  auction.  Without  vowels: 
Action,  attention,  abbreviation,  animation,  dissipation,  declamation, 
definition,  depression,  dissension,  designation,  desolation,  devotion, 
discussion,  elevation,  emigration,  evasion,  expedition,  foundation, 
impression,  indignation,  intimation,  rational,  irrational  (ar),  limi- 
tation, motion,  locomotion,  nation,  notation,  occupation,  omission, 
oration  (ar),  presumption,  i^robation,  prosecution,  profession,  pro- 
vision, repetition,  revision,  selection,  session,  submission,  associa- 
tion, acclamation,  aggregation,  ammunition,  crucifixion,  promo- 
tion, dictation,  dimension,  amputation  (emp),  ascension,  aspiration, 
assassination,  assimilation,  celebration,  coalition,  decapitation,  de- 
lusion, digression,  discrimination,  division,  elongation,  emulation, 
erection,  erudition,  evolution,  exclamation,  exertion,  exhortation, 
expectation,  exportation,  extermination,  exultation,  inflammation, 
invasion,  involution,  isolation,  lamentation,  location,  negotiation, 
nutrition,  observation,  option,  penetration,  pension,  perpetration, 
persecution,  petition,  population,  preservation,  prevention,  pro- 
fusion, progression,  prolongation,  recrimination,  remuneration, 
resolution,  restoration,  restriction,  resurrection,  salutation,  sepa- 
ration, solution,  subscription,  supervision,  termination,  transgres- 
sion, translation,  veneration,  violation,  volition;  1  pos.  creation, 
edition,  mission,  missionary,  occasion,  vision,  caution,  option, 
alleviation;  3  pos.  addition,  approbation,  dissolution,  passion,  rep- 
utation, allusion. 

275.  When  the  straight  letter  to  which  this  hook  is  attached  is 
preceded  by  a  hook,  circle,  or  other  consonant  sign,  on  the  s-circle 
side,  it  will  be  found  more  convenient  to  strike  the  shuu-hook  on 
the  side  opposite,  as  in  education,  or  section. 

276.  Write:  Election,  exception,  execution,  education,  exclu- 
sion, exhibition,  fraction,  induction,  intoxication,  invocation,  obli- 
gation, plantation,  restitution,  portion,  proportion,  distribution, 
assertion,  vegetation,  reception,  reflection,  relation,  section,  station, 


84 


liErOKTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 


adoration,  suspicion,  recollection,  abduction,  adjudication,  adop- 
tion, affection,  benediction,  benefaction,  classification,  dejection, 
distraction,  edification,  expiration,  exploration,  explosion,  faction, 
friction,  infection,  fiction,  projection,  seclusion,  specification,  sub- 
stitution, vacation,  variation,  visitation;  1  pos.  diction,  dictionary; 
3  pos.  agitation,  application,  attraction,  elocution  (el) ,  suppression, 
avocation. 


277. 

Confession 

dissatisfaction 

destruction 

examination 

cross-examination 

determination 

inclination 
injunction 
institution 

representation 

sanction 
temptation 

perfection 
operation 
oppression 


WORD-SIGNS. 


invention 
reduction 
reformation 

information 
signification 
connection 

revelation 
revolution 
suspension. 


EXERCISE  21. 

278.  1.  The -two  offices  of -memory  are  collection  and-distribu- 
tion.  2.  "VVliatever  is  popular  deserves  attention.  3.  I-know  no- 
manner  of-speaking  so  offensive  as-tliat  of-giving  praise  and- 
closing  it  with-an-exception.  4.  The -only-things  in-which-we 
can-be-said  to-have-any  property  are  our-actions.  5.  Strong  rea- 
sons make  strong-actions.  G.  We  ask  advice,  but  we-mean  appro- 
bation. 7.  Affectation  discovers  sooner  what  one  is  than-it-makes- 
known  what  one  would  fain  appear  to-be.  8.  No  decking  sets- 
forth  anything  so-much-as  affection.  9.  We-are-never  like  angels 
till-our  passion  dies.  10.  Charity  is-a-wish  for-a-pei'fect  educa- 
tion. 11.  All-is  holy  where  devotion  kneels.  12.  Education  is- 
the-chief  defense  of  nations.  13.  Love  is-the  piety  of-the  affec- 
tions. 14.  Take  away  ambition  and- vanity,  aud-where-will-be 
your  heroes  and-patriots?     (2  m  30  s). 


TUE   S-SUUN  AND  INITIAL  N   HOOKS.  85 

279.  The-lawyer  raises  objections  to-the  cross-examiuation 
for-the-reasoii-tliat-the  witness,  in-making  his  explanation  of-the 
invention,  gives-information  as-to-his-own  profession,  whicli-has- 
no-relation  to-his  examination-iu-chief .     (3  times  in  1  m) . 

280.  TRANSLATE. 

.^nfe. . .  .'-:^ .  ^ . . .  .'^. .  .<.Tj  . .  \^rn>Tr>,^rr. . .  .<^.  >. 

„4...p„.V^....^...(y:Tr....^^^.....S...l^..,.7^.... 


LESSON    XXII. 


281. 


THE  S-SHUN  AND  INITIAL  N  HOOKS. 


Civilization 
transitions 
dispensation 

enslave 
inscribe 
inseparable 

economical 

woman,  1  pos.  women 

trance 

transmission 
qualification 
furniture 


cessation 

imposition 

demonstration 


■•^■^'-f 


282.  The  syllables  denoted  by  the  shun-hook,  -when  they  occur 
after  an  s-circle,  are  expressed  by  continuing  the  stroke  until  a 
small  hook  is  formed  on  the  side  opposite,  as  in  civilization.  The 
plural  is  formed  by  ■vyriting  a  circle  within  the  hook,  as  in  transitio7is. 


86 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND 


283.  Write:  Deposition,  dispositions,  accession,  physician, 
position,  positions,  propositions,  sensation,  supposition,  civiliza- 
tion, imposition,  cessation,  exposition,  procession,  requisition, 
succession,  vexation,  dispensation;  1  pos.  decision,  opposition, 
precision,  acquisition;  3  pos.  accusation,  transition,  possession, 
possessions. 


THE    INITIAL    N-HOOK. 

284.  The  prefixes  in,  en,  and  un,  vrhen  followed  by  a  circle  and 
curve  with  wliichtlie  alphabetic  ^_,  en  would  not  form  a  convenient 
juncture,  are  denoted  by  a  similar  hook,  as  in  enslave.  This  is  also 
used  in  connection  with  the  triple  consonant  series,  as  in  inscribe, 
or  inseparable. 

285.  Using  the  proper  initial  and  final  hooks:  Curtain,  drain, 
drove,  engrave,  explain,  grain,  graphic,  grave,  matron,  patron, 
plain,  plenty,  pronounce,  prudence,  utterance,  restrain,  train, 
venerable,  worn,  decline,  economical,  tribune,  incline,  woman, 
criterion,  demonstration,  fui*niture,  paragraph,  prefer,  reference, 
transgress,  transmission;  1  pos.  qualification,  women,  clean, 
cleave,  clime,  green;  3  pos.  transcribe,  crown,  drown,  plan,  traffic, 
administration. 


286. 


PHRASE    SIGNS. 


In-some 
in-as-many 


.■:3^. 


In-his-expression     O).  ^     c3v 
in-his-experience  v)  o 


.1 


&^ 


■J 


in-consideration 
in-his-description 


in-his-usual 
in-seeming. 


EXERCISE  22. 


287. 


THE-BEAR    AND-THE    TWO    TRAVELERS. — ^SOP. 


1.  Two-men  were  traveling  together  when-they  suddenly  came 
upon-a  bear.  2.  One-of-them  quickly  hid  in-the-branclies  of-a- 
tree;  the  other,  seeing-that-he-would-be-taken,  fell  down,  and- 
when-the-bear  came  up  to-him,  sought  to  feign-the  appearance 
of-deuth  as-much-as-possible.  3.  The-bear  soon-took  his  leave, 
for,  it-is-said,  he-will-only  eat  game  that-has-ljeen  slain.   4.  When-. 


THE   S-SHUX  AND  INITIAL  N   nOOKS.  87 

he-was-gone,  tlie-other  traveler  carae-down  from-the  tree,  and 
jocularly  said,  "What-was-it  that-the-bear  spoke  in-j-our  ear?" 
5.  The -answer  was,  "He-gave-me  this-advice :  Never-travel  with- 
one  who-will-leave-you  at-the  approach  of-danger."  6.  Ill  luck 
tries  one's  sincerity.     (2  m). 

288.  The-physician  in-his  deposition  says,  that  in-his-experience 
he-has-had-occasion  many-times  to-prescribe  to-men-aud-women 
of  all  nationalities.     (4  times  in  1  m) . 

289.  TRANSLATE. 


88 


REPORTIXG  STYLE   OF   SIIOKT-IIAXD. 


LESSON  XXIII. 


290. 


THE  ST  AND  STR  LOOPS. 


List 

stump 

disposed 

boaster 

stranger 

illustration 

stubborn 
statistics 
digestion 


^3^ 


../..r^.^L... 


..S^t\}1^.Xy 


gestation 

against 

justify 

gesture 
manifest 

stage 

honestly 
8i)inster 
abstractlc.,^. 


THE    ST-LOOP. 

291.  S  is  very  often  followed  by  t,  forming  the  consonant 
double-sound  st,  of  so  frequent  occurrence  in  our  language,  and 
which  is  expressed  by  an  elongation  of  the  s-circle,  as  in  list,  or 
stump.     Zd,  also,  is  sometimes  denoted  by  this  loop,  as  in  disjwsed. 

292.  Like  the  s-circle,  it  may  be  followed  by  the  s-shun  hook, 
as  in  gestation;  and  implies  n  by  being  located  on  the  n-hook  side 
of  straight  letters,  as  in  agaiiifit. 

293.  Vocalize:  Beast,  boast,  coast,  feast,  ghost,  host,  post, 
toast,  taste,  steal,  waste,  steel,  twist;  1  pos.  moist,  steam,  steep, 
accost.  Without  vowels:  Placed,  cast,  chest,  dust,  fast,  guest, 
haste,  just,  justify,  list,  against,  arrest  (ai'),  breakfast,  detest,  dis- 
gust, dishonest,  distrust,  earnest,  enlist  (el),  gesture,  harvest,  in- 
disposed, infest,  intrust,  invest,  investigation,  manifest,  molest, 
must,  most,  pretext,  stage,  star  (ar),  state,  statistics,  stead,  stole, 
stop,  stomach,  store,  test,  testify,  text,  trust,  iJtmost,  vast,  west, 
stump,  manifestation,  almost,  destiny,  abreast,  adjust,  bequest, 
best,  blest,  breast,  bust,  crest,  dentist,  digest,  digestion,  fantastic, 
fist,  forest,  frost,  gTist,  incrust,  inquest,  jest,  nest,  protest,  request, 
robust,  rust,  statesman,  statute,  stem,  stern,  stiff,  sting,  stitch, 
storm  (ar),  stubborn,  stuff,  stumble,  vest,  worst,  wrist;  1  pos. 
August,  cost,  priest,  least,  still,  stock,  st\-le,  honest,  honestly; 
3  pos.  last,  past,  stamp,  attest. 


89 


THE   STR-LOOP. 


294.  The  st-loop,  when  -written  considerably  broader,  denotes 
the  added  r,  as  Ln  boaster,  or  stranger. 

295.  Write:  Cluster,  lustre,  master,  illustration,  monster, 
plaster,  Sylvester,  minister,  spinster,  register,  obstruction,  bluster, 
stran!:^e,  stranger;  3  pos.  admiuistei',  abstraction. 

296.  Hem.  The  st-loop  should  be  made  so  slender  as  to  appear 
like  an  elongated  s-circle.  It  will  then  be  readily  distinguishable 
from  the  str-loop,  which  is  written  somewhat  longer  and  consider- 
ably broader.  The  large  loop,  however,  should  not  be  rounded 
too  much,  or  it  will  be  liable  to  be  confounded  with  the  sez-circle. 

297.  WORD    AXD    PHRASE    SIGNS. 

To  secure  facile  outlines,  the  circle  only,  instead  of  the  loop, 
is  often  used  when  phrasing,  as  in  rinist-be  (eras-be) . 

First  Constitution-of-the-U.  S. 

at-flrst 


by-the-first 

one-or-two 

we-must 

North-west 


P    ,r-,  c  ^^  one-of-the-best 

l/^SJ  ^■'\\C.^^'^  one-of-tUe-most 


I  extraordinary 

^"^        \  mystery 


\-- 


Baptist 


circumstances-  f_p    C.x(    <i--^  in-reply-to 

of-the-case  Q  \         Ci  iu-response-to. 


EXERCISE  2:5. 

298.  1.  The-presence  of-those  whom  we-love  is-as-a-double 
life;  absence,  in-its-anxions  longing  and -sense-ofvacanc}',  is-as-a- 
foretaste  of-death.  2.  We-that-live  to  please  must  please  to-live. 
3.  It-is-best  to-be  with-those  in-time  that-we-hope  to-be-with 
in-eternity.  4.  They-  that  govern  must-make  least  noise.  5.  Grace 
was  in-all  her  steps,  heaven  in  her  eye.  6.  By  gaming  we  lose 
both  our  time-and-treasure,  two  things  most  precious  to-the  life 
of  man.  7.  Genius  always  gives-its-best  at-lirst,  prudence  at-last. 
8.  Haste  is-of-the  devil.  9.  Though  I-am-always  in-haste,  I-am- 
never  in-a-hurry.  10.  Men  love  in-haste,  but-they  detest  at- 
leisure.  11.  Hope  is-a  lover's  staff.  12.  That-man  lives  twice, 
that-lives  the-flrst  life  well.     13.  The-grave  is-a-common  treasurv 


90  REPORTING   STYLE   OF  SHORT-HAND. 

to-which  we-must-all  be-taken.     14.  Choose  always  the-way-that 
seems  the-best,  however  rough  it-may-I>e.     (2  m  30  s) . 

299.  1.  To  step  aside  is  humau.  2.  Music  washes  away  from- 
the  soul  the-dust  of-every  day  life.  3.  Obstinacy  is  ever  most- 
positive  when-it-is-most  iii-the-wrong.  4.  They-who  forgive 
most  shall-be-most  forgiven.  5.  Passion  costs  me  too-much  to 
bestow  it  upon  every  trifle.  6.  To-climb  steep  hills  requires  slow 
pace  at-flrst.  7.  Every  noble-work  is-at-first  impossible.  8.  Time 
is  generally  the-best  doctor.  9.  In-poetry,  wluch-is  all-fable, 
truth  is  still  the-perfection.  10.  Poetry  is  truth  dwelling  in- 
beauty.  11.  Ye  stars,  that  are-the  poetry  of -heaven!  12.  Praise 
is-only  praise  Avhen-well  addressed.  13.  Solid  pudding  against 
empty  praise.  14.  Live-this-day  as-if-the-last.  15.  Who-makes- 
the  fairest  show  means-the-most  deceit.  IG.  Small  service,  is  true 
service  while  it-lasts.     (2  m). 

300.  One-of-the-best  and-most  earnest  of-the  ministers  in-the- 
North-west  has-just-been  advanced  to-a  higher  post.  (5  times 
in  1  m) . 

301.  TRANSLATE. 

.x.(!^.i::<r-...^../..^^.jj..\^.,>9 

.^..;../^..L...r::?....pJ..<:^.^..<;?..^..'2...'::^..„ 

.z^^yAl.:^.^..! (i?...L(j..::<r:M.. 

.<^;^.<rK^...^X^..."D......>..C...^...-rC....^/l.>^ 


THE   Li:XGTHKXEl)   CLKVE. 


91 


LESSON     XXIV. 


THE    LENGTHENED    CURVE. 


302. 


Father 

letter 

order 


entrance 

f  urtlicrmore 
material 


legislator. 


303.  A  curve  written  double  its  usual  length  signifies  tlie 
addition  of  thr,  as  in  father;  sometimes,  also,  of  tr  or  dr,  as  in 
letter,  or  order. 

304.  Tlie  tendeuey  of  the  writer  should  be  to  make  this  more, 
rather  than  less,  than  double  the  standard  length  curve,  in  order 
that  there  may  be  no  danger  of  confounding  the  two. 

305.  Write:  Alexander,  another,  center,  central,  slender, 
diameter,  eccentric,  enter,  entrance,  father,  further,  furthermore, 
hinder,  hindrance,  material,  maternal  (nel),  literal,  mother,  matter, 
order,  render,  calendar,  senator,  surrender,  tender,  thunder, 
thermometer,  whether,  Avander,  wonder,  yonder;  1  pos.  entire, 
entirely  (el),  immaterial,  neither;  3  pos. neutral  (el). 

306.  By  lengthening  ing  and  emp,  the  added  r,  ^r,  or  gr  is 
sianified,  as  in  lumber,  anger,  anchor. 

307.  Write:  Anger,  angry,  amber,  anclior,  chamber,  cumber, 
encumber,  finger,  hunger,  linger,  limber,  murder,  reporter  (ar), 
slumber,  temper. 


EXERCISE  24. 

308.  THE-THIEP    AXD-IIIS    MOTHER. — ^SOP. 

1.  A-boy  steals  a-lesson-book  from-one  of-his       play-fellOAVs 
and-takes-it  home  to-his-mother.    2.  She-neglects  to  punish,  and- 


02  REPORTI^'G   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

even  encourages  him.  3.  He-next-time  steals  a-cloak  and- 
brings-it  to-her,  when-she  praises  him  still  the-more.  4.  The- 
youth  soon-becoraes-a-man,  and-proceeds  to  steal  things-of 
higher  value.  5.  He-is-taken  Avhile  riding  away  on-a  stolen  horse, 
and- with  shackles  on,  is-taken-away  to-the  place  of  public-execu- 
tion. G.  His  mother  follows  Avith-the-rest,  aud-strikes  her-breast 
in  sorrow;  whereupon  the-young-man  says,  7.  "I-wish-to  say- 
something-to  my-motlier  in-her  ear."  8.  She  comes  near  him, 
when-he-quicklj'  seizes  her  ear  with-his-teeth  and-takes-it  off. 
9.  His  mother  cries  with-pain,  but-the-son  replies,  "Ah  mother, 
If-you-had-only  beaten  me  wheu-I  first  stole  that-lesson-book,  I 
should-never-have  come-to-this,  nor  Avould-the  law  oblige  me 
now  to  ignominiously  suffer  the -punishment  of-death."  (2m  30s) . 

309.  1.  Manners  are  stronger-than  laws.  2.  Order  is  heaven's 
first  law.  3.  He-that-will-be  angi-y  for-anything  will-be  angry 
for-uotliing.  4.  A-babe  is-a-mothcr's  anchor.  5.  Whether  your 
time  calls  you  to-live  or  die,  do  both  like-a  prince.  G.  He-con- 
quers grief  Avho-can-take-a  firm-resolutiou.  7.  It-matters- 
nothing  how-a-man  dies,  but-how  he-lives.  8.  Love  is,  I-believe, 
an-entirely  personal  poem.     9.  In-love  anger  is  always  false.  (Im). 

310.  The-Judge  calls-another  reporter  into-the  chamber  to- 
further  the-taking  of-testimony  in-the-case  of-the  murder  on-tlie 
Central-Railway.     (4  times  in  1  m). 


311. 


TRANSLATE. 


THE   HALVING   nUXCIPLE. 


93 


LESSON     XXV. 


THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE. 


312. 


Bit 

bed 

cut 

quote 

bolt 

slate 

exert 

start 

merit 

captive 

circuit 

educate 

strict 

transmit 

reciprocate 


uncertain 

suspect 

adjacent 

debtor 

inhabit 

precept 

discredit 

preeminent 

prerogative. 


313.  Oue  of  the  most  useful  contrivances  in  the  entire  system, 
called  the  Halving  Principle,  is  tliat  by  which  a  letter,  when  writ- 
ten half-length,  indicates  the  addition  of  t  or  d.  Thus,  \^  be, 
■when  written  half  its  usual  length,  is  read  be-te,  as  in  bit,  or  be-de, 
as  in  bed ;  —  kay,  when  halved,  has  the  force  of  kay-te,  as  in  cut, 
or  kay-de,  as  in  code.  Te  and  de  are  the  most  frequently  recurring 
consonants,  and  being  cognates,  no  ambiguity  results  from  the  ex- 
pression of  both  by  one  principle.  Ray  is  halved  only  when  com- 
bined with  other  consonants,  as  in  exert,  and  Avritten  full  length  in 
such  words  as  rate,  and  right. 

314.  In  the  following  list,  t  is  thus  iudicated :  vocalize,  boat, 
bout,  coat,  cut,  gate,  quote,  cat,  bolt,  slate,  mate,  twilight,  vault, 
violet,  dolt,  giant,  nut,  saint,  gait,  dote;  1  pos.clieat.  Without 
vowels :  Date,  get,  bet,  debt,  hate,  art,  late,  net,  let,  met,  fate, 
note,  vote,  sent,  lift,  left,  sect,  accent,  enact,  exact,  exert,  tact, 
adopt,  better,  insect,  accept,  acceptable,  apostate,  insert,  suspect, 
little,  lesult,  smart,  start,  limit,  merit,  motive,  docket,  native, 
pocket-  rabbit,  recent,  arithmetic,  alphabet,  instigate,  assent,  arti- 


91 


REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT-HAND. 


fice,  agent,  iutiraate,  rej^eat,  remote,  cadet,  capital,  locomotive, 
mathematics,  ratify,  petrify,  rectify,  rusticate,  support,  uucertaiu 
reject,  auditor  (ar),  remit  (ar),  imitate,  report,  annotate,  magnetic, 
resolute,  resort,  adjacent,  adjudicate,  adjunct,  agitate,  cognate, 
cottage,  dogmatic,  recapitulate,  export,  extinct,  inject,  intact, 
peasant,  submit,  musket,  theft,  upstart,  captive,  certain,  circuit, 
debate,  decent,  deject,  designate,  desolate,  detect,  educate,  debtor 
(ar),  eject,  elect  (el),  except,  execute,  habit,  habitual,  eminent, 
emulate,  erect,  estate,  inhabit,  innocent,  irritate,  legislate,  origi- 
nate, sentence,  abject,  Hamlet.  (L-hook)  implicate,  pleasant,  veg- 
etable, duplicate,  fluent;  1  pos.  client,  climate.  (R-hook)  intricate, 
precept,  present,  private,  product,  promote,  prospect,  protract, 
strict,  subtract,  tract,  transmit,  translate,  attribute,  bi'acelet,  pre- 
cinct, project,  reciprocate,  restrict,  thrift,  tribute,  decrepit,  affirm- 
ative, aggravate,  appreciate,  October,  credit,  deprecate,  detract, 
discredit,  extract,  transci'ipt,  preeminent,  prerogative,  approxi- 
mate. 

315.  Caution.  Care  should  be  taken  that  shortened  letters  are 
written  no  more  than  half  their  usual  length,  else  the  two  will  be- 
come confounded.  The  tendency  should  be  to  make  them  some- 
what less  than  half  the  standard  lemrth. 


316. 


WORD    AND    PHRASE    SIGNS. 


Without 

Almighty 

empiiatic 

nature 
natural-)  y 
posterity 

afternoon 

associate 

heart 

intelligence 
intelligible 
interchange 


V^ 


ra. 


^..1..:).. 


..^., 


»^ 


,),. 
>i.. 


(i_ 


^v^ 


^ 


heretofore 

hesitate 

manuscript 

after,  for-it 

yesterday 

intellect-ual 

postscript 
sometime 
better- than 

Washington  Ter. 

in-the-second-place 

somewhat. 


THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE.  95 

EXERCISE  25. 

3??.  1.  Always  rise  from  table  with-an  appetite,  and-you -will- 
never  sit  down  without-one.  2.  Wheu-we-feel  a-stroug  desire  to- 
thrust  our  advice  upon  others,  it-is-usually  because  we  suspect 
their  weakness;  but-we  ought  rather  to  suspect  our-own.  3.  To- 
be  happy,  we-must-be-true  to  nature,  and-carry  our  age  along- 
with  us.  4.  Beauty  is-a-possessiou  not  our-own.  5.  The-beauti- 
ful  are-never  desolate,  but-some-one  always  loves-them.  6.  It-is- 
better  for-a  youug-man-to  blush  than  to-turn  pale.  7.  Every 
Christian  is  born  great  because  he-is-born  for-heaven.  8.  That- 
which-is-so  universal  as  death  must-be-a  benefit.  9.  We-speak  of 
educating  our  children.  Do-we-know  that-our  children  also  edu- 
cate us?  10.  Fortune  is-the  rod  of-the-weak  aud-the  staff  of-the 
brave.  11.  Let  them  obey  who  know  how  to-rule.  12.  The- 
chains  of  habit  are  generally'  too-small  to-be  felt  till  they-are-too- 
strong  to-be-broken.  13.  Keep  thy  heart  with-all  diligence,  for- 
out-of-it  are-the  issues  of-life.     (2  m  30  s). 

318.  We-will-certaiuly  be-able  very-soon  to-make  verbatim- 
reports  of-the-emineut  speakers  in-the  debate  by-meaus-of-the 
stenographic  art.     (4  times  in  1  m) . 

319.  TRANSLATE. 

..f^.'^..e-:3...y..<^..^^..>'..:^...<::^..■!..(^^..C. 


-w..-.^-.:vi.,..i..a^...:^.  ...w... 


V 


.■s...'-:r..>^..\.Z..C:...l.^. 


.>?. 


96 


REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 


LESSON  XXVI. 


THE    ADDED    D. 


320. 


Might 

niijihty 

obliged 

date 

edit 

stood 

void 

avoid 

evidence 

rhetoric 

susceptible 

judicial 

went 

awkward 

between 

estimate 
ultimate 
Connecticut 

perpetual 

apart 

abstract 


.h>(^: 


..VCf^fe 


St  opped 

comrade 

infidel 

quite 

betide 

swift 

fortune 

per-eent 

covert 

integrity 


^ — r    lA  ^-7i  integrity 

(      V'~;5^'^\  prominent 
^ multiply 


y^.. 


Presbyterian 
/>      antagonis'n 

r>.V. . .  .       rpf  nrn 


3, 


s^. 


...^irx.™ 


Methodist 

eviLlent 

intentional 

didactic 

hint 

hermit. 


321.  Te  or  de,  when  follo'>vod  by  a  final  vowel,  cannot  be 
indicated  by  halving;  e.  g.,  might  is  expressed  by  the  shortened 
em,  while  mighty,  containing  a  final  vowel,  is  written  em-te. 

322.  Half-length  consonants,  when  standing  alone,  are  employed 
to  denote  words  that  contain  but  one  vowel;  e.  g.,  halved  de  is 
xised  for  date,  while  in  edit  the  alphabetic  de-te  must  be  ■written. 
Halved  ve,  first  position,  denotes  void,  hxxt  in  writing  avoid,  the 
full-length  ve-de  must  be  used.  The  application  of  this  rule 
secures  greater  legibility,  since  the  reader  is  expected  to  supply 
but  one  vowel  wheal  a  shortened  consonant  stands  alone. 

323.  In  the  following  list,  letters  are  shortened  to  express  the 
added  d:  Bed,  could,  good,  shade,  stood,  decided,  comrade, 
inetliod,  instead,  evidence,  educated,  invade,  infidel. 

324.  Words  composed   entirely  of   horizontal  and    shortened 

7 


THE   ADDED   D.  07 

letters,  are  written  in  tlie  first  position  wlien  the  accented  vowel  is 
first -place. 

325.  Write:  (1  pos.)  caught,  clot,  east,  bottom,  quite,  esteem, 
flght,  deed,  got,  heat,  did,  light,  bid,  enlighten,  God,  meet,  invite 
might,  night,  shot,  slight,  taught,  indeed,  speed,  void,  fit,  knot, 
lightning,  lot,  soft,  sort,  spot;  vocalize,  feat,  beat,  naught,  fought, 
betide,  feed,  knight,  neat,  salt,  sheet,  slide,  spite,  steed,  swift,  tide. 

326.  In  the  following  list  both  t  and  d  are  expressed  by  halving: 
Accelerate,  elucidate,  fortune,  per-cent,  percentage,  rhetoric, 
rapid,  notify,  dispute,  active,  actual,  admit,  apart,  catalogue, 
decayed,  didactic,  covert,  cupidity,  melt,  hint,  assault,  assimilate, 
athlete,  dissect,  dissent,  dissipate,  expedite,  extort,  exult,  fanatic, 
hereditary,  hermit,  isolate,  metaphor,  oriental  (el),  ostentations, 
perpetual,  phonetic,  I'efute,  schedule  (el),  seldom,  stupid;  1  pos. 
immature,  despite,  fault,  appetite,  exhort;  3  pos.  act,  adapt,  addict, 
apt,  doubt,  foot,  adequate,  mutual,  bad,  adult,  delude,  adopt, 
absent,  fat,  mute.  (Sez-circle),  necessitate,  systematic,  exasperate, 
susceptible,  predecessor.  (L-hook),  article,  beautiful,  delicate, 
doubtful,  emblematic,  hospitable,  judicial,  notable.  (R-hook), 
Godfrey,  crabbed,  crescent,  proximate,  Margaret,  district,  lubri- 
cate, dramatic,  enervate,  integral,  promote,  integrity,  prejudice; 
1  pos.  prominent;  3  pos.  attract,  attractive,  transact.  (Ro l-hook), 
paternal,  promulgate,  relent,  multiply,  federal,  intolerable, 
multiplication.  (W-hook),  upward,  acquaintance,  went,  warrant, 
quantity,  wayward,  reward,  acquainted,  Edward;  1  pos.  wind, 
inward,  awkward,  wild,  between,  ward,  wield;  3  pos.  backward, 
outward.  (F-hook),  advocate,  indefinite,  defect,  defective, 
photograph.  (N-hook),  pertinent,  Presb3'terian,  manipulate, 
beniflcent,  patern,  tenant,  mandate,  banquet,  opponent,  splendid, 
antagonism,  benefit,  return,  candid,  longitude;  1  pos.  eastern. 
(Shun-hook),  dedication,  litigation,  intention,  intentional,  estima- 
tion. (Loops),  abstract,  ol)struct,  distinct,  distribute,  investigate, 
stimulate,  stipulate.     (Initial  n-hook),  instruct. 

327.  The  halving  principle  is  applied  in  forming  the  past  tense 
of  regular  verbs,  as  obliged,  stopped. 

328.  Write:  Packed,  stopped,  stocked,  invested,  molested, 
trusted,  manifested,  transcribed,  obliged,  displayed,  employed, 
adopted,  dispatched,   solicited,   specified,  searched,   risked,  kept. 


98 


KEroiiTi^G  STYLE  OF  siiuirr-i;. 


329.  The  principle  is  applied  twice  iu  each  of  the  following; 
words:  Artist,  captivate,  capitulate,  estimate,  legitimate,  illegiti- 
mate (el),  mutilate,  ultimate  (el),  fortunate,  Connecticut,  evident, 
protect,  deduct,  latitude,  Methodist,  rectitude,  cataract;  1  pos. 
intent,  mitigate;  3  pos.  aptitude. 

330.  WORD    AXD    PHRASE     SIGNS. 

(^       j  1  Pos.  feature,  If-it,  2  after,  for-it,  3  future,  fact. 

)        I  1  east,  astonish-ed-ment,  2  establisli-ed-ment. 
j  1  it-ought,  3  at-it,  it-would,  it-laad, 

I        ;  1  did,  2  do-it,  3  added,  liad-it. 


History 

historian, eastern 
Act-of -Congress 

wisdom 

Word-of-God 

People-of-God 


at-all-events 

east-and-west 

onward 

fear-of-God 

good-and-bad 

in-the-world. 


331. 


EXERCISE  2(J. 


1.  The-good  is  always  beautiful,  the-beautiful  is  good.  2.  Good- 
ness is  beauty  in-its-best  estate.  3.  Men  often  make-up  in  wrath 
what  they- want  in  reason.  4.  Let-not  the-sun  go-down  upon  thy 
wrath.  5.  All  things  are  artificial,  for  nature  is-the-ai't  of-God 
6.  Biography  is-the  home  aspect  of  history.  7.  The-desire  of 
knowledge,  like  thirst  of-riches,  increases  ever  with-the  acquisi- 
tion of-it.  8.  Life  is  like  wine:  he-who-would  drink  it  pure  must 
drain  it  to-the  dregs.  9.  Literature  is-the-thought  of-thinking 
souls.  10.  Doing-good  is-the-only  certainly  happy  action  of-a- 
man's  life.  11.  A-life  that-is-worth  living  at-all  is  worth  writing 
minutely.  12.  The-universe  would-not-be  rich  enough  to  buy 
the-vote  of-an  honest  man.     13.   Character  is-a-perfectly  educated 


S,  0,  BAIIR 

LAWYER 
da;.:j^s,  TEXAS 

THE  ADDED   D.  '  99 

will.  14.  It-were  joy  to  die  if-there-be  gods,  and-sad  to-live  if- 
there-be  none.  15.  It-is-better  to-desire  than-to  enjoy;  to-love 
thau-to-be-loved.  16.  If-you-do  what-you  should-not,  you-must- 
bear  Avhat-you  would-not.  17.  If-there-was-no  future-life  our- 
souls  would-not  thirst  for-it.  18.  No-one  can-be-said  to-be  until 
he-is  dead.     19.   I-like  a-good  hater,     (3  m). 

332.  True  wisdom  is-to  know  what-is-best  worth  knowing, 
and-to-do  what-is-best  worth  doing.     (G  times  in  1  m) . 

333.  TRANSLATE. 


100 


KEPOKTIXG   STYLE   OF   SUOKT-UAM). 


LESSON  XXVII. 


334. 


SHORTENED  DOUBLE  CONSONANTS. 


Glad 

brought 

spread 

gratitude 

degenerate 

overtake 

remonstrate 

discreet 

secret 


.^ 


t\y      enameled 
^J^  ^-^  cultivate 


predominate 

virtual 

seclude. 


335.  Letters  of  the  double  and  triple  consonant  series,  are  also 
halved  to  signify  the  addition  of  t  or  d,  as  in  glad,  brought,  spread^ 
enameled.  In  these  examples,  it  will  be  observed  that  both  sounds 
expressed  by  the  double  consonant  are  pronounced  before  the  added 
t  or  d. 

336.  Using  the  1-hook  and  vowels:  Plate,  blade,  plat;  1  pos. 
fleet,  flight,  ble'ed,  clod,  deplete;  (without  vowels),  exclude,  inflate, 
blood,  glad,  flood,  cultivate,  cultivation,  explode,  include,  preclude, 
replied,  tumbled,  coupled,  displayed,  tangled,  entitled,  employed, 
smuggled,  doubled,  assembled,  rambled,  pamphlet,  multiform; 
1  pos.  plead,  blot,  glide,  plot;  3  pos.  cloud,  seclude.  (K-hook) 
vocalize,  trait,  brute,  prayed,  crowed,  cried,  migrate;  1  pos.  creed, 
trite;  (without vowels),  destroyed,  gathered,  labored,  prospered, 
papered,  uttered,  shirt,  tempered,  altered,  betrayed,  muttered, 
offered,  silvered,  measured,  treasured,  chartered,  recurred,  scat- 
tered, suffered,  illustrated,  clamored,  flattered,  traveled,  troubled, 
fluttered,  glittered,  sheltered,  scrupled,  arbitrate,  aristocrat,  Brit- 
ish, culprit,  gratitude,  degenerate,  fertile,  frustrate,  peneti-ate, 
perpetrate,  pervert,  shrewd,  vibrate,  virtual,  virtuous,  great,  re- 
treat, regret,  grade,  grateful,  celebrate,  democrat,  credible,  degrade, 
defraud,  hatred,  effort,  emigrate,  third,  trade,  hypocrite,  gi'atify, 
vertical,  bread,  overtake,  predicate,  cupl)oard,  verdict,  thread, 
dread,  intrude,  tread,  sacred,  spread,  straight,  secretary,  demon- 
strate, Elbert,  Frederick,  Richard,  Robert,  Gertrude,  Albert,  Alfred; 


SHORTENED  DOUBLE  CONSONANTS. 


101 


(using  ar),  overture,  orchard,  remonstrate;  1  pes.  discreet,  entreat, 
fright,  greet,  treat,  trot,  predominate,  prominent,  bright,  brought, 
fraught,  freedom,  pride,  immigrate,  street,  secret;  3  pos.  crowd, 
crude,  fruit,  proud,  graduate,  scrutiny. 


337.  WORD   AND   PHRASE   SIGNS. 

rv      1  Pos.  particular-ly,   2  opportunity,  3  part-y. 

1  according-ly,  creature,  2  cared,  occurred,  3  cured. 
1  till-it,  2  tell-it,  3  until-it. 


Partake 

majority 
minority 

at-any-rate 

British-America 

court-of-justlce 

virtue 

cliild 

calculate 

able-to-give-it 

spirit 

witli-regard-to 

at-all-its 

at-all-times 

Great-Britain 


^-y<~ij 


■h 


/^ 


e^ 


^ 


u^ 


*^A 


G    ^ 


Or:?^' 


-^ 


dr- 


<y^   ^ 


«<    «-^  c_9~ 


political 

prosperity 
able-to 

for-the-most-part 

delight 

guill-y 

Circulate 

co-operate 

hundred 

in-his-secret 

as-great-as 

from-it 

in-order-that 

in-order-tu 

in-regard-to. 


EXERCISE  27. 

338.  1.  To-do-an  evil  action  is  base;  to-do  a-good  action,  with- 
out incurring  dangei*,  is  common  enough;  but  it-is-tlie-part  of-a 
good-man  to-do  great-and  noble  deeds,  though-he  risks  everything. 
2.  Angels  are  bright  still,  though-the  brightest  fell.  3.  Men  re- 
semble the-gods  in-uothing  so-much-as  iu-doing-good  to-their 
follow-creatures.  4.  Many  delight  more  in-giving  of-presents 
than  in-paying  debts.  5.  Heaven  from  all-creatures  hides  the- 
book  of  fate.  6.  A-good  heart  will,  at-all-times,  betray  the-best 
head  in-the-world.  7.  The-greatest  trust  between  man-and-man 
is-the-trust  of-giving-counsel.     8.   The-next  dreadful  thing  to-a 


lO?'  KEPORTIXG   STYLE    QV   SHOKT-HAND. 

battle  lost  is-a  battle  won.  9.  It-is  seldom  the-case  that  beautiful 
persons  are  othci'wise  of -great-virtue.  10.  A-book  may-be  as- 
great -a  thing  as-a  battle.  11.  When  clouds  are-seen  wise-men  put 
on-their  cloaks.  12.  There -can-be  no  Christianity  where-thei'C' 
is-no  charity.  13.  Wliat-cau-the  Creator  see  with  greater  pleasure 
than-a-liajDpy  creature?  l-t.  The-last  enemy  that-shall-be  destroy- 
ed is  death.  15.  The-better  part  of  valor  is  discretion.  16.  He-is- 
not-ouly  idle  who-does-nothing,  but-he-is  idle  who-might-be 
better  employed.  17.  To  know  how  to-wait  is-the-great  secret 
of-success.     (3  m). 

339.  You-should-cultivate  a-good-memory  in-order-that,  at- 
all-times,  you-may-be-able-to-report  thu-exact-evidence  which, 
in-courts-of-justice,  is  sometimes  given  at-the  I'ate  of  two 
hundred  a-raiuute.     (3  times  in  1  m). 

340.  TRANSLATE. 


SHOKTEICED  FINAL-HOOK   CONSOMAN'TS. 


103 


LESSON  XXVIII. 


SHORTENED  FINAL-HOOK  CONSONANTS. 


equivalent 

strenKthened 

Ireland 


341. 

EMnd 

lend 

paved 

petitioned 

meant 

mitten 

funds 
drafts 
bends 

round 

around 

grand 

superintendent 

stimulant 

suspend 


342.  Consouants  to  which  a  tiiial  hook  is  joined  are  also  halved, 
both  stem  and  hook  being  pronounced  before  the  added  t  or  d,  as 
in  blind,  lend,  paved,  petitioned.  Meant,  for  instance,  is  expressed 
bj'  the  halved  .- — ^^  men,  which  is  equivalent  to  nicn-te.  Here  the 
character  men  is  regarded  as  indivisible,  and  is  pronounced  first,  it 
not  being  allowable  in  such  case  to  sound  t  immodiatelj'  after  em, 
as  in  met,  before  the  reading  of  n,  expressed  by  the  final  hook. 
Hence,  in  mit'.en,  and  similar  words,  in  which  t  occurs  before  the 
final  hook,  the  halving  principle  cannot  be  applied. 

343.  But  the  s-circle  is  invariably  read  after  t  or  d,  as  in  funds, 
drafts,  bends. 

344.  Write,  using  the  f-hook:  Craft;  1  pos.  gift,  drift.  (N-hook), 
count,  tent,  faint,  fund,  lent,  mend,  paint,  vent,  dent,  dental,  tend, 
rent,  lend,  bound,  bend,  round,  spend,  stand,  surround,  silent, 
repent,  amend,  extent,  fount,  fountain,  indent,  mound,  refund, 
talent,  vacant,  violent,  moment,  accident,  disappoint,  disl)and, 
husband,  candor  (ar),  certificate,  certify,  event,  ancient,  potent, 
infant,  lament,  phantom,  mount,  mountain,  patent,  patient,  pay- 
ment, country,  ardent,  enchant,  demand,  I'andom,  extend,  mankind, 


104  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

tendencj',  depend,  exorbitant,  expedient,  valient,  resident,  serpent, 
servant,  argument,  Atlantic,  excellent,  equivalent,  basement, 
attentive,  strengthened,  coincident,  detriment,  urgent,  cement, 
encounter,  discount,  impotent,  delinquent,  distant,  document, 
cogent,  instant,  elephant,  enactment,  'repugnant,  impediment, 
identity,  opulent,  incident,  stimulant,  suspend,  amazement, 
announcement,  romantic,  solvent,  subsequent,  observant,  abscond, 
memorandum,  Maryland,  Richmond.  Edmund,  Omnipotent;  (using 
el),  elegant,  element,  gentle,  aliment,  boundless,  incidental, 
fundamental,  bundle,  candle;  (using  ar),  arrogant,  indenture, 
counter,  surmount,  venture,  remnant,  around,  remainder,  slander, 
Ireland,  Eaymond,  Roland;  1  pos.  bond,  fond,  augment,  authentic, 
joined,  occupant,  joint,  point,  bind.  And,  kind,  appoint,  diamond; 
3  pos.  amusement,  apparent,  rudiment,  expand,  land,  landscape, 
pound,  band,  cant.  (N  and  1  hooks),  plant,  blunt,  applicant, 
supplicant,  blend,  gland,  plunder  (ar),  blunder  (ar),  Clement; 
1  pos.  blind;  3  pos.  bland.  (N  and  r  hooks),  grand,  brand, 
frantic,  front,  vagrant,  grand-jury,  urrsident,  encouragement, 
frequent,  predicament,  precedent,  prevent,  reprimand,  superintend, 
transparent,  flagrant,  profound,  divergent,  fragrant,  pretend,  frag- 
ment, bi'illiant,  ingredient;  1  pos.  irrind,  immigrant,  print;  3  pos. 
ground.  (N  and  f  hooks),  pavement,  extravagant,  covenant, 
achievment,  advancement  (des-ment),  reverend.  (N-hook  twice), 
countenance,  tangent,  penitent,  liniment,  luonumeiit,  mendicant, 
abundant,  ornament.  (Initial  n-hook),  iusoknt.  insolvent.  (Prin- 
ciple applied  twice),  respondent,  redundant,  d-^.n^iiden*  candidate, 
resentment,  sentiment,  amendment,  vind;c-.i'j>'  J  '>'>-  treatment, 
appointment,  predominant. 


SHORTENED   IINAL-HOOK   COXSONA^'TS.  105 

345.  WORD    .VXD    PHRASE    SIGNS. 

1  Pos.  gentlemen,  2  gentleman,  3  imagined. 

1  cannot,  kind,  2  can-it,  3  account. 

1  mind,  2  may-not,  3  movement,  mount. 


c/ 

J 
J 

J' 

> 


1  behind,     be-not,  3  bound. 

1  which-ought-not,  2  which-not,  3  which-would-not,  whicb-had-not. 

1  which-ought-to-have-had,  2  which-have-liad,  3  which-would-have-had. 

1  it-ought-not,  2  it-not,  3  it-would-not,  it-had-not. 

1  did-not,  2  do-not,  3  had-not. 

1  it-ought-to-have-had,  3  it-would-have-had. 

1  such-ought-to-have-had,  2  such-have-had,  3  such-would-have-had. 

2  such-are-not,  3  such-were-not. 

1  on-either-hand,  2  they-are-not,  on-the-other-hand. 


1  is-it,  2  as-it,  3  use-it. 


Derivative 

iiitinite 

profit,  prophet 

temperament 

testament 

will-not 

■which-are-not 

which-were-uot 

dare-not 

appoint 
upon-it 
on-the-one-hanU 


I            L     ^   LP     "^    ,-P  which-wU'l 

.frrrr:^.(7?../\T.... f\W. great-extei 


intelligent 
island 
d    record 
it-will-not 

not 
extent 


'  J'" 


o^ 


<o 


give-it 
gave-it 
.J    it-will-have-had 

we-are-not 

have-not 

in-point-of-£act. 


106  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

346.  EXERCISE  28. 

1,  Idlers  caunot-flud  time  to-be  idle,  or-the-industrious  to-be 
at-leisure.  2.  We-nmst-ahvays-be  doing,  or  suffering.  3.  How 
slow  the-time  to-tlie  warm  soul,  that,  in-the-very  instant  it  forms, 
woiild-execute  a-great  design!  4.  The-least  movement  is-of- 
importance  to  all  nature.  5.  The-entire  ocean  is  affected  by-a 
pebble.  G.  K;'.tv.re  has  inclined  us  to-love-men.  7.  The-world 
cannot-do-\vithout  great-men,  but-great-men  are  troublesome  to- 
the-world.  8.  In-life  we-shall-llnd  many-meu  that-are -great, 
and-some-men  that-are-good,  but-very  few-men  that-are-both 
great-and-good.  9.  A-mau  is  sure  to-dream  enough  before-he 
dies,  without-making  arrangements  for-the-purpose.  10.  I-do- 
uotgive,  but-lend  myself  to  business.  11.  Good  counsels  observed 
are -claims  to-grace.  12.  If -there-is-any  thing  that  keeps  the- 
mind  open-to  angel  visits,  aud-repels  the-ministry  of  ill,  it-is 
human-love.  13.  Age,  that-lessens  the-enjoyment  of-life,  increases 
our  desire  of -living.  14.  We-do-not  count  a-mau's  years  until 
he-has-nothing-else  to-count.  15.  I-have-always  observed  that 
to-succeed  in-the-world  we-must-be  foolish  in  appearance,  but 
in-reality  wise.  16.  Beauty  lives  with  kindness.  17.  You-do-not 
believe,  j'ou  only  believe  that-you-believe.  18.  Next  to  acquiring 
good-friends,  the-best  acquisition  is-that-of-good-books.  19.  I- 
cau  promise  to-be  candid,  but  I-cannot  promise  to-be  impartial. 

20.  There-is-no-such-thiug  as  chance;  and-what  seems  to  us 
merest    accident    springs    from-the-deepest    source     of-destiny. 

21.  I-have-often  thought  of -death,  and-I-hnd  it  the-least  of  all 
evils.  22.  The-greatest  difficulties  lie  where-we-are-not  looking 
for-them.     23.    How  disappointment  tracks-the  steps  of  hope! 

24.  Do-not-ask  if-a-man  has-been  through  college;  ask  if-a- 
coUege    has-been    through-him,    if-he-is-a    walking    university. 

25.  Genius    does     what-it-must,    and-talent    does    what-it-can. 

26.  There-is-in-man  a-higher  aim  than  love  of  happiness;  he-can- 
do  without  happiness,  and-iustead  thereof  find  blessedness.  (4  m 
30  s). 

34:7.  The-greatest  events  of-an-age  arc-its-best  thoughts.  It- 
is-the  nature  of -thought  to-Hud  its- way  iuto-actiou.  (5  time.' 
in  1  m). 


SHORTENED  LIQUIDS. 
348.  TRAXSLATE. 

..:^.- .^..i..^.l.V.      /..^:^..Z - 

.^.:r:f:...l.Q..r::4.r:T^..^..v-......^^..<^. 


107 


LESSON     XXIX. 


349. 


SHORTENED  LIQUIDS. 


Institute 

treated 

multitude 

read 

failed 

■wild 

around 

mind 

wend 

standard 

coward 

midst 


X 


[c\i 


lU. 


/..^. 


made 
need 
-Jl-™.    laid 


1  ^  r 


k^o.:>. 


u^ 


sweet 
wheat 
yield 

attempt 
prompt 
herald 

defend 
'•^^-^      endeavor 
..^.,>    Indiana. 


350.  It  is  often  inexpedient  to  use  a  lialf-length  letter  wlien  tlie 
angle  formed  by  its  juncture  with  another  consonant  is  not  sufficient 
to  render  it  readily  distinguishable:  e.  g.,  in  looked,  the  shortened 
kay  should  not  be  used,  since  the  combination  lay-ket,  when  written 
quickly,  would  liave  the  appearance  of  lengthened  lay.  For  similar 
reasons  the  halved  ish  should  not  be  used  after  lay;  en,  ef,  or  ve 
after  te  or  de ;  te  after  te  or  de ;  or  kay  after  ef  or  ve. 


108  REPORTING   STYLE   OP   SHORT-HAND. 

351.  A  final  half-leugth  te  denoting  tute,  tude,  or  ted,  is  disjoined 
in  some  cases  in  oi'der  to  render  it  distinguishable,  as  in  institute, 
treated,  multitude. 

352.  {^  El,  ~^  ar,  ^ —  em,  and  ._y  en,  are  thickened  when 
halved  to  express  d,  as  in  made,  need,  laid,  read.  This  practice  adds 
to  the  legibility  of  short-hand,  and  gives  rise  to  no  ambiguity, 

since  ^  yea,   "^  waj-,  ^^    enip,  and    , ^ing  are  not  shortened. 

Only  the  downward  I  is  used  when  tliickeued  to  express  the  added 
d,  as  in  failed.  These  letters,  however,  are  not  shaded  when  either 
the  w  or  n  hook  is  attaclied,  as  in  loild,  around,  mind,  wend. 

353.  Exceptions.  In  a  very  few  cases  way,  yea,  and  emp,  are 
halved,  as  in  sweet,  wheat,'  yield,  attempt,  promj^t. 

354.  Using  Id,  write :  Load,  scold,  lead,  fold,  manifold,  mould, 
Springfield,  unfold,  old,  laid,  sold,  lierakl,  crawled,  drilled;  1  pos. 
lead,  leader,  mikl,  field;  3  pos.  loud,  mood;  (rd),  absurd,  afford, 
standard,  deplored,  beard,  yard,  Leonard,  sword,  coward;  1  pos. 
kindred,  ordinance,  read,  I'edeem,  redemption;  (md),  made,  mud, 
amidst,  modify,  meditate,  blamed,  inflamed,  claimed,  blossomed, 
drummed,  toiled,  meddle:  1  pos.  medium,  modulation,  mid,  mid- 
night, middle,  midst,  model,  modern,  moderate;  3  pos.  mad;  (nd), 
defend,  end,  endless  (el),  send,  defendant,  ascend,  ascendant, 
descend,  descendant,  index,  indebted,  endeavor,  indolence  Qel), 
indolent,  indigent,  indivisible,  indulge  (el),  reasoned,  independent, 
errand,  transcend;  1  pos.  need,  needless  (el),  needle  (el),  Indian, 
Indiana,  indicate,  indication,  intend;  3  pos.  sand.  (Disjoined  ted), 
dated,  destitute,  institute,  dreaded;  3  pos.  attitude. 

355.  WORD   AND   PHRASE   SIGXS. 

I  Pos.  immediate-ly,  2  made,  3  mad. 

1  need,  2  end,  under,  3  hand. 


r 


1  lead,  2  hold,  held,  old,  load,  3  loud. 
1  Lord,  read,  2   heard,  word,  3  hard. 


SHORTENED   LIQUIDS. 


109 


World 

handsome 

hardware 

downward 

forward 

individual 

short-hand 

undergo 

hand-in-band 


i. 


afterward 
beforehand 
behold,  beheld 

hazard 

hand-writing 

landlord 

understand 

preater-than 

ladies-and-gentlemen. 


356. 


EXERCISE  29. 


1.  Adversity  is-the-trial  of-priuciple.  2.  Withoiit-it,  a-man 
hardly  knows  whether  he-is-honest  or-not.  3.  By  steps  we-may 
ascend  to  God.  4.  Act  well  at-the  moment,  and-you-have  per- 
formed a-good  action  to  all-eternity.  5.  For-my-owu  part,  I-had- 
rather-be  old  only-a-short-time  than-be  old  before  I-rcally  am  so. 

6.  As-we  grow  old   Ave-become  more  foolish    aud-more    wise. 

7.  Every-mau    desires    to-live-long,   but  no-man  would-be-old. 

8.  The-path  of-glory  leads  but-to-the  grave.  9.  A-inerry  heart 
doeth  good  like-a-medicine,  but-a-broken  spirit  drieth  the-bones. 
10.  Heaven's  eternal  wisdom  has  decreed  that  man  of  man  should- 
ever-stand  in-need.  11.  He-makes  no  friend  who-never  had-a 
foe.  12.  Hatred  is  nearly  always  honest,  rarely  if-ever  assumed. 
13.  So-much  cannot-be-said  for-love.  U.  In  a-better-world  we- 
will-rtnd  our  young  years  and-our  old  friends.  15.  They-say 
women  and-music  should-never-be  dated.  IG.  Few  people  know 
how  to-be-old.  17.  O,  how-much  more  doth  beauty  beauteous 
seem  by-that  sweet  ornament  which  truth  doth  give !  18.  There's- 
a  divinity  that-shapes  our  ends,  rough  he\v  them  how  we-will. 
19.  Genius  makes-its  observations  in-short-hand;  talent  writes- 
them-out  at-length.  20.  The-misei*able  have-no-other  medicine, 
but-only  hope.  21.  "Where-there-is-no  hope  there-cau-be  no 
endeavor.     (3  m) . 

357.  The-great-man  is-he  who,  in-the-midst  of-the  crowd 
keeps  with-perfect  sweetness  the-iudepeudeuce  of  solitude. 
(5  times  in  1  m). 


110 


358. 


KEPOKTIXU   blVLK   OF    SilUKT-HAXD. 
TR.tXSLATE. 


LESSON     XXX. 


INTERVOCALIZATION. 


359. 

Core 
gall 
margrave 

knoll 

cheer 

sport 

cork 

epicure 

jealous 

prevail 

qualify 

legislature 

derogatory 

persevere 

tolerable 

mortal 

ordinary 

volunteer-ary 


require 

school 

corporal 

North-Carolina 

California 

Delaware 

Baltimore 

correspondent 

preliminary. 


360.  Any  letter  of  the  double  or  triple  consonant  series  maj'  be 
intervocalized,  by  whicli  is  meant  the  vowel  may  be  placed  iu  such 
a  manner  as  to  be  read  between  the  two  consonants.  E.  g.= — 
ker,  with  the  dash  vowel-o  struck  through  it,  is  read  core.  Here 
the  vowel,  by  being  written  in  this  manner,  is  read  after  kay  and 
before  ar.     Second  and  third  place  dash  vowels  are  struck  through 


IXTEKVUCAUZATION.  Ill 

the  stems,  but  first-place  dashes  are  written  just  before  theru,  as 
ill  gall.  When  a  dot-vowel  is  to  be  written,  a  small  circle  is  used, 
and  placed  before  the  stem  if  long,  as  in  Margrave,  and  after  it  if 
short,  as  in  gill. 

361.  This  principle  is  rarely  applied  in  actual  reporting,  but 
a  considerable  advantage  is  nevertheless  secured  by  it;  for,  since 
it  is  a  rule  to  form  no  outline  too  brief  for  vocalization,  the  stems 
per,  ber,  ter,  der,  etc.,  would  have  to  be  written  out  in  quite  a 
number  of  words  in  which  double  consonants  may  now  be  used 
instead.  In  moral,  for  example,  the  outline  mer-lay  is  proper, 
since  it  will  admit  of  vocalization;  otherwise,  the  r-hook  could 
not  be  employed. 

3G2.  Write:  Fur,  cur,  core,  cull,  gull,  gall,  gill,  gal,  shoal, 
knoll,  cheer,  sport,  fort,  margrave,  board,  port,  carve,  chart,  chill, 
dirt,  nurse,  purse,  spur,  terse,  encore,  epicure;  1  pos.  accord? 
cork;  (without  vowels),  course,  college,  derange,  elaborate, 
enormity,  demoralize,  impulse,  infer  infirm,  jealous,  journey,  in- 
surance, invalid,  lecture,  curb,  nerve,  nervous,  North,  moral, 
morality,  nourish,  perceive,  perjure,  person,  shirk,  engineer, 
picture,  pilgrim,  preliminarj',  prevail,  pursue,  pursued,  cor- 
ner, shoulder,  qualify,  legislature,  recall,  regulate,  require, 
ridicule,  darling,  school,  sharp,  thirst,  signature,  telegram,  till, 
term,  Thursday,  treasure,  utility,  volume,  voluminous,  vulgar, 
abjure,  agriculture,  armful,  balcony,  barter,  capture,  cargo, 
collateral,  corporal,  corporate,  incorporate,  corroborate,  courteous, 
culture,  decorum,  derogatory,  calico,  director,  disparage,  partial, 
impartial,  distil,  divulge,  falter,  farthing,  garnish,  invulnerable, 
marble,  marshal,  miracle,  nursery,  nurture,  obscure,  parcel,  parlor, 
persevere,  porter,  porti'ay,  purple,  shark,  singular,  tolerable, 
torpedo,  turkey,  valid,  valedictory,  vinegar,  volcano,  assurance, 
Charles,  George,  Jerome,  Philip,  Martha,  Georgia,  New-Jersej', 
North-Carolina,  Virginia,  Columbia;  1  pos.  column,  skill,  cord, 
discord,  gild,  guilt;  3  pos.  assure,  secure,  securitj'.  (Sez),  persist, 
paralysis,  parenthesis.  (W-hook),  Delaware.  (F-hook),  gulf, 
tui-f,  telegraph,  adventure,  imperative,  California,  narrative.  (N- 
hook),  burden,  margin,  pardon,  pertain,  diligence,  jurisprudence, 
performance,  terminate,  German,  bargain,  cosmopolitan,  culminate, 
galvanic.    Mormon,  northeastern,  parlance,  Calvin,  Martin,  Morgan, 


112  REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

Caroline.  (Shun-hook),  perception,  circulation,  admiration,  par- 
tition, jurisdiction,  corruption,  regulation.  (Rel-hook),  journal, 
normal,  personal,  carnal,  phrenology.  (Halving),  carpenter, 
garment,  delegate,  departure  (ar),  invert,  dilapidate,  impart, 
market,  merchant,  merchandise,  mercantile  (el),  mortal,  ordinary, 
particle,  partner,  pursuant,  regard,  record,  transport,  voluntary, 
volunteer,  Vermont,  Baltimore,  Pittsburg,  deliberate,  corre- 
spond, correspondence,  correspondent,  default,  dormant,  escort, 
forbid,  parliament,  persecute,  portrait,  purport,  recorder,  scaffold, 
scarlet,  target,  jurist,  told,  velvet,  palpitate,  Archibald,  Arnold, 
Baldwin,  Gilbert,  Herbert  (ar) . 

363.  EXERCISE  30. 

1.  Action  is  eloquence,  and-the  ej'es  of -the  ignorant  more  learned 
than  their  ears.  2.  It-is-often  better  to-have-a-great-deal  of 
harm  happen  to-one  than-a-little;  a-great-deal  may  arouse  you 
to-remove  what-a-little  will-only  accustom-you  to  endure. 
3.  There-is-nothing  that-makes-its-way  more  directly  to-the  soul 
than  beauty,  i.  We-make  Avay  for-the-man  who  boldly  pushes 
past    us.      5.     Your    little    child    is-youi--ouly    true     democrat. 

6.  Childhood  shows-the-man,     as-the  morning    shows-the-day. 

7.  The-child  is  father  of -the  man.  8.  Defeat  is-a-school  in-which 
truth  always  grows  strong,  t).  Admiration  is-tlie  daughter  of- 
ignorance.     (1  m  30  s). 

3(>4-.  Rich-men  without  wisdom-and  learning  are-called  sheep 
with  golden  fleeces.     (9  times  in  1  m). 

365.  TRANSLATE. 


115 


LESSON    XXXI. 


366. 


PREFIXES 


Compress 

conduce 

recommend 

countermarch 
contradiction 
contribution 

interview 
introduce 
antiseptic 

commodity 

contemporary 

interpose 

commentary 

community 

credulity 

accommodation 

commission 

compensation 

contempt 
command 
counterpart 

interrogation 

discontent 

malcontent 


reconstruct 


y       -  recognition 

^%r/w?. .  .>7<T7.         excommunicate 


circumvent 

self-consciousness 

commit 

maladministration 

pijstpone 

supervene 

accompany 

internal 

inconsistent 

counterbalance 

confidence 

circumstance 

composition 

conquest 

constitute 

Interrupt 
conductor 
commencement 

incompetent 

antiquary 

incomprehensible. 


367 .  The  commonest  Prefixes  aud  Affixes  are  provided  with  brief 
signs,  most  of  wliich  are  joined  to  the  main  outline.  Com  and  con 
are  indicated  by  a  dot,  as  iu  com2)ress  or  conduce.  In  most  cases, 
however,  this  dot  is  entirely  omitted  with  no  loss  of  legibility. 
Com,  con,  and  cog,  when  medial,  are  expressed  by  disjoining  the- 
preceding  from  the  following  portion  of  the  word,  as  in  recommend^ 
reconstruct,  recognition.  Counter,  contra-i-o,  are  indicated  by  a. 
slanting  tick,  as  in  countermarch,  contradiction,  contribution.  Circumy 
and  self,  are  denoted  by  the  s-circle,  as  in  circumvent,  self -conscious- 
ness. Inter,  intro,  and  anti,  are  indicated  by  the  shortened  en,  joined 
to  the  remaining  part  of  the  woi'd,  as  iu  intervieic,  introduce, antiseptic. 
Mai,  post,  and  super,  are  commonly  expressed  by  the  characters- 
mel,  pes,  and  spir,  as  in  maladministration,  postpone,  supervene. 

368.  Iu  the  following  list,  the  prettxes  printed  in  italics  are  to 
be  represented  by  the  si;j;ns  just  explained.  The  syllables  en- 
closed in  brackets  need  not  be  written. 


114  KEPOKTIXG   STYLE   OF    SIIOKT-llAXD. 

Commit,  com?)iodit.y,  compass,  compensate,  compose,  coHvict, 
[coiijtiuual  (el),  [con] temporary  (emp),  inter])ose,  console,  inter- 
fere, accompauy,  ciVc?nuuavigate,  conceit,  coKciliate,  introduce,  con- 
cise, interest,  condemn,  confess,  co?(n^ermarch,  (decompose,  discom- 
pose,  dis[con]tinue,  intmvAl,  in[con]sistent,  recogrnize,  reconcile, 
seZ/ish,  un  [con] scions,  antithesis,  co?)i7nentary,  committee,  co?npiIe, 
concede,  coi(n^e?'check,  j^os^paid,  conspicnous,  conspire,  [con]vey- 
ance,  convoke,  misconceive,  [com]pare,  [com]pany,  [com]parisou, 
conceive,  [conjform,  [con]scieutious,  [con]scious,  [con]sist;  1  pos. 
consign,  conceal,  connfej-sign;  3  pos.  conduce,  community,  [con]- 
sume,  inie;'vie\v.  (L-hook),  constable,  inconjparable,  mconceiva')le, 
[accom]plish,  co?ijugal,  convulse,  [com]pel,  [con]flict,  interval. 
(R-liook),  concur,  confer,  ciVcicmference,  ci>c?(«iscribe,  incojnpre- 
hensible,  preconceive,  se7/-control,  compress,  [con]firm,  [con]gress, 
[con]spiracy,  [con]trary,  [con]troversy,  [con] verse,  enterprise; 
1  pos.  [com]prise,  [com]promise;  3  pos.  [con]strue,  ?nisconstrue. 
(W-hook),  rtntiquary,  coi/nterworli.  (F-liook),  concave,  [cou]- 
servative,  [con]trive,  [conjtrivance.  (N-hook),  concurrence, 
[cou]tain,  [con]tains,  confine,  cownterbalance,  cont?'avene,  in[con]- 
venieuce,  re[com]pense,  co?npendium,  condolence,  [con]fldence, 
congenial,  [circum] stance,  [com]panion,  [coni]plain,  [con]cern, 
[con]science,  [con]staucy,  [conjstrain,  [con]venience,  [con]vince, 
[cou]tinuance,  entertain,  interline,  inte?'vene;  1  pos.  co^tntermine. 
(Shun-hook),  «cconimodation,  ci>cn?nlocution,  [com]mission, 
[com]petitioH,  cojnpulsion,  [con]fession,  connteraction,  recor/nition, 
?'ecom?nendation,  [con] sideration,  anticipation,  [com]plexiou,  [con]- 
cession,  [con]clusion,  [con]descension,  [con]demnation,  [con]ju- 
gation,  co?tsecration,  [con]solidatiou,  [con]viction,  [conjtempla- 
tion  (emp),  interpretation,  convulsion,  [conijbiuation,  [conjdition, 
[con]ception,  interdiction,  contribution,  conversion,  interjection, 
un[con]dltional,  [con]gregation;  1  pos.  [com]pletion;  3  pos.  con- 
fusion, [com]passion.  (S-shun-hook),  [comjpensation,  [com]po- 
sition.  (St-loop),  cowquest,  co;* test,  contrast,  contr  distinction, 
composed,  congestion,  context,  [con]stitute,  [conjstitution.  (Halv- 
ing), acco??i?nodate,  circitmspect,  combat,  [con]template  (emp), 
[conjtempt,  [comm]and,  [com]ment,  [conjduct,  co?npute,  [cou]- 
sent,  concert,  [conjdescend,  cojifiscate,  [conjsult,  coitnterpart,  inter- 
dict, dis[con]nect,  co?npatible,  incompatible,  inccinplete,  intersect, 


PREFIXES. 


115 


mis  [con]  duct,  recommend,  mien-upt,  se?/-esteem,  anticipate,  anti- 
dote, [comm]andraent,  [conjduct,  [conjductor,  nonconductor, 
exTO)?imuuicate,  [coinm]encement,  7'econstruct,  [comjparative, 
[com]plicate,  [cora]pliraeut,  [con]solidate,  [con]sonant,  [con]- 
struct,  [cou]tact,  [coii]tribute,  [contra]dict;  1  pos.  con&de,  con- 
sort, couniertcit,  cojnplete,  [coii]veuieut,  interrogate,  interrogation; 
3  pos.  [con]cludc,  [comm]unicate.  (R-hook),  [com]fort,  con- 
curred, concordance,  cojivert,  [con]gratulate,  [conjgratulation, 
interpret;  1  pos.  concrete.  (N-hook),  co9npound,  [conjtiugent,  dis- 
[con]tent,  ?na?conteut,  [conjtent,  [con]straint,  incompetent  (en- 
tent),  [com]plained,  [con]fldent,  [con]sistent,  [con]staut,  [cou]- 
stautly  (el),  [conjtent,  iu[con]sistent;  3  pos.  confound. 


369. 


Construction 

confidential 

conjunction 

consequence 

consequent 

consequential 


WORD-.SIGNS. 


..1/...V6.. 


unconcern 

comprehend 

antiquity 

consider 

consideration 

reconsider. 


EXERCISE  31. 

370.  1.  Our-actions  are  our-own;  their  consequences  belong 
to-heaven.  2.  No-man  should-be  so-much  taken-up  in-the-search 
of-truth,  as  thereby  to  neglect  the-more-necessary  duties  of- 
active-life ;  for  after-all  is-done,  it-is-action  onlj'  that  gives  a-true 
value  aud-commendation  to-virtue.  3.  Active  natures  are  rarely 
melancholy.  4.  Words  are-good,  but-there-is-something-better. 
5.  The-best  is-not-to-be  explained  by-words.  G.  The-spirit  in- 
which-we  act  is-the-chief  matter.  7.  Action  can  only-be  under- 
stood and-represeuted  by-thc-spirit.  8.  No-one  knows  Avhat  he- 
is-doing  while  he-is  acting  rightly,  but  of-what-is  wrong  we-are- 
always  conscious.  9.  Prosperity  is  too  apt  to-preveut  us  from- 
examining  our  conduct,  but  as  adversity  leads  us  to-think  properly 
of-our  state,  it-is-most  beneficial  to  us.  10.  Our  dependence- 
upon  God  ought-to-be  so  entire  and-absolute  that-we  should-never 
think-it-necessary,  in-any-kind  of-distress,  to-have  recourse  to- 
human  consolations.  11.  He-who-would  pass-the  declining  years 
of-his-life  with  peace  and-comfort,  should  when  young,  consider- 
that-he-may-one-day  become  old,  aud-remember,  whec-he-is-old, 


116  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SIIOKT-IIAXD. 

that-he-lias-oiice-beeu  young.  12.  I-would  seek  unto-God,  aud- 
imto-God  commit  m3-cause.  13.  The-integrity  of-meu  is-to-be- 
measured  by-tlieir  conduct,  not-by-tlieir  profession.  14.  He-who- 
lias  lost  confidence  can  lose  notliing-more.  15.  Confidence  in-con- 
versatiou  has-a  greater  sliare  tlian  \vit.  IG.  Tlie-conscience  is 
more  wise  tlian  science.  17.  Man's  conscience  is-the  oracle  of- 
God.  18.  He-is  ricliest  who-is  content  with-the  least,  for  content 
is-the  wealth  of  nature.  19.  Eeasonable  men  are-the-bcst  diction- 
aries of -conversation.  20.  Silence  is  one-great  art  of-conversa- 
tion.  21.  Fear  God  and-keep  his  commandments,  for-this-is-the 
whole  duty  of  man.  22.  Gain  may-be  temporary  and-uncertain; 
but  ever  while-you-live,  expense  is  constant  and-certain;  and-it-is 
easier  to  build  two  cliimneys  than-to-keep  one-in  fuel.  23.  If-a- 
good  face  is-a-letter  of-recommeudatiou,  a-good  heart  is-a-letter 
of-credit.  2-i.  The-worth  of-a  state,  in-the-long  run,  is-the-worth 
of-tlie  individuals  composing  it.  25.  Liberality  consists  less  in- 
giving  much  thau-in-giviug  with-discretion.  26.  The-human-race 
is-in-the-best  condition,  when-it-has-the-greatest  degree  of-liber- 
ty.  27.  While -we -are  reasoning  concerning  life,  life  is  gone. 
28.  Love  is  incompatible  with-fear.  29.  Prudence  and-love  are 
inconsistent;  in  proportion  as-the-last  increases,  the-other  de- 
creases. 30.  The-most  manifest  sigu-of  Avisdom  is  continued 
cheerfulness.     (5  m  30  s). 

371.  He-is-happy  whose  circumstances  suit  his  temper;  but- 
he-is  more-excellent  who-can  suit  his  temper  to  any-circum- 
stances.     (5  times  in  1  m) . 

372.  TRANSLATE, 


I,, 


AFFIXES. 


117 


LESSON  XXXII. 


AFFIXES. 


373. 


ourselves 

yourselves 

accountable 

barbarity 

fidelity 

instrumentality 

formality 

hospitality 

individuality. 


374.  The  dot  aud  tick  are  used  to  denote  iivj  and  ings  respec- 
tively, in  cases  wliere  tlie  letter  > —  iug  cauuot  conveniently  be 
joined,  as  in  preserving,  or  castings. 

375.  The  s  and  sez  circles  denote  self,  and  selves,  as  in  himself, 
aud  ourselves. 

376.  Shi})  is  expressed  by  ish  or  shay,  as  in  friendship.  But  in 
order  to  avoid  unsuitable  outlines,  ish  is  sometimes  disjoined,  as  in 
courtship,  or  lordship. 

377.  The  endings  ility,  ality,  and  ariiy,  are  expressed  by  the 
detachment  of  any  letter  from  the  preceding  part  of  the  word,  as 
in  barbarity ,  fidelity ,  instrumentality. 

378.  The  terminations  ble  and  ful  are  often  indicated  by  be  aud 
ef  simply,  as  in  admissable,  and  disgraceful. 

379.  In  the  list  here  given,  the  syllables  printed  in  italics  are 
represented  by  the  signs  just  explained. 

Debility,  Icgihility,  ^delity,  credulity,  barbar%,  formality, 
vitality,  stability,  instrumental^,  inmiliarity,  casting,  ohserying, 
hustm^s,  disgrace/i(?,  sensii>Ze,  advisaftZe,  yourself,  itself,  citizenship ; 
1  pos.  myself,  thyself,  divisii/e;  3  pos.  ourself,  ourselves,  admissi6?e, 
township.  (Halving),  hospitaZiYy,  indiyiclualiiy,  hardship,  lordship, 
courtship,  partnership,  accouutaiZe,  osteusi^Ze. 

380.  EXERCISE  32. 

1.  The-more-a-mau  denies  himself,   the-more  he-shall  obtain 


118  KKPORTIXG   STYLE    OF    SHOKT-IIAXD. 

from-God.  2.  He-that-has-uever-knowu  adversity  is  but  half 
acquainted  \  itii  otliers  or-with  liimself.  3.  No-sensible-persou 
ever-uuide-au  apolog}'.  4.  To-love-one-that-is  great  is-almost 
to-be-great  oue's-self.  5.  Beauty,  lil^e  trutli-aud-justice,  lives 
within-us;  like-virtue,  and-like  moral  law,  it-is-a  companion  of- 
the  soul.  6.  Man  believes  himself  always  greater-than  he-is,  and-is 
esteemed  less-tlum  he-is-worth.  7.  Without  content,  we-shall- 
flnd     it    almost     as    difficult    to-please    others    as      ourselves. 

8.  No-man  was-ever  so-much  deceived  by-another  as  by-himself . 

9.  Dignity  consists  not-in-possessing  honors  but  in-deserving 
them.  10.  Economy  is-of-itself  a-gTcat-revenue.  11.  The-best 
and-highest  part  of-a-man's  education  is-that-which  he-gives- 
himself.  12.  The-more-you  speak  of-yourself,  the-more-you-are 
likely  to  lie.  13.  Do-you-wish  men  to-speak  well  of-you?  Then- 
never-speak  well  of-yourself.  14.  When-men  are-friends  there- 
is-no-nced  of -justice;  but-Avhen-men  are-just,  they  still  need 
friendship.  15.  All-men  would-be-master  of-others,  and-no-man 
is  lord  of-himself.  IG.  No-mau  is  happy  who-does-not-think 
himself  so.  17.  Self-trust  is-the  essence  of  heroism.  18.  Think 
Avrongly,  if-you-plcase,  but  in-all-cases  think  for-yourself .  10.  Do- 
not  speak  of -your  happiness  to-a-man  less  fortunate  than  yourself. 
(3  m  45  s) . 

381.  Every-person  has-two  educations,  one-of- which  he-receives 
from-others,  and-one-more-iniportaut,  which  he-gives-himself. 
(5  times  in  1  m) 

382.  TRANSLATE. 

..^^.^./!'..-^:..c.<^:^....X^...Y>.'^'^■^■•^•.. 

...5?...(:...^,>....°..v-:r::^...^..r:../^..6,,..^L 


EXPEDIENTS  AND   PUNCTUATION. 


119 


LESSON  XXXIII. 


EXPEDIENTS   AND    PUNCTUATION, 


383. 


From-time-to-time 
from-day-to-day 

from-year-to-year 

from-hand-to-hand 

fror::-sireet-to-street 

day-after-day 

day-of-the-week 

season-of-the-year 


q'! 


...If.. 
..J)" 

...h. 


speech-of-tlie-])re?ident 

1  Cor.  3  chap,  IG  verse  ,..t.«. 


S.k.... 


from-place-to-place 

from- week- to- week 
from-generation-to-generation 


i 

,JLP,__^  from-house-to-house 

J  /  from-town-to-town 

^  year-after-year 


\  /  hour-of-the-day 

■•7 

C(\Q  wealt  •  if-ihe-nation 


importance-nf-the-subject 


^<X^r     Hist.    Knf.'.    Vol.    3.    chap.    9, 


'J.. 


/3 


Sec,  13. 


384.  Only  very  common  phrases,  such  as  these,  should  be  ex- 
pressed by  the  expedients  here  made  use  of.  lu  some-of  th/'-paper, 
for  instance,  of-the  should  not  be  iudicaced  by  the  nearness  of 
some  and  paper. 


120  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAXD. 

385.  PUNCTUATION. 


Parenthesis 


hyphen 


ly 

€? 

X    OT'JJ 

■^ 

-^^::r. 

brackets 


period 


underscore. 


386.  Other  punctuation  marks  are  the  same  as  in  lonj^-hand, 
but  are  rarei}-  made  use  of  except  in  correspondence.  In  reporting, 
a  semicolon  is  indicated  by  a  space  of  an  incli  or  more.  Little 
opportunity,  however,  is  given  for  punctuating  short-hand  notes, 
the  only  practical  method  being  to  leave  spaces  to  correspond  Avith 
the  speaker's  pauses,  and  insert  the  proper  marks  afterwai'ds  Avheu 
transcribing. 


387. 


EXERCISE  33. 


1.  It-has-been  well  observed  that  few  are  better  qualified  to- 
give-others  advice  than  those-who-have-takeu  the-least  of-it 
themselves.  2.  Advice  is  seldom  welcome.  3  Our  happiness  iu- 
this-world  depends-upon  the-affections   Ave-are-able-to    insi^ire. 

4.  He-who-purposes  to-be-an  author,   should-flrst-be-a  student. 

5.  Books,  like  our-friends,  should-be  few,  and-well  chosen. 
■6.  Every  great-book  is-an  action,  and-every  great  action  is-a- 
book.  7.  No-man-can-be  brave  who  considers  pain  to-be  the- 
great  evil  of -life;  nor  temperate,  who-considers  pleasure  to-be-the 
highest  good.     8.   Judges  and-senates  have-been  bought  for-gold. 

9.  A-man's  character  is-the  reality  of  himself;  his  reputation  the- 
opinion  others  have-formed  about-him;  character  resides  in  him, 
reputation  in-other-people;  that-is-the  substance,  this  the-shadow. 

10.  The-scenes  of-childhood  are-the   memories  of  future  years. 

11.  Heaven  lies  about  us  in-our  infancy.  12.  It-is-better  to-have- 
a  lion  at-the-head  of-an-army  of  sheep,  than-a  sheep  at-the-head 
of-an-army  of-lions.  13.  Conscience  warns  us  as-a-friend  before 
it  punishes  us  as-a-judge.  14.  Christ  saw-much  in-the-world  to 
■weep  over,  and-much  to-prayover;  but  he-saw  nothing  in-it  to- 
look  on  with  contempt.     15.  Knowledge  of-our  duties  is-the-most 


EXPEDIENTS   AND   PUNCTUATION.  121 

useful  part  of  philosophy.  16.  The-best  education  iu-thc-world 
is-that  got  by  struggling  to-get  a-living.  17.  Did-a-person  but 
know  the-value  of-au  enemy,  he-would  purchase  him  with-pure 
gold.  18.  The-flrst  and-last  thing  which-is  required  of  genius  is- 
the  love  of-truth.  19.  Genius  is-the  gold  in-the  mine;  talent  is- 
the  miner  who-works  aud-brings  it  out.  20.  Genius  finds  its-own 
road  and-carries  its-own  lamp.  21.  Hope  is  like  a-bad  clock, 
forever  striking  the-hour  of  happiness,  whether  it-has-come  or- 
not.  22.  The-setting  of-a-great  hope  is  like  the-settiug  of-the 
sun.     (i  m). 

388.  Phrase  and  punctuate:  There  are  two  ways  of  being 
happy  we  may  either  diminish  our  wants  or  augment  our  means 
either  will  do  the  result  is  the  same  and  it  is  for  each  man  to 
decide  for  himself  and  do  that  which  happens  to  be  the  easiest  if 
you  are  idle  or  sick  or  poor  however  hard  to  diminish  your  v.LUits 
it  will  be  harder  to  augment  your  means  if  you  are  active  and 
prosperous  or  young  or  in  good  health  it  may  be  easier  for  you  to 
augment  your  means  than  to  diminish  your  wants  but  if  you  are 
wise  you  will  do  both  at  the  same  time  young  or  old  rich  or  poor 
sick  or  well  and  if  you  are  very  wise  you  will  do  both  in  such  a 
way  as  to  augment  the  general  happiness  of  society. 

389.  TRANSLATE. 

.     ./,..-...S,.-jy....,^....../(.:.tu:v^.::D..3-..„. 

....'^:>=^..>...?f....^.S^T7r.j...<K./^'/,.^...f. U?..!.... 

■  *'  7  I 


122 


KEPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT-HA^'D. 


LESSON  XXXIV. 


390. 


GENERAL   PRINCIPLES. 


Obituary 

battery 

betray 

better 

defy 

striven 

study 

ousted 

stead 

steed 
staid 
stood 


P         n 


r 


dream 


3^ 


-p 


UC^--^ 


druggist 

mean 

meaner 

meanest 

meanly 

meaning 

meanness 

demean 

fatal 

moderator. 


891.  Since  the  consonant  signs  may  be  combined  in  numerous 
different  Avaj's,  there  arises  an  important  question  of  choice  cou- 
cerniug  the  various  outlines  which  It  is  possible  to  construct  for  a 
given  word,  especially  when  unusual  or  technical  terms  and  proper 
names  are  to  be  written.  In  better,  for  example,  the  consonant 
delineation,  b-t-r,  may  be  expressed  by  four  different  outlines, 
be-te-ray,  be-te-ar,  be-ter,  and  bet-raj'.  Which  of  these  four  best 
expresses  the  word?  It  will  be  obsei'ved  that  b-t-r  is  also  the 
delineation  for  betray,  which  should,  if  convenient,  be  written  dif- 
ferentlj"  from  better.  Tiie  first  two  are  unnecessarily  long;  of  the 
remaining  two,  the  first  properly  expresses  betray,  and  the  last 
better,  and  for  these  reasons:  In  betray,  be  should  not  be  halved  to 
express  te,  since  the  rule  is  not  to  shorten  any  letter  to  express  a 
te  or  de  which  belongs  to  a  subsequent  syllable.  And,  in  this  word, 
it  is  necessary  also  that  the  double  consonant  ter  be  used,  since 
t  and  r  coalesce,  there  being  no  intervening  vowel.  In  better,  ex- 
pressed by  the  last  outline,  be  is  properly  halved  to  denote  the  fol- 
lowing te.  The  first  two  outlines  read  respectively,  battery  and 
obituary,  and  neither  will  admit  of  contraction,  owing  to  the  num- 
ber of  vowels  to  be  supplied.  In  all  cases  the  number  and  location 
of  the  vowels  determine  the  precise  outline  to  be  selected,  the  rule 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES.  123 

being:  that  every  outline  should  be  contracted  as  much  as  practicable 
but  not  bo  made  so  brief  as  to  prevent  vocalization.  This  princi- 
ple is  further  illustraied  by  the  outliues  chosen  to  represent  words 
whose  consonant  delineation  is  s-t-d,  study,  ousted,  stead,  steed, 
staid,  stood.. 

392.  Each  .S3'llable  of  a  word  contains  one  vowel,  and  in  order 
that  this  may  be  written,  it  is  necessary  that  some  of  the  preceding 
or  following  consonants  be  expressed  with  a  long,  or  alphabetical 
sign.  For  example,  in  de-fy  the  alphabetic,  rather  than  the  adjunc- 
tive, or  hook  ef,  must  be  written,  in  order  that  the  vowel  i  may  be 
inserted  if  necessary.  This  is  important  whether  the  vowel  is 
actually  written  or  not,  since  the  use  of  the  alphabetic,  instead  of 
the  adjunctive  sign,  indicates  that  a  vowel  is  to  be  supplied.  In 
stnv-en,  for  example,  there  are  two  vowels ;  hence  there  should  be 
two  long  strokes,  and  no  more.  Of  the  first  syllable  consonants,  te 
is  the  one  properly  chosen  to  be  written  long,  in  order  that  all  the 
remaining  consonant  sounds,  s,  r,  and  v,  may  be  expressed  ad- 
jnnctively.  Hence  is  deducted  the  general  principle,  that  for  each 
syllable  of  a  loord  there  must  be  either  a  full  or  half  length  alphabetic 
letter.  This,  with  the  adjunctive  signs  that  may  be  attached,  is 
written  with  one  stroke  of  the  pen.  There  are,  of  course,  many 
exceptions  to  this  rule,  as  in  case  of  words  which  have  fewer  con- 
sonants than  syllables,  as  o-bit-u-a-ry;  and  others  whose  outlines 
will  not  admit  of  sufficient  conti'action,  as  dream,  which  contains 
but  one  syllable,  but  requires  two  sti'okes  of  the  pen.  But  care 
should  be  taken  as  far  as  possible  to  so  group  together  all  the  con- 
sonants in  any  one  s}ilable,  that  they  may  be  written  at  a  single 
stroke,  as  in  phi-los-o-pher. 

393.  Derivative  words  are  commonly  written  by  adding  the 
necessary  consonant  signs  to  their  primitives;  e.  g.  the  outlines  for 
meaner,  meanest,  meanly,  meaning,  meanness,  and  demean,  are  formed 
by  joining  ar,  est,  el,  ing,  ens,  and  de,  to  the  primitive  mean.  It  is 
true  that  the  most  facile  outlines  ai'e  not  ahvays  secured  by  con- 
forming with  this  rule,  as  meanest,  for  example,  could  be  more 
quickly  written,  era-nest.  Nevertheless,  this  rule  should  be  follow- 
ed as  long  as  angular  outlines  are  the  result,  since  by  means  of  it, 
legibility  is  greatly  increased,  and  the  labor  of  acquiring  the  art 
considerably  diminished.    There  are  many  exceptions  to  this,  how- 


124  KEPORTIXG   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

ever,  as  when  its  observance  produces  unsuitable  outlines,  as  in 
druggist,  wliere  to  secure  angularity,  the  st-loop  instead  of  est,  is 
joined  to  the  primitive  drug;  also,  where  the  sj^IIabiflcatiou  is 
changed  by  means  of  the  added  consonants,  as  in /«-?aZ,  (written 
ef-tel,  not  eft-lay),  and  mod-e-ra-tor  (med-ray-ter,  not  med- 
ret-ar) . 

EXEECISE  31. 

394.     Words  containing  the   same    consonants,    but    requiring 

different  outlines : 

Spirit,  separate,  support;  states,  estates,  status;  stop,  steepy, 
estop;  canst,  keenest,  Kensett;  trained,  turned,  tornado;  browned, 
burned,  brandy;  spade,  speedy,  espied;  skate,  socket,  asked;  billed, 
blood,  bloody;  freed,  afi-aid,  forehead;  deigned,  dandy,  denied; 
rend,  around,  ruined;  older,  ladder,  Eldora;  signed,  assigned, 
synod;  Elsie,  Lucy,  less;  bayonet,  bent,  Bennett;  married,  humor- 
ed, moored;  scorn,  screen,  scrawny;  estray,  star,  estuary. 


PROPEU   NAMES. 


125 


LESSON  XXXV. 


PROPER  NAMES. 


395. 


A 
B 

C 

D 

E 
F 

G 
H 
I 

J 
K 
L 

M 

N 
O 

Porter 

Francis 

Montgomery 

Cumberland 

Morgan 

Ladd 


......\.r. 


.1....'...^. 


/_r 


..^. 


.\.r::-..:^. 


3     I     « 


.^..:). 


r  ) 


■^■ 


^t/^.^. 


p 
Q 
R 

S 
T 
U 

V 

v/ 

X 

y 
z 

Washington 

Carlyle 
Sherman 


'.^..77^.... ..a..     Chambers 

Nelson 

Napoleon 

Foster 


.CLJi_^^7;Y!fp 


''  "        '^       Spencer 

o  ^^    I         y^        Des  Moines 

C!         V~:i       d        Iowa  City. 


,,!^. 


896.     When  practical,  it  is  best  to  write  proper  names  in  both 
long  and  short-hand,  particularly  where  the  spelling  is  not  indicated 

by  the  pronunciation.    If  in  Court,  for  instance.  Miss 

should  be  called  as  a  witness,  and  her  name  written  in  short-hand 
only,  the  proper  spelling,  Coralie  Both,  would  not  be  known  when 
the  notes  came  to  be  transcribed.  The  stenographic  character 
does  not  indicate  the  spelling  of  a  name,  but  -what  is  equally 
important,  it  gives  the  pronunciation,  which  the  spoiling  of  it  does 
not  do.  Once  writing  in  long-hand  is  sufflcient  for  a  name  that 
occurs  a  number  of  times  in  a  single  report.  If  the  spoiling 
cannot  be  had,  the  name  should  be  carefully  vocalized  the  first 
time  written.  Names  are  so  numerous  that  a  vocabulai-y  of  them 
could  not  well  be  memorized ;  and  this  would  be  unnecessary,  since 
the  practical  writer  can  readily  invent  sufficiently  intelligible  out- 


126  REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SIIORT-HAXD. 

liues  for  the  most  difficult  of  them.  The  halving  principle  should 
be  made  use  of  sparingly.  Any  outUne  which  may  stand  for  more 
than  one  name,  as  kay-per  for  both  Cowper  and  Cooper,  requires 
that  one  or  more  of  the  principal  vowels  be  inserted.  A  name 
thus  vocalized  need  not  be  underscored. 

EXERCISE  35. 

397.  FACULTY    OF    IOWA    STATE    UNIVERSITY. 

J.  L.  Pickard,  President,  Nathan  R.  Leonard,  Gustavus  Hinrichs, 
Charles  A.  Eggert,  Amos  F.  Currier,  Stephen  N.  Fellows,  W.  F. 
Peck,  P.  J.  Farusworth,  W.  S.  Robertson,  "W.  D.  Middleton,  John 
C.  Shrader,  Leonard  F.  Parker,  Elmer  F.  Clapp,  P.  H.  Pliilbrick, 
Samuel  Calvin,  James  M.  Love,  A.  C.  Cowperthwaite,  W.  H. 
Dickinson,  George  A.  Thurston,  Lewis  W.  Ross,  Susan  F.  Smith, 
Emlin  McClain,  Austin  Adams,  Jolni  F.  Duncombe,  John  N.  Rogers, 
C.  M.  Hobby,  I.  P.  Wilson,  James  H.  Rothrock,  W.  D.  Stillman, 
William  C.  Preston,  Thomas  11.  McBride,  Phebe  Scofield,  Will  E. 
Crane,  O.  T.  Gillett,  T.  G.  Roberts,  Clias.  W.  Eaton. 

398.  Cowper,  Channing,  Byron,  Druramond,  Harrington, 
Hudson,  Beecher,  Dickens,  Evans,  Harrison,  Lambert,  Blackstone, 
Clay,  Douglass,  Cobden,  Everett,  Hale, Herbert,  Andrews,  Brewster, 
Bacon,  Brown,  Butler,  Chapman,  Clinton,  Franklin,  Hamilton, 
Hedge,  Lincoln,  Luther,  Macaulay,  Mitchell,  Osborn,  Pascal,  Potter, 
Rochester,  Rogers,  Ruskin,  Spurgeon,  Strickland,  Taylor,  Tenny- 
son, Thompson,  Wesley,  Irving,  Johnson,  Littleton,  Liverpool, 
Madison,  Monroe,  Buchanan,  Logan,  Newton,  Nellie  V.  Hutchinson, 
Lillian  Cooley,  Bessie  Gardner,  Wm.  A  Sliepfer,  Chas.  R.  Brown, 

A.  A.  Ladd,  Will  H.  Miller,  11.  W.  Seaman,  H.  C.  Truesdale,  Jas. 

B.  French,  Clara  Gruber,  Eniil  L.  Ban-ner,  Fred.  A.  Remley,  W. 
H.  Martin,  Frank  Olds,  Myrou  E.  Wheeler,  Lymau  Banks,  Emma 
Searles,  Ada  Gaston,  Marion  Grayson,  Jenny  Griffiths,  Lide 
Cameron,  London,  Edinburgh,  Paris,  Berlin,  Philadelphia,  Boston, 
Denver,  Lexington,  St.  Paul,  Omaha,  Lancaster. 


SPECIAL  RULES   AND   PRACTICAL  SUGGESTIONS.  127 

399.  TRAKSLATE. 

.<:!^....,^.........<5.,.' 


,.^. 


LESSON  XXXVI. 


SPECIAL  RULES  AND  PRACTICAL  SUGGESTIONS. 

400.  Exceptions  must  sometimes  be  made  to  the  rules  given  for 
tlie  proper  curving  and  slanting  of  letters  to  prevent  certain  out- 
lines from  expressing  too  much;  e.  g.  assail  and  jail  are  written  in 
the  manner  shown  by  the  first  and  third  outlines,  not  by  the  second 
and  fourth. 


X 


.t.^.:.../:...^.. 


Assail  jail  gravest  nicest  Norttiampton  Trans-Continental  Ry.  Co 

401.  Est  may  sometimes  Ije  struck  upward,  as  in  gravest,  and 
nicest. 

402.  lleporters  often  contract  the  outlines  for  such  lengthy 
words  and  phrases  as  Northampton,  or  Trans- Continental  Railway 
Company,  especially  if  these  are  repeated  several  times  iu  one 
report. 

403.  The  liquids  r  and  I  are  commonly  expressed  by  ray  and 
lay,  ar  and  el  being  employed  only  when  their  use  secures  more 
angular  or  facile  outlines.  Final  I  when  preceded  by  V^ .  ^  ,  ° — , 
or  — ^,  should  be  expressed  by  the  downward  stroke.  When  this 
letter  follows  an  initial  vowel,  el  should  be  used,  as  in  alike  (el-kay)  ; 


128  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

but  exceptions  are  made  when  necessary  to  secure  angular  outlines, 
as  in  alight,  written  laj--te,  instead  of  el-te.  Shay  is  employed  only 
when  ish  cannot  be,  which  is  rare,  as  in  shell,  written  shay-lay,  not 
ish-lay,  or  ish-el.     Shay  and  el  are  never  used  standing  alone. 

404.  The  professional  reporter  is  allowed  certain  licenses,  which 
should  not,  however,  be  taken  by  the  student.  In  rapid  writing,  he 
may  give  the  letters  less  than  the  required  amount  of  slant  or 
curvature,  omit  shading  to  a  certain  extent,  and  even  in  some  cases 
write  first  and  third  position  words  on  the  line.  Every  writer  in 
time  becomes  familiar  with  those  iuacuracies  wliich  are  peculiar  to 
himself;  but  it  should  be  his  constant  aim  to  keep  as  near  the 
standard  as  possible,  in  order  that  the  legibility  of  difficult  passages 
may  not  be  endangered,  and,  also,  that  others  may  be  able  to  read 
his  notes. 

405.  Limit  of  inaccuracy.  In  no  case,  however,  should  a  word 
be  written  so  far  wrong  as  to  appear  to  be  an  entirely  different 
word . 

406.  The  greatest  speed  will  be  gained  ultimately,  only  by 
writing  the  characters  quite  near  each  other,  and  cultivating  as 
small  and  neat  a  hand  as  possible. 

407.  No  stenographer  can  afford  to  disregard  certain  general 
directions  which  relate  to  the  mechanical  part  of  his  profession. 
He  should  use  paper  distinctly  ruled,  and  of  the  best  quality  only. 
A  good  fine  pointed,  short-nibbed  gold  pen  of  medium  size  should 
be  employed.  This  should  be  more  or  less  elastic,  dependent  on  the 
writer's  lightness  of  touch.     Arnold's  writing  fluid  is  most  suitable. 

408.  If  a  pencil  is  used,  it  should  be  of  medium  hardness  only, 
kept  sharp,  and  used  with  soft  or  uncalendered  paper.  It  is  well 
to  employ  this  only  in  exceptional  cases,  since  the  transcribing  of 
pencil  notes  is  injurious  to  the  eyes.  For  various  other  reasons, 
also,  the  pen  is  much  superior  to  the  pencil  for  short-hand  woi'k. 

409.  Professional  stenographers  commonly  use  note-books  man- 
ufactured expressly  for  this  purpose.  Not  only  are  these  the  most 
suitable  for  such  work,  but  greater  ease  of  writing  is  secured  by  the 
habitual  use  of  books  which  are  uniform  as  to  size  of  page,  width 
of  ruling,  and  quality  of  paper. 

410.  All  stenographic  notes,  no  matter  for  what  purpose  taken, 
should  be  filed,  indexed,  and  carefully  preserved  for  several  years. 


SPECIAL  RULES  A.-^   PRACTICAL  SUGGESTIONS.  129 

The  contingencies  are  many  Tvhich  may  render  a  transcript  of  some 
portion  of  these  very  valuable. 

EXERCISE  36. 

411.  THE   BOLTER  SCHOOL  BILL. 

Extract  from  a  speech  delivered  before  the  Iowa  Legislature  by 
Hon.  R.  L.  Bolter,  Feb.  26,  188-1.     Reported  by  F.  A.  Remley. 

1.  Mr.  Speaker: — The-importaut-cliauges  proposed  are  in-the 
1st,  5th,  and  157th  Sections  of-this-bill.  2,  It-Avill-be  readily  seen 
ou-a  careful  examination,  that-iu-these  three  Sections  will-be- 
found  all-the  real  changes.  3.  Wliat-are-these-changeis?  4.  Simply, 
sir,  that-each  civil  township  is  made -a  corporate  body  for  school- 
purposes,  having-the-right  to  sue  and-be  sued,  and-do-other  cor- 
porate acts.  5.  Now,  I-am-aware,  sir,  that-this  fact  alone,  iu-my- 
judgment,  will  elicit  about-the-ouly  discussion  that-will  be  called 
out  by-the-bill.  6.  Each  civil  township  is-the  smallest  govern- 
mental division  of-our  State  aud-Natioual  system,  and-has-been 
in-existence  since  colonial  times.  7.  Every  school  boy  of-twelve 
understands  their  boundaries.  8.  If-I  were  asked  to-explain  the- 
present  school-system,  and-our  abominable  system  of-school- 
districts,  I- would-be  unable  to-do-so.  9.  I-think-it-is-uot-too- 
much  to  say  that-uot-one-of-my-friends  will-be-able-to-explain 
to-this  House  the-system  for- which  he-will  contend.     (2  m). 


130  REPORTIXG   STYLE   OF    SHORT-HA>'D. 


LESSON     XXXVII. 


AMANUENSIS    REPORTING. 

412.  As  a  prerequisite  to  success  in  this  field,  a  tliorough  educa- 
tion is  demanded  in  tlie  common  Englisli  brandies,  as  aritlnnetic, 
oriliograpliy,  grammar,  and  business  forms.  Good  penmansliip, 
and  a  liuowledge  of  type-writing,  book-Iieeping,  and  in  rare  cases 
telegraphy  and  some  of  the  modern  languages,  are  also  valuable. 

413.  Various  degrees  of  speed,  ranging  from  90  to  150  words 
per  minute,  are  required.  As  such  secretary,  it  becomes  one's 
duty  to  write  letters,  telegrams,  contracts,  agreements,  newspaper 
articles,  briefs,  editorials,  etc.,  at  the  dictation  of  his  employer,  or 
whoever  has  the  business  management,  and  afterwards  transcribe 
and  deliver  the  same.  A  better  understanding  of  the  secretary's 
duties  may  be  gained  fi'om  a  cousidei'atiou  of  the  relations  existing 
between  him  and  his  employer.  It  is  much  more  severe  mental 
work  to  rapidly  indite  important  business  letters,  than  to  slowly 
write  them  out.  Dictating  is  in  fact  as  much  an  accomplishment 
as  reporting.  Perfect  quiet,  and  security  from  all  disturbance,  are 
essential  in  the  work  of  dictating  letters  and  papers  of  this  kind. 
Hence  the  stenographer  to  the  fullest  extent  possible,  should 
refrain  from  everything  that  may  perplex  or  disconcert  the  reflec- 
tions of  his  superior.  He  should  not  only  maintain  quiet,  but  be 
prepared  the  moment  called  upon  to  read  what  he  has  written,  and 
remain  in  constant  readiness  to  record  every  word  spoken.  He 
should  also  abstain  from  all  show  of  nervousness  during  the 
occasional  intervals  in  the  dictation. 

414.  When  the  matter  in  hand  is  entirely  finished,  he  may  ask 
for  the  spelling  of  proper  names,  insert  words  which  he  failed  to 
hear  or  record,  and  make  the  necessary  corrections.  Apparent 
grammatical  and  verbal  errors  need  not  be  called  up,  but  should  be 
corrected  by  himself  when  the  transcript  is  made. 


AMAXUEXSIS  REPORTING.  131 

EXERCISE  37. 

415.  1.  The-best  time  to-frame  an-answer  to-the-letter  of-a- 
frieud  is-the-moment  you-receive-it.  2.  Tlien-the-warmth  of- 
frieudship,  aud-the  iutelligence  received,  most  forcibly  co-operate. 
3.  Letters  which-are  warmly  sealed  are-ofteu  but  coldly  opened. 
t.  Let-your-letter  be-written  as  accurately  as-you-are-able, — I- 
meau  with-regard-to  language,  grammar,  and  stops;  for-as-to-the 
matter  of-it,  the-less  trouble  you-give-yourself  the-better  it-will- 
be.  5.  Letters  should-be  easy  and-natural,  and-convey  to-those- 
to-whom  we-send-them  just  what  we  would-say  if-we-were-with- 
them.  6.  To- write  a-good  love-letter,  you  ought-to  begin  without- 
knowing  what-you-mean-to  say,  and-to-tinish  without-knowing 
what-you-have  written.     (1  m  30  s). 


416.  Omaha,  Neb.,  Dec.  3,  1883. 

William  Tackaberry  &  Son, 

Sioux-City,  Iowa. 

Gentlemen  : — We-understand  the-impression  has-been-formed 
by-you  that  E.  C.  Palmer  &  Co.  have-been  given  the-ageucy  iu- 
your-city  for- our  crackers. 

We-beg  to  advise  you  that-such-is-not-the-case.  "We-do-not 
purpose  to-give  the-agency  for-our  crackers  to  any-one -house, 
thereby  depriving  ourselves  of-a  vast  amount-of  business  we  would 
otherwise  get.  We-have-beeu  offered  the-exclusive  trade  of-other 
wholesale-houses  in-your-city  for-that  privilege,  but  have-always 
declined  and-iu  futui-e  will  pursue  the-same  policy. 

We-beg-to  advise  you  further  that  the-advertisement  given  us 
by  Messrs.  Palmer  &  Co.  in-their  journal,  is-entirely  gratuitous. 
They-are-uot  recompensed  either  directly  or  indirectly  for-the- 
same  by-this-house. 

We  assure-you  your  business  is  thoroughly  appreciated  by-us, 
aud-will-always  meet  with  as-much  favor  at-our  hands  as  any- 
house  trading  with  us,  either  in  Sioux-City  or-elsewhere. 

Yours  respectfully, 

Jos.   Garneau  Cracker  Co. 

Dictated  to  Miss  Ada  Gaston.  (2  m.  30  s.) 


132  reporting  style  of  short-hand. 

417.  St.  Paul,   IIixn.,  Nov.  8,  1883. 

Messrs.  A-   Buiz   &   Sons, 

Malaga,   Spain. 

Gentlemen: — Eef  erring- to -your  esteemed  fayor  of -the  21st 
ult.,  we-wisli-to  say,  that-when-you-are  ready  to  quote  prices  on- 
your  brands  of  layer  raisins,  we  would-be-pleased  to-receive 
quotations,  with-the  view  of-placing  our  fall-and-winter  order 
with-you.  We  would  also  kindly  request  you  to  inform  us  whether- 
you-have  any  arrangements  with-any  line  of  steamers  running  from- 
yourportto  New- York  or  Baltimore,  aud-what  rates  of  freights  you- 
can  quote  us  ;also,what-the  insurance  and-other  expenses  connected 
with-a  shipment  of  say  5,000  or  10,000  boxes  would-be.  Any- 
other  information  that-you-can-give-us,  that-you-think  would-be 
valuable  for-us,  will-be  appreciated.    Awaiting  your  reply,  we-are 

Very-truly-yours, 

Glldden,  Griggs  &  Co. 

Dictated  to  W.  A.  Shepfer.  (1  m  45  s) . 


418.  Nebrasica  Hospital  for  the  Insane, 

Lincoln,  Neb.,  Nov.  20,  1883. 
J.  W.  Trisler, 

St.  Louis. 
Dear-Sir:— Mr.  Trisler  was  brought  to-the  Asylum  a-few  months 
ago  from  Wyoming  Ter.  He-is-insane,  but  quiet,  and-in-general 
good-health.  My-impressions  are-that-he-will-not  recover  his 
mental  health  soon,  probably  never.  He-is  comfortable,  and- 
seems-to-be  contented.  At  any-time,  if-you-would-like  to-hear 
from-him,  just  drop  me  a-postal-cai'd,  anything  to-remiud  me, 
and-I-will  take-pleasure  in  writiug-you. 

Respectfully, 

H.  P.  Mathewson,  Supt. 
Dictated  to  Miss  B.  Archibald.  (1  m). 


AMAXUENSIS   REPOKTIXG.  133 

419.  St.  Paul,  Mixx,,  Feb.  29,  1884. 

D.  Getty  &  Co., 

White  Bear,  Minn. 

Gentlemen: — Enclosed  I  haud-you  statement  of-j'our  account 
to  Jau'y  1st.  you-know  we-do-not-ofteu  say-anything  to-3'ou 
aboat -money,  but  just-now  we-are -having  heavy  demands  upon- 
us,  aud-collections  are  rather  slow,  so-that  we  are  compelled  to 
ask-you  to-do  all-that-you  possibly  can  for-us.  We-shall  greatly 
appreciate  anything  you-can-do. 

Allen,  Moox  &  Co. 

Dictated  to  Will  E.  Miller.  (1  m) . 


420.  TRANSLATE. 

Farr  &  Co.,  Collection,  Real  Estate  and  Insurance  Agents. 

Cedar  Rapids,  Ia.,  Dec.  12,  1883. 


£...:i^.-. 


«^       <J~N      v->    Jo 


M«> 


134  reporting  style  of  short-hand. 

421.  Nebraska  Hospital  for  the  Insane, 

Lincoln,  Neb.,  Nov,  20,  1883. 

..3, c/,r:^.::ys.. 

.D...S....'2..v.:)......^L...-..!:z>. 


..^^. 


/iz2r^...4^..:^....^-^...S..-z>.'^......<^. 

;^..ja....!y: ^ 


LESSON  XXXVIII. 


AMANUENSIS    REPORTING,   (Continued). 

422.  The  thoughtful  student  need  not  be  told  that,  since  all  the 
plans  and  secrets  of  his  employer's  bnsiness  must  be  made  known 
to  the  correspondence  clerk,  the  most  implicit  confidence  is  reposed 
in  him,  and  loyalty,  integrity,  and  devotion  to  business  are  pre- 
sumed by  the  relationship  established.  He  should  not  only  be  so 
discreet  as  not  to  divulge  office  secrets,  or  betray  implied  confi- 
dence, but  he  should  show  plainly  by  his  conduct  that  he  is  faithful 
to  his  employers,  and  interested  in  their  behalf. 

423.  No  matter  how  accomplished  a  pri\-ate  secretary  ma}'  be, 
his  services  will  not  be  sought,  if  he  has  not  cultivated  habits  of 
prudence,  and  shown  himself  to  be  safe  and  trustworthy. 


AMANCEXSIS  KEPORTIXG.  135 

421.  Ill  taking  difficult  matter  at  dictatiou,  iu  wliich  corrections 
aud  iaterliueiitious  are  afterwards  to  be  made,  it  is  well  to  leave 
the  ulteruate  lines  blauli  for  this  purpose.  Letter  books  should  be 
paged,  aud  every  letter  iudexed  iu  a  separate  book  iu  sucli  a  mau- 
uer  tliatit  cau  be  quickly  referred  to  afterwards. 


EXERCISE   38. 

425.  Nebraska  Hospital  for  the  Insane, 

LiN'coLX,  Neb.,  Nov.  20,  1883. 
i/o/i.   E.   J.  Hainey, 

Aurora,  Neb. 

Dear-Sir: — Mrs.  Crarger  is  A^ery  insaue,  and-is-iucliued  to-be 
violent  aud-troublesome.  I-think  lier-friends  would-find  her  very- 
difflcult  to-mauage.  Doubtless  it-would-be  desirable  to-the 
Couutj'^,  aud-it-certainly  would-be  to  us,  to-have  her  off  our 
hands:  }'et-it-is-my-opinion  that-it- would  be-a-very  unjust  pi'o- 
ceeding,  both  to  Mrs.  Crarger  and-her-friends,  to-place  her  iu-a 
private  family.  We  get-along  witli-her  very-well,  and-with-very- 
little  trouble,  but  I-feel-certain  that-if  she  were  with-persons  not 
accustomed  to-manage  the-iusane,  they  would-find  it-impossible 
to-get-along  with  her.  However,  if-the  Commissioners  of  Insani- 
ty think-best  to-try-the  experiment,  certainly  there-could-be-no- 
objection  on  our-part;  yet  I  wouldn't  advise  it. 

Respectfully, 

H.  P.  Mathewsox,  Supt. 

Dictated  to  Miss  B.  Archibald.  (1  m  45  s). 


426.        Farr  &  Co.,  Collection,  Real  Estate  and  Ins.  Agents, 

Cedar  Rapids,  Iowa,  Dec.  4,  1883. 
Mr.   J/.    Traver, 

Le-Grange,  111. 

Dear-Sir: — Yours  of  Nov.  oOth  received.     You  ask  if-I-have-a 

lot  of-good-farms  for  exchange?     I-liave-not  at-the-present-time 

a-large  list  for  exchange,  but-some  for-sale.  I-niight  possibly  get- 

<ou  an-exchange  ou-farm  or  good  town  property  in  Cedar  Rapids> 


136  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-IIAXD. 

or  in-North-Westeru  Iowa,     ^yill  write-you-again  soou-aud  toll- 
you-what-I-have.  Yours-truly, 

Mark  C.  Farr. 
Dictated  to  Auua  Goodell.  (1  ni). 


427.  St.  Paul  Fire  and  Marine  Ins.  Co, 

St.  Paul,  Jau.  4,  188-4. 
Albo  De  Bemales,  Esq., 
New  York. 

Dear-Sir: — Repl3-mg  to-j-our  favor  of-the  19th  inst.  we  here- 
with euclosie  statement  showing  amount  of-the  grain  pi'emiums,  a>- 
they-have-beeu  reported  to-yoii  under-our  gi'aiu  series.  The- 
amounts  reported  in-October  and-November  gi'aiu  account  have- 
been  paid  to-you,  aud-the-balance  will-be  included  in-Dee.  ac- 
count. If -you -cannot  find  reports  for  these  by  examining  your 
files,  we-will  seud-you  duplicates.  We-are-quite  certain  that-we- 
have-seut-j'ou  reports  for-all  of-these  risks  as-soou-as  received 
by  us.  Yours-truly, 

Stenographic  Letter.  C.  B.  Gilbert,  Sec'y. 

Dictated  to  Bessie  Gardner.  (Im20s). 


428.        Geo.  W.  Crane  &  Co., 

Blank-Book  Manufacturers,  Printers  and-Binders, 
Mr.   A.  B.,  Topeka,  Kan.,  March  20,  1884. 

Los  Angeles,  Cal. 
Dear-Sir: — The-Dockets  sent-you  are-the-kind  Avhich-are  in- 
geueral  use  in-this-city.  The-fuU  printed  form  made  it-necessaiy 
in-a-great-mam'-cases  to  transfer  the-record  to-the-back  of-tlie- 
book.  This-is  obviated  in-the-form  which  we-send-you,  and-also 
in-the  Justice's  Guide  which  we  enclose,  aud-which  will  give-the 
.Justice  the-form  of  entry  of  any  case  that-may-come  before-hira. 
We-will  exchange  the-Docket  if-you-wish,  but  think-your  Justice 
^will-fiud  the-form  sent  the-more  couvenient. 

Yours  very-truly, 

Crane  &  Co. 
Dictated  to  Lide  Cameron.  (I  m  30  s) 


amanuensis  reporting.  137 

429.  Our  Home  ox-tiie  Hillside, 

Daxsville,  Livingston  Co.,  New-York,  March  1,  188-1. 

Isaac  Bennett,  Esq., 

CarroUton,  111. 
My-Dear-Sir: — Our  mutual-friend,  Mr. -Peters,  who-is-at-pres- 
ent  iii-the-employ  of-Our  Home  ou-tlie  Hillside,  as-one-of-its 
reporting-secretaries,  has  handed  me  your-letter  of  Feb.  20, 
wherein  you  express  a-desire  to-have-my  testimony  in-respect-to 
stenographic-writing.  It  gives-me  great-pleasure  to  say-to-you, 
that-for  twenty-six  years  I-have-had  young-men-and-women  in- 
my-employraent  as  stenographers.  Such-is-my  estimate  of-the- 
value  of-the-art  of-short-hand,  that-I-would-have-it  taught  in-all- 
our  graded-schools  and-academies  throughout  the-land  to  youug- 
men-aud-women.  Taking  all-our  institutions  into  account,  and-the 
wide  range  of  -  occupations  in-which-our  young-men  have-to  engage, 
and-which-are  opening  to-our  young-women,  I-would-rather  have 
given  proficiency  in  stenography  as-a-part  of-a  young-man's  or-a 
young-woman's  education,  than-the-best  average  Collegiate  accom- 
plishment which  any-of-our  Colleges  or-Universities  furnish  in- 
the  Latin  and-Greek  languages.  It-is-not  simply  as  scribes  for- 
others  that-this-art  is-of -value;  for-it-is  of-quite  as-raucli  service 
to-those-who  attain  it  in-tlieir-own  priA-ate  affairs.  Wliat-an- 
excellent  opportunity  it  furnishes  to-one  who-has-it  at-hand  to- 
make  memoranda  of  things  seen  and-heard,  and-thus  furnishing 
him  TV  ith-the -means  of -fastening  in-his  mind,  aud-having  at-his 
service,  most  useful  information!  I-have-had  on-an  average  for 
twenty-five  years,  not-less-than  three  short-haud-writers  in  con- 
stant use;  and-I-do-not-know  of  any  who  after  my  training  have- 
not  secured  good-positions,  and-kcpt  them,  and-obtained  entirely 
satisfactory  compensation.  Assuring  you  that-I-am  in-the  fullest 
sense  a-believer  in-the-worth  of-the-art  as-a-means  of  added  use- 
fulness in-whatever  profession  or-calliug  any-person  may-be  en- 
gaged, and-wishing  you  all-success  in-your  pursuit  of-it, 
I-remaiu,  Yours  faithfully, 

James  C.  Jackson. 
(5  m). 


138  REPORTING   STYLE    OF   SUORT-IIAXD. 

430.  TRANSLATE, 

Glidden,  Griggs  &  Co.,  Importers  &  Wholesale  Grocers, 

St.  Paul,  Minn.,  Nov.  9,  1883. 

". .....^....>Z.v 

..^.,.^.^..1..^(,,.V....'..C,..^^^. 

J...v^...4...':::t...., -:^.../::.:r\..-r-..rr.. 


\ 


r"- 


431.  Jos.  Garneai;  Cracker  Co., 

Omaha,  Neb.,  Dec.  3,  1883. 

.\ ^..X...^...v^.,;.:^. 


speech  reporting.  139 

432.  St.  Paul  Fire  and  Marine  Ins.  Co., 

St.  Paul,  Jan.  15,  1384. 


h- 


..^..^...\.^..w::.??..^..L..rvr...tv:^....VQ. 

f\    /O    .  6-^£'  I     \  C 

^■■■^ 7~' 


LESSON  XXXIX. 


SPEECH  REPORTING. 

433.  A  verbatim  report  of  a  rapid  public  speaker  is  the  greatest 
acliievement  of  tlie  stenographic  art.  There  are,  however,  but 
comparatively  few  speeches  of  which  reports  are  wanted ;  and  it  is 
a  fortunate  fact  that  the  best  orators,  whose  speeches  are  the  mo.st 
frequently  published,  are  the  easiest,  also,  to  report.  But  it  is 
very  rare  that  a  speech  appears  well  in  print,  in  the  precise 
language  in  which  it  was  delivered.  A  certain  amount  of  tautology 
and  repetition  add  to  the  force  of  a  spoken  address,  which  in  a 
orinted  report  must  be  discarded.  Many  allusions,  and  even  whole 
sentences,  may  oftentimes  be  profitably  omitted ;  and  the  rhetoric 


140  REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT-HAND. 

of  an  extemporaneous  speech  can  genei'ally  be  improved.  These 
matters  lie  cleai-]y  within  tlie  scope  of  the  stenographer's  dutj';  but 
the  best  plan  is  always,  when  possible,  to  submit  to  the  speaker 
himself  an  exact  copy,  written  on  paper  with  a  broad  margin,  in 
or,l?r  that  he  may  amend  and  remodel  as  he  sees  flt. 

434.  The  student  will  find  the  following  suggestions  of  value, 
wliccher  he  intends  making  a  business  of  this  branch  of  reporting 
or  not. 

Fully  prepare  yourself  before  the  speech  begins.  Obtain  a  seat, 
one  at  a  desk  if  possible,  within  easy  hearing  of  the  speaker.  Have 
yourself  amply  provided  with  writing  material.  Use  a  pen,  if  you 
are  accustomed  to  one;  otherwise,  have  a  number  of  sharpened 
pencils  at  hand. 

435.  No  matter  what  the  purpose  of  your  report  may  be,  make 
it  a  point,  far  as  you  are  able,  to  take  every  word  that  is  uttered. 
If  the  entire  speech  is  not  wanted,  you  can  prepare  an  intelligent 
synopsis  from  your  full  short-hand  notes;  but  an  abridgement 
made  in  short-hand  while  the  speech  is  being  delivered,  is  by  no 
moans  satisfactory. 

436.  Beginners  are  sometimes  obliged,  however,  before  they  can 
follow  a  rapid  speaker,  to  make  as  full  a  sj-nopsis  as  they  are  able, 
recording  the  substance  only  of  what  is  said.  And  it  is  common- 
ly the  case,  indeed,  that  only  partial  reports  of  very  rapid  speakers 
are  wanted. 

437.  A  complete  report  of  a  speech  requires  that  many  things 
be  inserted,  which,  verbally,  are  not  a  part  of  the  address  itself, 
things  acted  rather  than  said.  The  manner  and  appeai'ance  of  the 
speaker  should  be  described ;  also,  the  character  of  the  audience, 
and  the  demonstrations  of  approval,  or  otherwise,  with  which  the 
speaker's  utterances  are  received. 

EXERCISE  39. 

438.  1.  As-it-is-the-characteristic  of-great  .wits  to  say-much 
in-few  words,  so-it-is  of-small  wits  to-talk  much  and-say-nothing. 
2.  It-is-when  you-come  close-to-a-man  in-conversation  tliat-j^ou 
discover  what-his  real  abilities  are.  3.  Speech-making  is-a  knack. 
4.  Men  are-born  with-two  eyes,  but-with-one  tongue,  in-order- 
that-they  should  see  twice  as-much-as  they-say.     (1  m). 


SPEECH   REPORTIXG.  141 

439.  THE-PRESEXT-AGE.— CHAXXIXG. 

1.  The-remarks  now-made  on  literature  might-be  extended  to- 
the  fine-arts.  2.  In-tliese  we  see,  too,  the-tendency  to-universal- 
ity.  It-is-said,  that-the-spirit  of-the  great  artists  has  died  out; 
but-the  taste  for-their  woi-ks  is  spreading.  3.  By-the  improvements 
of  engraving,  and-the  invention  of  casts,  the-genius  of-the  great- 
masters  is  going  abroad.  4.  Their  conceptions  are  no-longer  pent 
up  in  galleries  open-to  but  few,  but  meet  us  in-our  homes,  and- 
are-the  household  pleasures  of  millions.  5.  Works  designed  for- 
the  halls  and-eyes  of  emperors,  popes,  and-nobles,  find  their-way, 
in  no  poor  representations,  in  humble  dwellings,  and-sometimes 
give-a  consciousness  of -kindred  powers  to-the  child  of  poverty. 
6.  The-art  of  drawing,  which  lies  at-the-fouudation  of-most  of- 
the  fine-arts,  and-is-the-best  education  of-the  eye  for-nature,  Is- 
becoming-a  branch  of -common  education,  and-in  some  countries 
is  taught  in-schools  to-which  all-classes  are  admitted.  7.  I-am 
reminded  by-this  remark  of-the-most  striking  feature  of-our 
times,  as  showing  its  tendency  to-universality,  and-that-is-the 
unparalleled  and-constantly  accelerated  diffusion  of-education. 
This  greatest  of-arts,  as-yet  little  understood,  is  making  sure 
progress,  because-its  principles  are-more-and-more  sought  in- 
the-common  nature  of  man;  and-the  great-truth  is  spreading,  that- 
everj^-man  has-a-right  to-its  aid.  8.  Accordingly  education  is- 
becoming-the-work  of  nations.  9.  Even  in-the  despotic  govern- 
ments of  Europe  schools  are  open  for-every  child  without-distiuc- 
tion;  and-not-only-the  elements  of- reading  and-writing,  but-music 
and-drawing  are  taught,  and-a  foundation  is  laid  for  future 
progress  in  history,  geography,  and-physical  science.  10.  The- 
greatest  minds  are  at-work  on-popular  education.  11.  The- 
revenuesof  states  are  applied  most  liberally,  not-to-the  universities 
for-the  few,  but  to-the  common-schools.  12.  Undoubtedly  much 
reraains-to-be-done;  especially  a-new  rank  in-society  is-to-be 
given  to-the  teacher;  but  even  in-this-resi)ect  a-revolution  has 
commenced,  and-we-are  beginning  to-look  on-the  guides  of-the 
young  as-the  chief  benefactors  of-mankind.     (4  m) . 


l-tJ  KEPORTIXa   STYLE   OF   SIIOKT-UAXD. 

440.  TRA>'SLATE. 

.^..TTs..':T:::^..\^..../..L...^..:?:..:rC:^..L../^., 
./..v^..v^...'^..-r<c)...^..M  ^r^ /_ 

..y^.(l-...rra^../..^.;/...:..Ur:,....r.:>,^. 

,^^  ,.'^^r^...L..<^..)o. 


^ 


.^...::^.ri.:....^...'s?-....z'.<-i....(,.^..,^..a.. 
„.^,\..^, 


CONVENTION    REPORTING.  14:3 

LESSON  XL. 


CONVENTION    REPORTING. 

441.  Stenographers  are  employed  to  report  the  proceedings  of 
various  deliberative  assemblies,  as  legislatures,  constitutional,  and 
the  more  important  political  conventions,  and  professional  and 
trades-men's  associations.  These  reports  are  commonlj^  furnished 
to  newspapers,  and  also  frequently  published  in  book  form.  The 
purposes  for  which  they  are  made,  and  the  degrees  of  fullness 
required  are  so  various,  that  no  comprehensive  rules  can  be  laid 
down  sufficient  to  govern  the  reporter  in  every  case.  The  follow- 
ing suggestions,  however,  will  be  found  of  value. 

442.  The  stenographer  should  if  possible  be  seated  near,  or  at 
the  same  table  with  the  official  secretary,  in  order  that,  as  the 
business  progresses,  he  may  learn  the  names  of  speakers,  and  those 
taking  part  in  the  discussions. 

443.  It  is  the  best  plan  always  to  take  as  full  notes  as  possible 
although  an  abridged  report  only  may  be  wanted,  since  the  work 
of  condensing  can  better  be  performed  when  the  transcribing  is 
being  done,  than  when  the  proceedings  are  in  course. 

444.  It  is  commonly  the  reporter's  duty  to  take  down  all 
motions  and  resolutions,  except  those  in  writing;  also,  amendments 
thereto,  and  remarks  and  decisions  thereupon. 

445.  Essays,  and  other  papers  which  are  read  to  the  associa- 
tion, are  filed  with  the  secretary,  and  need  not  be  taken  down  in 
short-hand;  but  the  discussion  of  any  question  to  which  these 
may  give  rise,  should  be  noted  by  the  reporter. 

446.  The  speaker's  name,  when  announced  by  the  chairman, 
should  be  written  in  long-hand  at  the  left  margin  of  the  paper,  and 
his  remarks  recorded  just  below. 

447.  The  official  stenographer  of  the  convention  should  make  a 
record  of  everything  that  transpires.  Much  revision,  and  the 
judgment  of  an  editor,  are  needed  in  preparing  such  verbatim 
reports  for  publication.  This  is  usually  done  by  the  secretary,  or 
a  special  committee.      Short-hand   writers  experienced   in   this 


144  KEPOnXIXG   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAXD. 

branch  of  the  profession,  are  often  employed  both  to  make  and 
revise,  or  edit,  such  reports. 

EXERCISE  40. 
448.  PROCEEDINGS 

OP  THE 

THIRD  ANNUAL  MEETING  OF   THE  IOWA  STATE  PHARMACEU- 
TICAL ASSOCIATION, 

Held  in  Des  Moines,  February  14-15,   1882, 

OFFICIALLY  Reported  by  Eldox  Moran. 

First  Day. — Wednesday  Afternoon  Session. 

The-meeting  was  called-to-order  at  10  o'clock.  President 
Hogiu  iii-the  chair. 

The-minutes  of-the  last  session  were  read,  corrected,  and- 
approved. 

The-President:  I-will-now  call-for-the-report  of-the  Commit- 
tee on  Legislation. 

The-report  was  read  by-the  Chairman,  Mr.  Bush,  and-the  paper 
passed  to-the  Secretary. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Wallace,  tlie-report  of-tlie  Committee  on 
Legislation  was  adopted. 

The-President:  Dr.  Treat,  have-you  any-thing-further  lo-re- 
port  on  Pharmacy  and  Queries? 

Dr.  Treat:     Yes-sir;  a-paper  by  Mr.  W.  H.  Hardy,  of-Clinton. 

The -Secretary :  Mr.  Chairman,  I-would-like-to-say  first,  that 
our  Treasurer  has-a-letter  from  Mr.  Hardy,  expressing  regrets  for- 
his  inability  to-be  at-tlie  meeting. 

The-President:  We-will-now  listen  to-the  reading  of-the  paper 
by  Mr.  W.  H.  Hardy,  of  Clinton. 

The-paper  is  read  to-the  Association  by  Dr.  Treat. 

Tlie-President:  Now-yon-have  heard-the  reading  of-the-paper 
by  Mr.  Hardy,  of-Clintou.  What-is-the-pleasure  of-the  house  as- 
tD-the  disposal  of-it? 


COXVEXTIOX   REPORTING.  145 

Dr.  Treat:  l-niove-3-ou  Mr.  Chairman,  that-tlie  communication 
be-received. 

Tlie-President:  You-mean-by-that,  that-it  shall-be  printed  in- 
the  proceedings? 

Dr.  Treat:     Yes-sir. 

The-motion  was-carried  and-the  thanks  of -the  Association  ten- 
dered the -writer. 

Mr.  Schafer:  I-will-now-present  the-report  of -the  committee 
appointed  to-cousider  tlie-Presidents  address. 

Vice-President  Townsend  assumes  the-cliair. 

The  committee  referred  to  report  as  follows:  "To-the  President 
and-merabers  of-the  Iowa  State  Pharmaceutical  Association :  Your 
committee  appointed  to-consider  tlie-address  of -our  retiring 
President,  ask-to-pi'eseut  the-following  report: 

We-clo  most  heartily  concur  in-the  leading  suggestions.  We- 
would,  however,  call-your  special-attention  to-the  following 
recommendations : 

1.  That-every  registered  Pharmacist  look  well  to  all  impositions 
from  unprincipled  persons,  in-obtaining  liquors  for  improper  use 
uuder-all-manner  of -representations. 

2.  That-we  heartily  endorse  the  aiding  and-sustaining  the-Com- 
missioners  of  Pharmacy  in-their  duties  to-the  full  extent  of-the 
law. 

3.  The-subject  of-revising  the-By-Laws  had-our  attention,  but 
owing  to-the  necessities  of-the-case,  amendments  have  already- 
been  adopted,  which  fully  cover  this-poiut. 

4.  We-most  heartily  and-cheerfully  endorse  the-suggestiou, 
that-the  Association  become  incorporated  uuder-the  laws  of-the 
State.    A-motiou  to-adopt  the-report  of-the  committee  prevailed. 

Mr.  Crawford:  Mr. -Chairman;  I-move-you  that-the  Committee 
on  Legislation,  as  expressing  the-sense  of-this  Association,  be 
instructed  to-procure  an-amendment  to-thc-present  law,  making- 
it-a  penalty  not-exceeding  $200.00  for-a-persou  conducting-a 
pharmacy  without  registration,  by-having-that-matter  so-that-it- 
will  properly  come-before-the  Grand-Jury,  and-that-the  Court 
may  act  at  discretion,  and-make-a  fine  not-exceeding  this  amount. 
There-are  communities  where-the  prohibitory  liquor  law  of  Iowa  is 
10 


IIG  KEPORTING   STYLE   OF    SHORT-HAND. 

practically  a-dead-letter.  No  Grand-Jury  can-be  iniDaneled  to- 
take  proper  cognizance  of-tlie  law. 

The-law-maker  makes-the  law,  not-only  to-rule  subjects,  but- 
also  to-rule  the-law-makers.  Now  I-think-that,  in-this-matter, 
■we-stand  between-the  law-maker  and-the  law-breaker.  In-tliis- 
respect  we-are  handling,  unfortunately,  patent  medicines,  one -of - 
the  giant  evils  of-the  day.  That-there-is-a-demaud  for-them,  no- 
«ue  questions.  This-demand  comes  as-well  from-the  law-maker 
•as -it  does  from-the  law-breaker.  While-one-man  claims  to-call- 
ior-it  withiu-the  limits  of-the  law,  there-is-a-questioa  at-last 
about-what  there-is-a-call-for.  Now-then,  we-are-uot  only 
•standing  between  law-makers  and  law-bi"eakers,  but-we-staud 
between-the  patent  medicine  man  and-the  consumer,  between-the 
physician  and-the  patient.  It-seems-to-me  our-position  is-a-very 
peculiar  one.  For-instance,  some  nostrum  is  placed  upon-the 
market  and-it-is  so  advertised  that-there-is-a-demand-for-it,  and- 
■vve,  as  retail-dealers,  purchase  some  and-sell  it  to-our-customers 
Tvho-demand-it.  It-is-a  spurious  article.  Who-gets-the  blame? 
I-think-those-who-are  doing-business  on-honest  principles  aud- 
liviug  up  to-the  law,  will  go  forward  and-raise  the-standard  so- 
high  that-every-oue  will-be  ashamed  to  engage  in-that-busiuess. 

The -President:  The-motion  now  is-that-the  Committee  on 
Liegislation  procure  a-pharmacy  law  makiug-the  violator  liable  to- 
a.  penalty  not-exceeding  $200.00. 

Mr.  Parish:     Did-you-say-that-it-should-be  indictable? 

Mr.  Ci'aAvford:  Yes-sir.  I-said-that-it-shouId-be-a  misde- 
meanor, and-that-the  penalty  should-be-that-amount. 

A-Member:  I-thiuk-there  ought-to-be-a  way  of-getting  out-of 
it  without-making  it  a-Graud-Jury  affair.  I-think-it-is-au  offense 
that  ought-to-be  punishable  before-a-justice-of-the-peace. 

Mr.  Parish:  I-don't-think,  Mr.  Chairman,  that-j-ou-can-find-a 
town  in  Iowa,  where-there-is-a  druggist,  but-who-has-a  delicacy 
about  filing-a  complaint  against-a  competitor.  But  if-you-make- 
it  a-Grand-Jury  offense,  they-will-be  obliged  to-take  action  in- 
these-matters.  You-may  take-it  in-any  town.  There-is  one  in- 
•our  town  who-is-not-a  pharmacist,  not  eligible  bj'-reason-of  age, 
:and-he-is  violating  the-law,  and-there  ought-to-be  somebody 
"svhose  dutj'  it-was  to-take  action  in-these-matters. 


COXVEXTION  KEPOKTIXG.  147 

Mr.  Ellis:  Let-us-take-aview  of-onr  position  as  druggists,  the- 
position  iu-which  we-are  held  up  before-the-public,  so-far-as  we- 
ai*e  individually  concerned.  It-ought-to-be  our  object  persoually 
to  abide  by-the-laws,  whatever  these  laws  may-be.     (11  m). 

449.  TRANSLATE. 

„.(o..!:b-...>. 

--V* — 

.@....v^..^...^...:j'....r.^.. 

£.::'..\..-^....^.j...W..^.k.>..X>./v<). 

®--^-^..^.-^ .'r..^.,....y!^.... 

^cA'^h^.l..^r^,,y:?r?..>..y\^..'':'7:77./<^. ^.... 


..^.^...r^..^....'!...r..^..^..7^..e.:^^^^, 
L..^.l..,^....l..^.^...!.T^..."r:!>p-<o... 


148  UErOKTlNG    STYLE    OF    S110KT-liA^■D. 


LESSON  XLI. 


LAW  REPORTING. 

450.  Law  Reporting,  or  the  business  of  recording  the  proceed- 
ings had  on  the  trial  of  causes,  is  one  of  tlie  most  important 
branches  of  the  stenographic  profession.  In  this  day,  all  the  more 
important  cases  are  I'eported  in  short-hand,  and,  indeed,  of  so  great 
advantage  is  this  art  found  to  be  in  the  administration  of  justice, 
that  in  many  states  the  appointment  of  skilled  stenographers  is 
authorized  by  law.  In  the  most  perfect  methods  of  administering 
justice  that  have  been  devised,  it  has  been  required  that  some  kind 
of  record  of  the  evidence  be  preserved,  and  the  fuller  this  is  the 
better. 

451.  Stenography  has  revolutionized  the  methods  of  proceeding 
in  the  Courts;  for  by  its  speed  much  time  is  saved,  and  delays, 
which,  during  a  trial,  are  prejudicial  to  justice,  are  more  easily 
prevented,  and  the  occasion  for  expensive  re-trials  oftentimes  pre- 
cluded. In  no  business  or  profession  is  stenography  more  welcome 
than  in  law,  where  so  much  depends  on  a  record  being  kept  of  the 
precise  words  made  use  of. 

452.  The  Law  Reporter  must  possess  various  qualifications  in 
order  to  a  competent  discharge  of  the  duties  of  his  calling.  He 
should  be  able  to  write  at  least  one  hundred  and  seventy-five 
words  a  minute,  and  read  his  notes  fluently.  In  addition,  also,  to 
a  thorough  English  education,  good  memory,  and  quickness  of 
perception,  he  should  have  a  familiar  acquaintance  with  the  various 
forms  and  methods  of  proceeding  in  Courts.  The  greater  his 
knowledge  of  law,  especially  that  of  evidence,  the  better.  No 
student  should  neglect  the  main  features  of  this  branch  of  the  pro- 
fession. Especially  the  forms  of  such  reports  should  be  learned, 
since  amanuenses,  and  all  short-hand  writers  in  fact,  are  frequently 
desired  to  make  reports  of  depositions,  referred  cases,  and  the  tes- 
timony received  at  preliminary  hearings. 


LAW   KEPOKTIXG. 


149 


453.  The  Caption  of  a  kiw-stenograplier's  report  should  show 
the  title,  number,  aud  nature  of  the  cause,  the  Court  where  peud- 
ing,  the  name  of  the  judge,  referee,  commistjiouer,  or  other  tribu- 
nal by  whom  the  same  is  heard ;  the  term  of  \iourt,  building,  town, 
county,  and  state  where  the  trial  is  had;  the  name  of  counsel  ap- 
pearing on  either  side;  the  name  and  address  of  the  stenographer 
employed.  This  should  occupy  the  tirst  page  and  be  drawn  up  iu 
the  following  manner: 


454. 


CAPTION. 


James  Morgan,  etal. 

vs. 

Oscar  A.  Simons 

and 

John  H.  Bass. 


No.  78'J. 


APPEARANCES: 

NiNDE  &  Ellison, 

Attorneys  for  Plaintiffs. 
R.  S.  Taylor  and 
Coombs,  Morris  &  Bell, 

Attorneyn  for  Defendants. 


EJECTMENT. 

Pending  in  the  U.S.  Circuit  Court  for  the  Northern  District  of 
Indiana,  June  Term,  A.  D.  1881.  At  the  Federal  Court  room,  Fort 
Wayne,  before  his  Honor  Judge  Walter  Q.  Gresham,  aud  i\  jury. 

Eldox  Morax,  Official  Stenographer, 
Indianapolis,  Ind. 


455.  The  report  proper  begins  on  the  second  page,  the  heading 
of  which  should  show  for  what  party  litigant  the  testimony  is 
taken,  the  hour,  the  day  of  the  week  and  month,  and  the  year,  when 
the  trial  was  begun.  Names  of  witnesses  should  be  written  in  long- 
hand. The  record  should  also  show  what  attorney  conducted  the 
examination. 

456.  The  main  body  of  a  law-report  consists  in  the  record  of 
question  and  answer,  or  what  is  said  by  the  lawyer  in  eliciting  tes- 
timony, and  by  the  witness  in  reply  thereto.  That  which  is  spoken 
by  the  lawyer  is  for  conveniente  denominated  question,  and  the  re- 


150  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

ply  of  the  -witness,  ansioer,  although  the  reverse  is  sometimes  in 
fact  true,  as  may  be  illustrated  by  the  following  colloquy  betweeu 
lawyer  and  witness- 

Ques.  (lawyer)  Where  were  you  living  at  the  time? 

Ans.  (witness)  "When  do  you  mean? 

Ques.  (laAvyer)    I  mean  at  the  time  the  accident  happened. 

457.  Paper  about  Ave  inches  broad  is  the  most  convenient  for 
law-reports.  The  question  begins  at  the  left  margin  and  extends 
across  the  page.  The  answer  should  begin,  and  be  entirely  written, 
in  such  a  manner  as  that  no  part  of  it  shall  be  nearer  than  one  and 
one-half  inches  of  the  left  margin.  Answers,  when  brief,  may  be 
Avritten  on  the  same  line  with  the  question,  providing  a  space  of  at 
least  one  inch  is  allowed  to  intervene. 

The  proper  heading,  and  disposition  of  question  and  answer, 
is  illustrated  by  the  exercise  for  translation  at  the  close  of  the 
lesson. 


EXERCISE  41. 

458.  TESTIMONY  OF  JACOB  VRY,— Continued. 

Q.  You-may  state-what-was  the-condition  of-the  bank  at-the- 
time  Robinson  built  the-dock  if-you-recollect.  First  state  as-to- 
the  surface  of-the  ground. 

A.  It-was  like  all-other  canal-banks.  A-sluice  ran  through 
there — was  banked  up-and  stopped  up  with  logs,  for-the  culvert 
to-go-through. 

Q.  Where-the  Robinson-House  now-stauds,  what-was-the 
natural  lay  of-the  ground? 

A.  Well  up  in-some-places;  but  all-the-Avaste  water  ran  in  next 
the-canal  there,  and-the  creek  ran-down  there-also. 

Q.  Where-the  Robinson-House  now-stands,  you-say-thc- 
ground  was  up?  What-do-you-mean,  that-there-was-a  knoll,  or 
hill? 

A.    Yes-sir,  a-knoU  used-to-be-there. 


LAW    PvEPOKTING.  151 

Q.  Ilow-is-lhe  low  place  uow,  as  compared  "with-its-conditiou 
then? 

A .     There -is -a  sort  of  hole  or  pond. 

Q-     Where-was-the  poud? 

A.    Where-it-is-iiow,  before-the-dock  went-iu. 

Q.  How-far  south  of-where-the  dock  iiow-is,  did-the  basin 
theu-corae — what- they  call-the-basiu? 

A.     Aboiit-as-far-as  it-is-now. 

Q.     What-busiuess  did  Robiuson  carry  on-there? 

A.     He  owued-a  shoe-shop,  aud-afterwards  started  a-tan-yard. 

Q.     Where -were -the  vats? 

A.     All-aloug  under-his  whole  building. 

Q.    Where-was-the  north-end  of-the-building? 

A.  Where-it-uow-stauds,  after-he-had-it  all-built  up:  he-had 
tan-vats  clear  up  to-the-canal. 

Q.  Do-you-i"ecollect  auy-buildiug  being  west  of-the  Eobiuson- 
House — auy-other-business  there? 

A.     A-saleratus  factory. 

Q.     Who-was-that  owned  by? 

A.     By  Tyler. 

Q.  Do-you-remember  the-year  in-which  Mr.  Robinson  built- 
the  docking? 

A.    No-sir.  (3  m). 


152  REPORTIXG   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAXD. 

459.  TRANSLATE. 

EVIDENCE  ON  PART  OF  PLAINTIFF. 

TUESDAY,  JUNE  15,  2  P.  M. 

Jacob  Fry, — sworn.    Examined  by  Mr.  Ellison. 
..frrlvrrf. ^..%^. 

..'rT^^T7:.!^.;?rr ^"^      ..  .  , 

h 


Q^^         \g^ 


rO 


liBJECTIONS,   RULINGS,   AND    EXCEPTIONS.  153 

LESSON     XLII. 


OBJECTIONS,  RULINGS,  AND  EXCEPTIONS. 

460.  The  main  purpose  iu  reporting  a  law-suit,  is  that  the  party 
aggrieved  may  be  secui'ed  in  liis  right  of  appeal  to  a  higher  Court. 
There  are  many  other  uses,  however,  which  these  records  are  made 
to  serve.  A  verbatim  report  is  useful  in  yarious  ways  on  re-trials, 
as,  for  instance,  when  impeachments  are  sought;  also,  to  refresh 
the  memory  of  counsel  and  witnesses,  and  settle'  disputes  in  regard 
to  the  testimony  formerly  elicited. 

461.  For  the  same  reasons  they  are  often  serviceable  in  collateral 
proceedings;  also,  to  perpetuate  the  testimony  of  witnesses  who 
subsequently  decease  or  become  insane.  Even  during  the  trial, 
the  presence  of  "Mr.  Reporter"  has  grown  indispensable,  as  shown 
by  the  fact  that  his  notes  are  hourly  referred  to. 

462.  The  stenographer's  notes  are  presumed  to  be  correct,  and 
cannot  be  changed  or  modified  except  with  the  consent  of  the  judge, 
and  agreement  of  interested  parties.  The  record  should  contain, 
not  only  everything  that  is  said  pertaining  to  the  trial,  but  by  whom 
it  is  spoken.  When  questions  are  asked,  or  remarks  made,  by  the 
Court,  jurors,  or  attorneys  not  conducting  the  examhiatiou,  or  by 
the  parties  themselves,  the  name  of  the  speaker  should  appear, 
parenthetically,  in  the  margin. 

463.  Next  in  importance  to  the  evidence  itself  is  the  recording 
of  objections,  which  are  made  from  time  to  time  to  the  introduction 
of  the  same,  or  to  any  proceeding  which  either  party  may  regard  as 
illegal.  The  grounds  upon  which  such  objections  are  based  should 
be  noted  by  the  reporter;  and  should  they  not  be  stated  specifically, 
the  counsel's  argument  in  presenting  the  matter  to  the  Court 
should  be  taken  down.  When  an  objection  is  decided,  the  ex- 
ception, if  any,  taken  by  the  party  overruled,  should  also  be 
recorded.  Exceptions  are  also  taken  to  the  decisions  of  the  Court 
In  sustaining  or  overruling  various  motions  submitted  in  the  course 
of  the  trial . 


lo-t  REPORTING   STYLE    OF   SHOKT-UAXD. 

464.  In  reporthiii  depositions,  objections  are  recorded,  and 
testimony  talven  subject  thereto,  no  rulings  being  made,  or  excep- 
tions taken,  at  the  time.  A  law-report  should  be  as  nearly  as  pos- 
sible a  photograph  of  all  the  proceedings  had.  Hence,  It  becomes 
the  reporter's  duty  to  make  a  minute  of  every  transaction  Avhich 
has  a  bearing  on  the  case.  Examples  of  such  notes  which  are 
inserted  parenthetically  are,  "Witness  refuses  to  answer  tlie  ques- 
tion," "12  o'clock  M.  Court  adjourns,"  "The  railing  referred  to  l)y 
the  witness  is  about  twenty  feet  distant,"  "Gentleman  referred  to 
by  witness  is  Mr.  Jones,  attorney." 

465.  In  some  civil  and  most  criminal  cases,  a  report  is  made  of 
the  impaneling  of  the  jury.  This  should  embrace  the  examination 
of  each  juror  as  to  his  qualification  to  act,  challenges  peremptory 
and  for  cause,  by  both  prosecution  and  defense,  rulings  of  the 
Court,  and  exceptions  of  counsel. 

466.  The  reporter  is  at  liber  y  at  all  times  to  check  witnesses 
who  speak  too  rapidly  or  indistinctly,  or  while  the  question  is  being 
put,  or  objection  made. 


EXEKCISE  42. 
467. 

„-  TT     o  o  r  1  APPEARANCES; 

Wilson  H.  Swales,  Guardum,  j  Hol.max  &  McMullen, 

^.V'  -n  ^  No.  1400.  Attv's  }or    PIff 

te-Watkr  Railroad  C  „  ,.  -^ 

COMPAXV.  ^^'^LL  ^-  ^''Z''!'?''n\. 

J  Atty's  for  De.ft. 


The  White-Water  Railroad 


DAMAGES. 


Tried  at  Lawrenceburg,  Indiana,  at  the  May  Term  A.  D.  1881  of 
the  Dearborn  County  Circuit  Court,  before  his  Honor  Judge  Haj-es, 
and  a  jury. 

Eldox  Morax,  Official  Stenographer, 

Indianapolis,  Ind. 

Charles  Ashby, — sworn  on  the  part  of  Plaintiff. 
Examined  by  Mr.  Mc^Mullen. 
Q.    Where-do-you-reside? 


OCJECTIOXS,    RULINGS,   AXD  EXCEPTIOXS.  155 

A.     lu  Harrison  Township,  Dearborn  Co.,  lud. 

Q.     Do-you-kuow  wliere  Lougnecker  station  is? 

A.    Yes-sir. 

Q.     Tell-tlie-Jury  wliere-3-ou-live  in-reference-to-the  station. 

A.  I-live  on-the  pike  about-one-quarter  of-a-mile  from-tlie- 
statiou.     Riglit  about  liere,  (referring-to-tlie  map,  exliibit  "B"). 

Q.  How-far  is-it  f rom- where -you-live  straight  across  to-the 
railroad? 

A.    About  forty  rods. 

Q.    Do-you-remeraber  wlien-tliis  accident  happened? 

A.  I-believe  it-was-the  9tli  of  December,  1879,  between  five  and 
six  o'clock,  to-tlie-best  of-my-knowledge. 

Q.    You-may  state-whether  it-was  light  or-dark. 

A.  It-was  oa-the  darkish  order.  It-was-a  sort  of  cloudy 
evening. 

Q.  How-far  is-that  from-where-the  railroad  crosses  into 
Franklin  County? 

A.     About  two-miles. 

Q.  Where -wero -you  on-the  evening  that-this-accident  hap- 
pened? 

A.    At  my  house,  standing  out  on-the  porch. 

Q.  Wliat-did-you  first  hear, — not  what-was-said  to-you — ; 
first  state -whether-or-not  you-heard  any  collision  or  noise? 

A.     I-heard-the  collision,  that-is  what  drew  my-attentiou. 

Q.  State  to-the  Jury  whether-or-not  at-this-time  you  saw-the 
passenger -train. 

A.    I-did. 

Q.    Where-was-the  passenger-train  wheu-you  saw-it? 

A.     It- was  coming  along-down  here  by-the  dam. 

Q.    Where-did-the  work  or  Mild  train  whistle  if-at-all? 

A.     Right-here  at-the  graveyard — just-gave  one  blast. 

Q.  You-may  state-whether-that  work-train  gave-another  signal 
from-that-time  till-you-heard  thc-coUision  down  by-the  crossing. 

A.     Yes-sir,  that-is-all  I-heard  till-the-collision. 

Q.  Now  how  near  was-this  train  to-the  passenger-train  when- 
the-passenger  moved  away-from  the-station? 

A.  Well,  I-canuot  answer  that  because-I-cauuot  see-the  station 
from -my  house. 


IZG  REPORTING   STYLE   OF   SHOUT-HAXD. 

Q.     Was-there  anv-time  when-you-could  see  both  trains  at-ouce? 

A.  Yes-sir,  when-tlie-passenger-traiu  was  here  iu  front  of-the 
graveyard,  (referring-to-the  map),  the -wild  train  was  coming 
around-the  dam. 

Q.  Tell-the-Jury  aboiit-liow-far  apart  tliese  trains  were  at-that- 
time. 

A.     Considerably  over-a-mile. 

Q.     That-is,    when-the-passenger-train  was-at-the    graveyard? 

A.    Yes-sir. 

Q.  How-far  down  toward-the-station  could-you  see-the  pas- 
senger-train f  rom-your-house  ? 

A.    To-right  above-tlie  target  at-the  upper  end  of-the  switch. 

Q.  How-far  above-the-railroad  is-this  ground  where-your- 
house  Is  located? 

A.    Forty-five  feet  I  should-judge. 

Q.  How-long-was-it  froni-the-time-you-heard-the  whistle  till- 
you-heard-the-collision? 

A.     I-didu't  pay  any-attention,   but  it-was-a-very-short-tirae. 

Q.     Have-you  any-thing  by-which-you-can  measure  the-time? 

A.  No-sir,  I-didn"t  pay-much  attention  at-that-time.  It-was 
so  short-a-time  that-I-made  remarKs  to-my  wife — 

Q.  If-you-have-any-thing  by-which-you-cau  fix  it  in-your- 
mind  without  telling  what-was-said-aud-done,  you-may-give  us 
your-best  knowledge  of-it. 

A.  It-was-a-minute  or  somewheres  about-there;  perhaps  it- 
might-have-been  tliat-long  or-longer  to-the-best  of-my-kno\vledge. 

Q.     Did-you-go-down  to-the  station  after-that? 

A.  Yes-sir,  they  came  after  me  just-a-few-minutes  after-it 
happened,  a-very-short-time. 

Q.     You  weut-dowu  tlien? 

A.     Yes-sir. 

Q.    "Who-went-with-you,  if-anybody? 

A.  Nobody  went  with-me,  only-the-gentleman  who-came  for- 
me. 

Q.    Were-you  there  when-the-train  backed  up  again? 

A.    No-sir. 

Q.     Had-it  gone  on  when-you  arrived? 

A.    It-was  just-going  wheu-I-got-tlxere. 


OBJECTIOKS,   Ul'LINGS,    AND  EXCEPTIONS.  157 

Q      Where-was  Miss  Hurley? 

A.    flight  at-the  end  of-ihe  crib. 

Q.     What-was  done  witn-lieri' 

A.     She-was  picl^ecl  up  and-carried  to-my-house. 

Q.     How-long  did  she  remain  at-your-house? 

A.     I-think  two-or-three  days. 

Q.  Did-you  ever  measure  the-distance  between-that  crib  and- 
the  railroad? 

A.  I-measured  betweeu-tne  end  oi-the  shingle-pile  and-the 
rails;  I-think  the-distance  was-about  one-hundred  feet. 

Q.     You  did-not  measure  tne-crib  by-itself  ? 

A.  No-sir,  but  I  shouki-judge  the-cnb  to-be  about  sixtj^  feet 
long. 

Q.    It-is  simply  a-pile  oi  shingles  wiih-a  sued  over  it? 

A.    Yes-sir,  that-is-it. 

Q.     Can-you  see-the  crossing  from-your-house? 

A.    No-sir,  I-cannot. 

Q.  Now-suppose  a-party  is  seated  in-a  two  norse  spring-wagon, 
the  hind  wheels  being-past  this-end  oi-the  shingle-shed,  how-far 
above-the  crossing  can-the-railroad  target  oe-seen? 

Mr.  Bell  objects-to-the-question,  as  culling  lor-a-conclusiou  of- 
the  Avitness  rather-than  for-the  facts.     Question  withtlravvn. 

Q.  I-wish-you-would  state  just  the-condicion  ot-tne  lady,  when- 
you  saw  her  there  at-the-tiine-wheu  she-was-laKeu-up  to-your- 
house. 

A.  She-was  perfectly  unconscious,  did-not-Ktiow-anything-for- 
a  couple  of -days.  ' 

Q.     What  bruises,  if-any,  did-you  see  upon  herr 

A.  She-had-a  wound  on  her  arm,  but  I-do-not-i-emember  now 
which-one;  she-had  also-been  struck  ou-the  head. 

Q.    Where-was-the  wound  dressed?    A.    At-my-house. 

Q.     Who-was-the  physician?    A.     Dr.  West,  of  Harrison. 

Q.  Was  she-taken-away  from-your-house  before  she  again- 
becarae  conscious? 

Mr.  Bell,  on-part  of-defendant,  objects-to-the-question  on-the- 
ground  that-it-is  leading.     Objection  sustained.    Plaintiff-excepts. 

Q.  Did  she  goaway  from-your-house,  before  or-after- she -became 
conscious? 


158  REPORTING   STYLE    OF   SHORT-HAND. 

Mr.  Bell  on-part  of-defeudant  objects-to-the-questiou  ou-tlie- 
ground  tliat-it-is  leading,  mcompeteiit,  aud-immaterial.  Question 
withdrawn. 

Q.     Did-3'ou  ever  work  on-a  railroad?     A.     Xo-sir. 

Q.     Havc'-you  any-judgment  as-to-the  speed  of-traius? 

A.     No-sir. 

Q.  You-may  state  in-your-judgment,  whether-tlie  wild-train 
was-running  faster  or  slower  than-the  passenger-traiu. 

Mr.  Bell  objects-to-the-qnestiou  on-the-ground  that-it-is-iu- 
competeut.     Objection  sutitaiued.     Plaintiff-excepts.     (11m). 

468. 

CROSS   EXAMINATION'    OF    CIIAS.    ASHBY. — BY    MH.    BKLL. 

■^4-'^- 

...1.^ ^.L.j..,v<±:../z:C^...r:- 


.^LC, 


^-       ■    ^  -1.^.,.^ 


'■%-^-l\-}-<^- fe^-^ ^. 


.a<<'..^.^>±:Z...p..^^^.r>....L..,^... 


\;>..%d. }x..l 

&:^..r:.i,....^ 

.l>-:ri...!2¥.....C.^....s,.-.l.j...-<^.:::J.vr^ 
^^-l^---!^--^ 


EXHIBITS   AND   IXDICES.  150 

LESSON  XLIII. 


EXHIBITS  AND  INDICES. 

469.  "Written  documents,  as  deeds,  notes,  contracts,  mortgages, 
letters,  dejiositions,  etc.,  are  frequently  produced  in  Court,  and 
made  a  part  of  the  evidence;  and  for  tlie  purpose  of  identitication, 
and  convenience  in  making  references,  the  same  are  at  the  time 
marked  by  tlie  reporter  as  exhibit  "A",  "B"  etc.,  according  to  the 
order  in  which  they  are  introduced.  After  the  alphabet  has  been 
exhausted,  the  double  letters  "AA",  "BB"  etc.,  may  be  employed. 
The  paper,  besides  the  letter  "A",  should  be  marked  with  the 
initials  of  the  parties  to  the  suit;  thus,  for  example,  in  the  case  of 
Frederick  vs.  Wilson,  the  certificate  of  a  County  Auditor  is  offered 
in  evidence,  and  marked  by  the  reporter  Exhibit  "A",  F.  vs.  W. 
This  prevents  ambiguity  in  cases  where  the  same  document  has 
already  been  marked  with  a  different  letter,  as  an  exhibit  in  another 
case. 

470.  As  part  of  the  evidence,  also,  knives,  rings,  keys,  photo- 
graphs, or  any  article  whatever  which  it  may  be  important  for  the 
Court  and  Jury  to  examine,  are  from  time  to  time  introduced. 
These  may  be  marked  by  attaching  a  written  card  firmly  to  them. 
The  reporter  should  be  careful  to  identify  as  an  exhibit,  every 
article  or  document  offered  by  either  party,  whether  or  not  the  same 
is  actually  admitted  in  evidence  by  the  Court,  since  rejected  exhibits 
are  necessary  to  complete  the  appellant's  bill  of  exceptions. 

471.  Half  the  value  of  a  law  report  is  lost  by  not  having  it 
properly  indexed.  In  the  first  place,  the  paper  used  should  be 
accurately  paged,  and  each  separate  book  or  manuscript  numbered 
in  the  order  used.  Trials  vary  in  length  from  an  hour  to  several 
months.  Reference  is  frequently  made,  and  the  reporter  ordered  to 
read  sections  of  testimony  taken  days  and  even  weeks  previous. 
Tliis  can  be  done  only  by  means  of  a  running  index,  which  is  kept 
making  from  hour  to  hour,  just  as  the  proceedings  take  place. 
This  should  give  the  day.  and  date  of  each  session  of  Court,  the 
nniUe  of  each  vntncsx,  ;..id  the  page  where  his  testimony  and  cross- 
examination  begins. 


IGO  REPORTING   STYLE  OF   SHORT-HAND. 

472.  Agreements,  admissions,  stipulations,  and  the  introduction 
of  extiibits,  sliouul  also  be  indexed.  Long-hand  transcripts  are 
paged  and  indexed  in  a  similar  manner. 


INDEX. 
473.  Swales 

vs.  )■    EVIDENCE   ON   PART   OP   PLFF. 

The  White-Water    Railroad. 


FIRST  DAY,  MAY  19,  1881. 

THURSDAY   FORENOON   SESSION. 

Impaneling  of  the  Jury,   Vol.  1,  Page  1. 
M.  B.  Pox, "1,       "5. 

AFTERNOON   SESSION. 

Fox,  continued,      .     .     .  1-11  Chas.  Ashby,      ....  l-oT 

Cross-examination,     .     .  1-13  Cross-ex., 1—12 

Re-direct  examination,  1-20  C.  Ashby,  recalled,      .     .  1-48 

Frank  Jackmau,     .     .     .  1-22  Beuj.  Holden,     ....  1-48 

Cross-ex., 1-28 


SECOND  DAY,  MAY  20. 


FRIDAY   FORENOON   SESSION. 


B.  F.  Hurley,      . 

.     .     .     1-59 

Cross-ex., 

.     .     .     1-G3 

W.  H.  Swales,     . 

.     Vol.  2-3 

Guardianship,  admitted   2-3 
Exhibit  "B",  Map  of  Long- 
necker,  admitted      .     .     2-4 
Exhibit    "A",    Letters     of 

FRIDAY   AFTERNOON   SESSION. 

Cross-ex., 2-4      Dr.  L.  J.  Collins,    .     .     .     2-28 

Carrie  Hurley,    ....     2-15    Dr.  J.  P.  Green,      .     .     .     2-44 
Cross-ex.,     ' 2-21     Dr.  J.  D.  Gatch,     .     .     .    2-47 


EXHIBITS  A>D   LXDICES.  161 

THIRD  DAY,  IVIAY  21. 

SATURDAY  FORENOOX   SESSION. 
EVIDENCE    ON   PART   OF   DEFENDANT. 

Mrs.  M.  Jackmau,      .     .     2-52    E.  F.  Lamon,     .  ,     .     2-54 

SATURDAY  AFTERNOON   SESSION. 

H.  Barneclo,      ....     3-15    E.  H.  Bowlby,        .     .     .     3-2G 
FOURTH  DAY,  MAY  23. 

MONDAY  AFTERNOON   SESSION.   . 

Dr.  W.  H.  Myers,      .     .     i-52        Ashby,   admitted     .     .    4-74 
W.  W.  Worthiugtou,        .     4-G8    Exhibit  "D",  Statement  of 
Exhibit  "C",  Statement  of  Jackmau,  admitted       .     4-74 

REBUTTING   EVIDENCE   ON  PART   OP   PLAINTIFF. 

Mrs.  Jackman,  recalled,      4-75. 

EXERCISE   43. 
474.        Swales  ^ 

vs.  V       IMPANELING   OF-THE   JURY. 

The  White-Water  R.  R.  Co.  J 

Mr.  McMuUen,  on-part  of -Plaintiff : 

Gentlemen -of -THE- Jury: — This-is-a-case  in-Avhich  Dr. 
Swales,  who-is-the  guardian  of  Miss  Hurley,  is-the-plaintiff,  aud- 
the  White-Water  R.  R.  Co.  is-the  defendant,  being-a-suit  brought 
for-damages,  aud-for-an  alleged  injury  sustained  by  Miss  Hurley, 
the-plaintiff' s  Avard.  Have-j'ou,  Gentlemen-of-the-Jury,  heard 
anything  of-this-case?  If-any-of-you  have  heard  anything-about- 
it,  please-make-the  fact  known. 

(Jury  make-no  response). 

Q.    Did  anybody  with-whom-you-have  talked  pretend  to-give- 
you  the-facts? 

(^Juror)  Well  I-heard  this-about-it — 

Q.    Did-the-person    with-whom-you    talked     say-tliat-he-was 
telling  you  the-facts  in-the-case? 
11 


162  REPORTING  STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND. 

A.    No-sir,  I-thiuk-uot. 

Q.  Theu-have-you  formed  or-expressed  any-opiuion  as-to- 
wliether  the-plaiutiff  should  recover  iu-tliis-case? 

A.  To-the-best  of -my -knowledge  I-dou't  believe  I-have.  I- 
was  going-to  say-that  I-had-not-heard  of-the  suit  until  I-came  to- 
the  city.  To-the-best  of-my-recoUectiou  I-have-uot  expressed 
auy-opiniou. 

Q.     Mr.  Keed,  have-you-heard  of-the-case  before? 

A.     Yes-sir,  often. 

Q.     Heard  of-the  facts? 

A.  Yes-sir,  and-expressed  my-opinion  of-the-case  when-it 
occurred;  I-live  close  there  and-know-all  about-it. 

Q.    And-j'ou-have-formed  aud-expressed  au-opiniou  about-it? 

A.     Yes-sir. 

Q.  Do-you-think  your-opiuiou  vi'ould-have-any  influence  upon- 
you  in-making-up-your  rerdict? 

A.     Yes-sir,  I-think-so. 

Q.  Do-you-think-you-could-render  a-verdict  iu-this-matter 
upon  sworn  testimony  of -witnesses  here-upou  trial  indepeudeutly 
of-your-owu-opiuion? 

A.     No-sir,  I-think-not.     I-have  already  expressed  my-opinion. 

Upon  motion  Mr.  Keed  is  excused  from-the-Jury  by-the  Court. 

(Mr   McMullen)     Your-Honor,  we-pass  the-Jury. 

Upon-the  peremptory  challenge  of-the  defendant,  the  Court 
excuses  Mr.  Stone  from-the-Jury. 

By  Judge  Baiubridge,  on-part  of-the  Defendant: 

Q.     Mr.  Hart,  have-you-heard  of-this-case? 

A.     Yes-sir. 

Q.    Heard  what  purported  to-be-the-facts  in-the-case? 

A.  Yes-sir,  I-both  heard  and-read  about-it  at-the-time  the^ 
accident  happened. 

Q.  Have-you-formed  any-opiuion  as-to-the  merits  of-the-case? 
.  A.    Yes-sir. 

Q.     Already  have-your-mind  made  up? 

A.    Yes-sir,   to-a-cevtain-extent. 

Q.  Is-your-opiuiou  such-a-oue  as  would  readily  give  way  to- 
sworn  testimony? 

A.    Well  I-think-it-would. 


EXHIBITS   AXD   INDICES.  163 

Q.  Can-you-say  positively  tliat-the  opiuion  that-you-have 
already  formed  woulcl-iiot  iu-a-measure  iuflueuce  j'ourtiual  verdict? 

A.     I-don'i-tliink-that-it-wouId. 

Defendant's  challenge  of  Mr.  Hart  for  cause  is  over-ruled  by- 
the  Court,  to-which  ruling  defendant-excepts.  (-t  ni). 

475.  INSTKUCTIONS  TO  THE  JUEY. 

John  B .       ] 

vs.  y    IN   THE   DISTRICT  COURT,    BUTLER  CO.,  NEB . 

Conrad  M .J 

Gentlemen-of-the-Jury:  1st.  This-is-an-action  brought  by- 
the-plaintiff  against  the-defendant  for-damages  which-the-plaintiff 
alleges  he-has  sustained  by-reason-of-the  defendant  having  falselj- 
and-raaliciously  (it-is-charged)  in-the-presence  and-hearing  of 
divers  good-people,  who  understood  the-German-language,  spoken 
and-published  of-and  concerning  the-said-plaintiff  certain  words 
iu-the-German-language,  which-would  in-the  English-language 
mean,  "He  (meaning-the-plaintiff)  stole  my  lath  out-of-the  chick- 
en house."  The-defendant  denies  he-spoke  such-words  of -and 
concerning  plaintiff,  but  justifies  the-speaking  of-the-words,  aud- 
clainis  that-plaiutiff  did  steal  his  lath,  and-that  plaintiff  did-not 
sustain  a-good-character  among-his  neighbors  for-moral-worth, 
integrity,  and-honesty.  The-plaintiff  denies  hi-his  reply  these  new 
matters  in-defendant's  answer.  2nd.  The-Court  Instructs  the- 
Juryi  that  slander  is  regarded  in  law  a-malicious  wrong  and-injury, 
and-an-actiou  for-it  has-as  legitimate  a-standing  In-a-Court  as- 
any-othei'-actiou.  3rd.  All-questions  of-fact  you-will-determiue 
for-yourselves  from-all-the  evidence  and-circumstances  of-the- 
case.  4th.  If-you-believe  from-the-evidence  that-the-defendant, 
in-speaking  of-the-plaintiff,  in-the-presence  and-hearing  of-others 
who  understood  the-German-language,  used-the-words  charged 
in-the  petition  in  the  German  language,  meaning-in-the  English- 
language,  "He  (meaning-the-plaintiff)  stole  my  lath  out-of-the 
chicken  house,"  then  it-will-be-}'our  duty  to-find  for-the,  etc. 

Given  at  David  City,  Neb.,  Dec.  4,  1883,  by  Judge  Norval. 
Myron  E.  Wheeler,  Official  Stenographer.  (3  m^ 


164  keporting  style  of  short-ha^'d. 

476.         Swales  ) 

r;.  v  testimony  on  part  of  plff. 

The  White-Water  K.  R.  Co.  J 

Wilson  H.  Swales, — sworn. 

.irr^vx .'::^.C!:.j.....<^. 

r::zcr:...:^...i.:?...>.:v^/!. 

J..^,r^..y...'-i.^..^/.?^^.>'..^....!.L^ 

...:::s^...ii.\,..r<:yc..^..x _ 

.^U..X.<^:r;^. ...,...P...^-1. 

..yr-rv^j x/r^...lo..(^.^o:ii. 

...^.n..^..^..^i>r..j:l 

^:.r...:k:rr: 


TRAXSCRIPTS.  165 


LESSON  XLIV 


TRANSCRIPTS. 

477.  All  short-hand  reports  should  be  securely  filed  awa}-,  either 
by  the  Clerk  of  the  Court,  or  by  the  stenographer  himself.  A 
transcript  in  long-hand  may  be  ordered  at  once,  or  not  till  after 
years;  possibly  never.  Before  making  such  transcript,  the  reporter 
would  do  well  to  ascertain  whether  more  than  one  copj^  is  wanted, 
since,  should  he  make  use  of  a  type-writer,  which  is  much  the  best 
plan,  two  or  more  copies  can  be  made  simultaneously.  The 
testimony  of  certain  witnesses  only,  or  a  brief  of  all  the  evidence 
in  narrative  form  not  containing  objections,  etc.,  is  sometimes 
ordered;  while  again,  only  an  abstract  is  wanted,  giving  the 
testimony  to  which  objections  were  made,  together  with  the  rulings 
and  exceptions.  In  addition  to  the  usual  fee  allowed  for  making 
transcripts,  the  reporter  receives  extra  compensation  for  the  work 
of  making  such  briefs  and  abstracts.  In  all  cases,  the  stenographer 
has  a  right  to  hold  the  transcript  until  his  fees  are  paid. 

478.  Original  notes  are  always  taken  hurriedly,  and  need  more 
or  less  revision  and  condensation  when  transcribed  into  long-hand. 
In  this  matter  the  reporter  is  allowed  some  disci'etion.  Answers  of 
Avitnesses  with  few  exceptions  should  be  written  as  spoken,  l)ut  the 
language  of  interrogatories  should  be  corrected  if  ungi'ammatical, 
and  may  be  abbreviated  often  with  advantage.  Lawyers  not 
uncommonly  indulge  in  repetitions  which  have  only  the  effect  of 
lumbering  the  record,  and  should  iu  many  cases  be  entirely  excluded 
from  the  transcript. 

470.  Notes  should  be  transcribed  in  the  order  taken,  and  one 
side  only  of  the  paper  be  written  upon.  Ample  margin  for  the 
notes  of  counsel  should  be  allowed  to  remain  at  the  left  of  each 
page ;  also  at  the  top,  so  that  the  sheets  may  be  bound  together. 

480.  Every  interrogatory  should  be  numbered,  beginning  anew 
with  the  testimony  of  each  witness.    The  transcript,  when  com- 


1G6 


KEPOKTIXG   STYLE   Oi<'    SIlOKT-IIAXr). 


plete,    is  paged  and  indexed,  and  bound  firmly  into  volumes  of 
convenient  size. 


481. 

State  of  Indiana 
Lyon. 


CROSS-EXAMINATION    OF   MRS.  RACHEL  STOWE, 

Continued. 


•%■ 


.^..?i.£^..'^.!^...'..,,,'r■..0^^,.,v<^...,^..^p^ 


.^, 


."j.....fc....:>...f:..?./<'^..'i^.. 


•»,■> 


^^..l.ia...k. 


.<A 


..:^..^.........c^.J::r. r^ 


.-.-..v.^ 


n7\..S. 


i. 


TRANSCRIPTS.  1G7 

482.  TRANSCRIPT. 

State  of  Indiana  "]  H.  W.  Harrington, 

1  on  2^art  of  Prosecution. 

*■  \  Daniel  W.  Voorhes, 

Lyon.  J  for  Defendant. 

CROSS-EXAMINATION  OF  MRS.  RACHEL  STOWE,   Continued. 

Ques.  31.  How  far  were  you  standmg  from  the  corner  tree 
when  you  heard  the  report  of  the  pistol? 

Ans.  About  as  far  from  it  as  I  am  from  the  sto^•e  there  (referring 
to  the  Stove  about  sixteen  feet  distant) . 

Ques.  32.  You  say  j-ou  heard  two  shots;  now  was  it  a  long  or 
short  space  of  time  tliat  elapsed  between  them? 

Ans.    It  seemed  to  me  rather  long. 

Ques.    33.    Well,  how  long? 

Ans.    Perhaps  a  minute. 

Ques.     34.    Are  you  certain  as  much  as  that? 

Ans.    Yes  sir,  that  long  anyway. 

Ques.  35.  Will  you  please  indicate  the  time  that  elapsed  as 
nearly  as  you  can  remember  it,  by  tapping  with  my  knife  upon  the 
desk? 

(Mrs.  Stowe  taps  twice ;  time,  eighteen  seconds,  by  the  report- 
er's watch) . 

Ques.  3G.  How  far  was  your  boy  standing  from  you  at  the 
time? 

Ans.  About  as  far  away  from  me  as  that  gentleman,  (referring 
to  Senator  Voorhes) . 

Ques.  37.  Were  not  remarks  passed  between  you  and  the  boy 
during  the  time  between  the  shots? 

Ans.    Yes  sir,  my  boy  first  said Objection. 

Ques.  38.  Did  not  he  know  one  of  the  men  on  horse-back,  and 
did  not  he  say  "He  has  shot "  ? 

Mr.  Griffith  objects  to  the  question  on  the  ground  that  it  is  not 
proper  cross-examination;  also,  that  it  misrepresents  the  witness. 

Objection  overruled.    Defendant  excepts. 


168  REPORTING   STYLE    OF    SHORT-HAND. 

EXERCISE  44. 
483. 

[Heading,  Question  and  xVnswer,  Objections,  etc.,  to  be  arranged 
by  tile  student  in  the  pi'oper  manner]. 

Benj.  T.  Ei'edericlv  vs.  James  Wilson.  Appearances:  Timothy 
Brown,  Attorney  for  Contestant.  J.  H.  Bradley,  Attorney  for  Con- 
testee.  Contested  Election.  For  the  office  of  Representative  in 
Congress  for  the  Fifth  District  of  Iowa.  Cause  pending  in  the 
House  of  Representatives  of  the  United  States  of  America,  Testi- 
mony taken  before  Eldon  Moran,  Stenographer  and  Commissioner, 
during  the  months  of  February,  March,  April,  and  May,  1883. 
Evidence  on  part  of  Contestant.  Session  at  Marshalltown,  Iowa, 
March  5,  1883.  A.  N.  French,  sworn  on-part  of  contestant.  You- 
may-state  if-you-are-the  Auditor  of  Marshall-County,  Iowa,  and- 
have-uow  in-your  possession  thc-poll-books  which-were  returned 
to-you  from  Washington  Township?  Yes-sir,  I-am  Auditor,  and- 
have-them.  Please-take-the  poll-book,  and-read  so-that-the  Com- 
missioner can-take-it-down,  giving  the-number  of-votes  tha'-were 
cast  in-that  Township  for-each-Candidate  for-Cougress  at-the 
November-election  1882.  I-understand  jon-want-the  certificates 
just-as  they-were  returned?  Yes-sir.  For  Representative-in- 
Congress  there-were  110  votes  cast,  of-which  James  Wilson  had 
45;  Benj.  T.  Frederick  52;  and  David  Platuer  13.  Is-that-the- 
number  of-votes  for-each-Candidate  returned  in-the  abstract  made 
by-the  Count}^  canvassers  to-the  Board  of-State-canvasiser-?  Yes- 
sir,  the-same-number.  Please-turn  to-the  poll-book  of  INIarietta 
Township  and- state  how-many-votes  were  returned  from-tliat 
township  for-the  office  of-Representative-in-Congress  by-the 
Trustees  of-tliat  township,  as-shown  by-the  poll-books,  and-read 
it  off  so-that-it-may-be  taken-down  by-the  Commissioner.  (Read- 
ing from  poll-book)  For-Representative-in-Congress,  Fifth  Dis- 
trict, there  were  123  ballots,  of-which  James  Wilson  had  81 ;  Benj. 
T.  Frederick  37;  and  David  Platner  5.  Please-turn  to-the  poll- 
book  of  Le-Grande  Township,  and  state  how-many-votes  were 
cast  for-each  Candidate  at-the-last  November-election, for-the  office 
of-Representative-in-Congress,  Fifth  District.  (Reading  from  poU- 
Jiook)     For-the  office  of-Representative-in-Congress,   Fifth  Dis- 


TRAXSCRIPTS.  169 

trict,  there-were  263  ballots  cast,  of-which  James  Wilson  had  180; 
Benj.  T.  Frederick  78;  aiul-David  Platuer  5.  Now  state  if -your 
returns  made  for  Washington,  Bangor,  and- Marietta  Townships, 
were-the-same  as-shown  bj'-the-poU-books.  I-will-have-to-look 
and-see.  First,  I-will-ask-you,  if-you-have-a  copy  of-the  returns 
made  by-the  County  canvasser  to-the  State-canvasser?  Yes-sir,  I- 
have.  Now  state  as  to  Washington  Township,  how-many-votes 
for-the  office  of-Representative-in-Congress  were  returned  to-the 
State-canvassers  for-this  Township.  For  James  Wilson  45;  B.  T. 
Frederick  52;  David  Platner  13.  Now  state  with-refercncc-to 
Marietta  Township.  James  Wilson  81;  B.  T.  Frederick  37;  David 
Platner  5.  These  numbers  correspond  Mith-the  poll-book.  State, 
also,  with-reference-to  Le-Grande  Township.  The  schedule  shows 
James  Wilson  received  180  votes;  B.T.Frederick  78;  and-David 
Platner  5.  These  numbers  are-the-same  as-those  I-read  from-the 
poll-book.  Now  state  with-reference-to  Bangor.  For-the  office 
of-Representative-iu-Congress,  there -were  85  ballots  cast,  of- 
which  James  Wilson  had  75 ;  B.  T.  Frederick  2 ;  and-David  Platner 
12.  The-abstract  also  shows  Wilson  to-have-received  75 ;  Frederick 
2;  and-Platner  12.  Excused.         (5m). 


170  REPOKTING   STYLE   OF   SHORT-HAND 

LESSON  XLV. 


PROFESSIONAL  CONDUCT. 

484:.  The  reporter  should  be  prompt  in  his  attendance  upon 
Court,  and  in  the  preparation  of  transcripts;  diligent  and  accommo- 
dating as  an  officer. 

485.  It  is  not  unusual  for  him  to  be  made  the  confidant  of  the 
Judge,  and  for  this  reason  he  should  exercise  the  greater  caution, 
since  he  is  the  more  subject  to  interested  inquiry.  He  is  expected 
to  make  a  true  and  impartial  record;  and,  to  avoid  all  inference 
of  prejudice,  it  is  by  far  the  best  policy  to  say  nothing  whatever 
about  the  case  during  the  trial.  He  should  be  trustworthy,  and 
mix  suavity  with  discretion. 

486.  In  the  heat  of  an  exciting  trial,  when  the  feelings  and 
apprehensions  of  adverse  parties  are  most  awakened,  the  slightest 
loolc,  movement,  or  insinuation  on  the  reporter's  part,  is  liable  to 
be  construed  into  an  indication  of  prejudice  or  partiality.  The 
utmost  care  and  circumspection  are  necessary  to  prevent  such 
reflections,  which  are  sometimes  carried  even  to  the  extent  of  a 
question  as  to  the  integrity  of  the  report. 

EXERCISE  45. 
487. 
FRFnFRiric    1      Timothy  Brown, 

i^REDERICK      1  Atty.  for  ConUstant. 


WiLSOX  ^       •^'    "•    I^'^'^^LEY, 

>v  11.&UJN  j  .j,jy_  j^^  Contestee. 

EVIDENCE    OX    PART    OF   CONTESTEE. 

Session  at  Marshalltown,  Iowa,  April  12,  1883. 
James  K.  Johnson,  sworn.     Examined  by  Judge  Bradley. 
Q.     What  official-position  if-any  do-you  hold? 
A.     I -am  deputy-clerk. 

Q.     Have-you-examined-the     naturalization     records     of-this 
county? 


PROFESSIONAL  CONDUCT.  171 

A.  Yes-sir,  also  all-the-records  of  naturalization  that-have- 
been  Ivept  by-the  Circuit  and-District-Courts. 

Q.  Ilave-you-made-a-memorandum  of-whatthese-records  sliow 
concerning-the  naturalization  of -certain-persons? 

A.     I -have. 

IMr. -Brown  on-part  of  Contestant  objects  to-the  testimony  of- 
tliis-witness  on-tlie-ground  tliat-it-is  incompetent  and-immaterial, 
tlie-origiual  record  booiis  only  being  admissible  as-evideuce. 

Q.  I-will-ask-your  attention  to-the  declaratory  statement  made 
by  .James  Dunn.  State-whether-you  ever  examined  tlie-record  of- 
the  naturalization  of-such-a-persou,  and-if-so,  when-did-you  find 
that  -  it  -  was  -  made  ? 

Mr. -Brown  on-part  of  Contestant  objects-to-the-question  on- 
the-ground  that-it-is  Incompetent  and-immaterial.  The-original 
books  themselves  are-the-best  evidence,  and-the  witness  should- 
not-be-allowed  to-testify  from  any-document  other-than  these- 
books  themselves. 

A.  I-have  examined-the-records  carefully,  aud-find  that-there- 
are  two  James  Dunns.  One  made-his  declaratory  statement  on-the 
28th  of  July,  1856;  the-other  made-his  declaratory  statement  on-the 
I2th  of-Dec,  1866.  I-also  found  from-a  careful  examination  of- 
the  naturalization  records  of-the  District  and-Circuit-Court 
Journals  from-the-beginning,  that-is,  fi-om  Journal  A  down  to-the 
time-when-the  naturalization  records  were  begun,  that-there-is-no 
record  of  James  Dunn's  having-1)een  naturalized. 

Mr. -Brown  on-part  of  Contestant  objects-to  answer  of-witness 
on-the-ground  that-it-is  incompetent  and-immaterial,  sinco-it 
purports  to-be-a  statement  of-the  official  records,  the-same  not- 
being  produced. 

Q.  Then  we-understand  you  as  testifying  that-there-is-no 
record  of  any  second-papers  ever-having-been  issued  to  any-such- 
person? 

A.    No-sir. 

Q.     To  any  James  Dunn,  or  James  Dunn,  Jr.? 

A.    No-sir. 

Q.     What-do-the  records  shoAV  with-refercnce-to  Patrick  Dunn? 

A.     On-the  27th  of-August,  18G6,  Patrick  Dunn  made-his  declar- 


172  REPORTIXG   STYLE   OF    SHOUT-HAXD. 

atory  statement,  but-tliere-is-no  I'ecord  of-his  ever-having-ljeen 
naturalized. 

Mr. -Brown  on-part  of  Contestant  moves  ihat-the-auswer  be- 
stricken  out  as  incompetent  and  immaterial,  being-the  statement 
of-what-the-records  contain,   "\vithout-the-same  being    produced. 

Q.     No-eviden^e  at-all? 

A.     No-sir,  no:ie 

Q.     Now  I-will-ask-your  attention  to  William  Broadhead. 

A.  He-filed  his  declaratory  statement  on-the  Sd  of  Nov.,  1868. 
There-are-no  records  of-his  subsequent  naturalization. 

Contestant  moves  to-strike  same-as-above. 

Q.  Is-this-the-gentleman  known  as  Uncle  Billy  Bi'oadhead,  who- 
lives  in-the  poor-house? 

A.     The-name  is-the-same,  and-I-suppose  it-is-the-same-man. 

Q.  Did-3'ou-find  that  naturalization  papers  had-been  issued  to 
C.  L.  Petit-Demauge? — if-so,  give-the  date. 

A.     On-the  22nd  of  June,  1882,  he-filed  his  declaratory  statement. 

Contestant  moves  to-strike  same-as-above. 

Q.  Then  the-flrst  papers  are-all-that-you  found  to-have-beeu 
issued  to-him? 

A.    Yes-sir. 

Q.  Did-you-flnd  tliat-any-papers  had-been  issued  to  Frank 
Delaware? 

A.     No-sir,  I-did-not. 

Contestant  moves  to-strike  same-as-above. 

Q.  I-will-ask-you  if-you-have  gone  through  these  naturalization 
and-Court-records  by-the  index,  or  if-not,  how  did-you-examiue 
them? 

A.  I-examined  thom  Ijoth  waj's;  first  by  index,  and-then  by- 
looking  carefully  over  each  page. 

Q.  State-whether-or-not  you-found  any  record  of-the  naturali- 
zation of  Edward  Willigrod;  if-so,  what-is-the  date  of-it? 

A.  I-cau  state  thc-book  aud-the  page  from-memory.  It-is-in 
Minute  Book  Number  One,  page  fourteen,  of-the  records  of-the 
Count5'-Court.     The-date  is  somewhere  between  1850-58. 

Contestant  moves  to-strike  same-as-above. 

Q.    Does-the-record  show-that  two  papers  were  issued? 


PROFESSIONAL   COXDUCT.  173 

A.  No-sir,  but-the  record  I-meutiou  is-of-the  issue  of -the 
second,  or  official  naturalization  papers. 

Q.    What  Court  were-they  issued  from? 

A.    From-the  County-Court,  when  Wm.  C.  Smith  was  judge. 

Contestant  moves  to-strike  same-as-above. 

Q.  Mr.  Johnson,  you-say-you  have  examined  these-records 
from-the  beginning,  page  by  page;  will-you-please  state  more 
specifically  as-to-what-records  you-refer? 

A.  I-have  examined  Journals  1,  2  and  3,  of-the  Circuit-Court  of 
Marshall -County,  aud-Journals  A,  B  and  C,  of-the  District-Court. 
The-remaining  records  form  a-book  called  First  Paper  or  Declara- 
tory book.    I-examined  them  all  page  by  page. 

Q.    Are-there  more-Journals  than  this  in-the  Circuit-Court? 

A.    Yes-sir. 

Q.     How-far  does-the  third  Circuit-Court  Journal  extend? 

A.  Down-to  1873,  when-the-first  naturalization  record  was- 
begun. 

Q.  And-the  District-Court  Journal you-have  referred-to  covered 
the-same  period? 

A.    Yes-sir. 

Q.  Mr.  Johnson,  will-j^ou-please  bring  over-the-book  contain- 
ing the-record  of-the  papers  issued  to  Mr.  Willigrod? 

Witness  produces  Naturalization  Kecord-Book  Number  2. 

Q.  Did-you-flnd  this-book  in-the  office  and-custody  of-the  clerk 
of-the  District  and-Circuit-Courts  of-this-County? 

A.  Yes-sir,  it-is-one  of-the  official  recoi'ds,  kept  in-the  office 
of-the  clerk  whose  deputy  I-am. 

Q.  Please  state-the  title  and-character  of-the  third  book  you- 
now  have-in-your  possession. 

A.  It-is  called  Minute-Book  Number  1,  of-the  Marshall-County- 
Court,  kept  when  Wm.  C.  Smith  was  judge. 

Q.  Please-turn-to  page  fourteen  and-read  the-record  contained 
therein  of-the  naturalization  of  Mr.  Willigrod. 

Witness  reads : 


174  REPORTING   STYLE   OP   SHORT-HAND. 


United-States-of-America 
State  of  Iowa,  Marshall-Cou 


;nty.     j 


Be-it  remembered  that-at-a-term  of-the  Couuty-Court  held  iu- 
and-for  said-Coimty,  State  of  Iowa,  on-the  2(Jth  day  of-February, 
iu-the  year  of-our  Lord,  185B,  was-present  tlie-Houorable  "Wm.  C. 
Smith,  sole-presiding  judge,  and  ex-officio  clerk  of -said  Court, 
when-the  following  among-other  proceedings  were-had,  to  wit: 
Edward  Willigrod,  a-native  of-Gerniauy,  and-at-present  residing 
in-said  State,  appeared  in-open  Court  and-made  application  to-be 
admitted  to-become  a-citizen  of-the  United-States,  aud-it  appear- 
ing to-the  satisfaction  of-the  Court  that-he-had  declared  ou-oath 
before -the -clerk  of-the  Marshall-County-Court,  two  years  before- 
his  admission,  that-it-was  hona-fide  his-iutention  to-become  a- 
citizen  of-the  United-States  aud-to  renounce  forever  all  allegiance 
to  any-other  Prince,  Potentate,  State  or  Sovereignty  whatsoever, 
aud-especially  to-the  Kiug-of-Germauy,  to  whom  he-Avas  hereto- 
fore a-subject;  and-said  applicant  having  declared  on-oath  before- 
this  Court  that-he  will  support  the  Constitution-of-the-Uuited- 
States,  and-that-he  doth  absolutely  and-entirely  abjure  aud- 
renounce  all-allegiance  to  any  foreign  Prince,  Potentate,  State,  or 
Sovereignty  whatsoever,  and-particularly  to  William,  reigning 
King-of-Germauy,  to  whom  he-has  hitherto  been-a-subject. 

(Signed)  Wm.  C.  Smith,  County  Judge. 

cross-examination. 

Q.  What-is-your  official-position  in-this-county,  Mr.  Johnson? 

A.  I-ara  deputy  County-Clerk. 

Q.  Are-you  deputy  County-Clerk,  or  dei)uty  County  Auditor? 

A.  I-am  both  at-preseut. 

Q.  When-were-3'ou  appointed  deputy  clerk? 

A.  On-the  10th  of-April,  '83. 

Q .  Wlien  -  did-you-make-the-examination  of  -  Court  -  records 
which-you-have  referred-to? 

A.  Since  receiving  my  appointment. 

Q.  You  still  retain  your  position  in-the  Auditor's  office? 

A.  Yes-sir. 

Q.  How  much  time  did-you  spend  in-making  this  examination* 


PROFESSIONAL   CONDUCT.  175 

A.    The-greater  portion  of-the  day  and-also  most  of -the  evenings 
for-two-weeks.  Excused. 

(14  m). 

488. 

Frederick  ^ 

vs.  V  Rebutting    Evidence  on  part   of  Contestant. 

Wilson.      J 

Jas.  C.  Cochran,  sworn. 

.cr,^-..Jl....^l.:..:.^.^^ 

..s.^2.r^..^ 

^-^...:.|..V.-..l,.^^ 

€-.^^....^.-. 

,.'"-....Q.../..!>o..-..^.v,'r»^.r?f... 

l..).c .^. 

.i.'3,i..tv:>.-^..-:.rr^. ^:^...0:y}^. 

.ta.S...v<1^,.L,,0^. .^ 

'       '^ .......•• 

....^ c..± 


Tocabulaiy  of  "Word  and  Phrase  Signs. 


A 

an,  and 

able-to 

accomplish 

accord-ing-ly,  creature 

accuracy 

acknowledge 
acute,  2  acquit 
act-of-Congress 

added,  had-it 

advantage 

advantageous 

advertise-ed-ment,  bad 
after,  for-it 
afternoon 

again-and-again 

all 

Almighty 

already 

America 

angel 

any.  In 

appear 

appoint 

are 

as,  has 

as-has,  as-his,  as-is, 

as-soon-as 

as-it-were 

as-well-as 

as-great-as 

astonish-ed-ment 

at,  out 

at-all-times 

!it-any-iate 

at-ull-its 

at-it,  it-would,  it-had 

at-all-events 

at-ieugth 

at-once 
:it-flrst 
Baptist 

be-not,  behind 

because 

become 

12 


^.       •...i^ 


/J 

I 

..j....c-..k_p. 


f 


^  ^ 


..T).?K/^Q.Q.    /.^ 


^^ 


.....>. 


3. 


T  D 


Qy    ,  r 


tr^. 


^ 


'-i i-\- 


/" 


~^- 


\^ 


V 


before,  oh 

before-hand 

begin,  2  begun,  3  began 

behalf 

behold,  beheld 

belief-ve 

belong 

beneficial 

benevolence-ent 

better-than 

beyond 

British-America 

brother,  member 

but 

by-the-flrst 

calculate 
call,  equal 
cannot 

capable 
care,  occur 
careful-Iy 

catholic 
celestial 
challenge 

change 

chapter 

character 

child 

Christian-ity 

circulate 

circumstance 

collect 

combination 

come 

comfort 

commandment 

commencement 

commercial 

common,  kingdom 

commonwealth 

communicate 

companion 

comprehend 

comprise 

compromise 


(177; 


VOCABULARY  OF  WORD  AND  PHRASE   SIGNS. 


Conception 

concern 

concession 

conclude 

conclusion 

condemnation 

condescend 

condescension 

condition 

conduct 

confession 

confidence 

confidential 

confirm 

congratulate 

congregation 

congress 

conjunction 

connpction 
conscience 
consequence 

consideration 

consistent 

consonant 

constantly 

Constitution  of -the  U.  S. 

construction 

consume 

contact 

contain 

contempt 

content,  contained 

continaal-ly 

contrary 

contrivance 

controversy 

convenience 

convince 

correct 

counterchange 

Court-of-Justice 

cross-examination 

cure 
curious 


danger 

dare-not 

dark,  during 

darkness 

Dear-sir 

December 

di^flrient 
degree,  agree 
deliberation 

delight 
deliver 
dencminate-ioti 

deride 

derivative 

derive 

defcrlTJe,  scripture 

description 

destruction 

determination 

determine 

develop-meut 

did 

did-not 

differ-ed-ence-ent 

difficulL-y 

dignity 

disadvantage 

disagree 

disappear 

disconnect 

discontent 

discontinue 

dissatisfaction 

do-not 

doctor 

doctrine,  3  darken 

dollar 

domestic 

downward 

during,  dark 
each,  wateh 
each-are 

each-will-have 
e'lft-and-west 
PMsteru.  historian 


VOCABULAKY  OF  WOUD  AXD  PHRASE  SIGNS. 


179 


Efficient 

electric-ity 

emphatic 

enlarge 

equal,  call 

especial-Iy 

essential-ly 

establish-ed-ment 

eternal 

European 

ever-and-ever 

everlasting 

e  very-one 

examination 

excliange 

expect 

experience 

explanation 

expression 

extemporaneous 

external 

extraordinary 

fact,  future 

failure 

faithful 

falsehood 

familiar 

fear-of-Gon 

feature,  it-it 

tirst 

follow 

for 

for-the-most-part 

for-instance 

forgive 

forsaiie,  for-the-sake-of 

forward 

from 

from-it,  effort 

full 

function 

future,  fact 

save- it 

general-ly 

generation 


U.Q.a... 


X...P.. 


<j^ 


...•::5....^.::S. 


.^.^.w 
.^.. 


^ 


s-.^...^ 
^.i/^ 


A.. 


<^ 


^. 


^.. 


I -j-'^- 


-v 


<r..rr  b. 


.So..    I 


o 


Gentleman.  1  gentlemen 

Gentlemen-of-the-Jury 

give 

give-it 

glory-fy 

glorious 

good-and-bad 

govern-ed-ment 

Great-Britain 

preater-than 

great-extent 
guilt-y 

had,  advertisement 

had-nut 

half,  few 

hand 

hand-in-hand 

happen 

happiness 
happy,  hope 
hard,  heard,  word 

hardware 

has,  as 

have 

have-it 

have-not 

have-had 

he 

liealth-y 

hear,  her,  here 

heart 

lieav  n 

height 

help 

hence 

heretofore 

hesitate 

high,  I,  eye 

highly 

highway,  Iowa 

him 

bis,  is 

his-is,  is-his,  is-as 

history 

hold,  held 


180 


VOCABULARY  OF  AVORD  AND  PHR.\SE  SIGNS. 


Holiness 

home 

honorable 

hope,  happy 

how 

however 

howsoever 
human-life 
humble 

humor 
hundred 

I,  eye,  high 

idea 

if,  off 

illegible 
imagine 
immediate-ly 

importance-ant 

impossible 

improves-ments 

inacurate 

in-the-world 

in-the-second-place 

in-regard-to 

in-point-of-faet 

in-oraer-that 

in-seeming 

in-his-usual 

in-hls-expression 

in-his-experience 
in-his-descrlption 
in-consideration 

in-as-many 

in-some 

in-his-situation 

in-respect-to 

in-reference-to 

in-order-to 

in-his-secret 

inclination 

income 

incompetent 
inconsistent 
Inconvenience 


,.^. 


.-^ 


^»^ 


^^ 


.J 


^ 


^^t 


CA 


d  J  L 


L  C 


Indian-Territorj 
Individual 

nhnite 

ntluence 
Huential 

nformation 

njunction 

nquire-y,  anywhere 
nsiguilicance-ant 

ntellect-ual 
ntelligence 
ntelligent 

nto,  3  unite 

nvention 

rregular 

s,  his 
s-said 
s-sale 
s-such 
s-seen 
sland,  I-wlll-not 

t-would-have,  out-of 
t-will-have,  twelve 
t-is-simply 

t-ought-not 

t-not 

t-ought-to-have-had 

t-wiU-not 

t-would-have-had 

t-would,  it-had 

t-ought-to-have 
t-would-not,   it-had-not 
t-wlll-have-had 

January 

Jesus-Christ 

junior 

Justice-of-the-Peace 

just-had 

kingdom-of-heaven 

knowledge 

ladies-and-gentlemen 

landlord 

language 

large 

larger-than 


VOCABULARY  OF  WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS. 


181 


Lawyer 

lead 

legible 

llberty-of-the-people 

liberty-of-the-press 

Lord 

Lord-Jesus-Christ 

loves-US 

magazine,  magnanimous 

magnetism 

majesty 

majority 

manner,  3  owner 

manuscript 

may-not 

may-be,  improvement 
member,  remember 
member-of-Congress 

member-of-the-bar 
member-orf-the-Leg. 
merciful 

minority 

misconduct 

mistake 

more,  mercy 

more-tlian 

mortgage 

mostly,  may-as-well 

most-likely 

Mr.,  remark-able 

much 

much-are 

much-will-have 

must-be 

mystery 

natural 

neglect 

negligent 

neighborhood 

never 

New-Vork-City 

New-Hampshire 

next 

nor,  near,  honor 

North-America 


North-western 

notwithstanding 
*  November 

now 

nowhere 
'    number,  brother 


on-the-other-hand 
on-either-haud 

on-the-one-hand 

one 

one-of-the-best 

one-of-the-most 

one-or-two 

onward 

opinion 
opportunity 


organize 
organization 
other,  1  either 

ought 

ought-to-have 

our 

our-own 

out-of 

over-and-over- again 

overwhelm 

part-y 

partake 

particular-ly 

peculiar-lty 

people 

people-of-God 

perfect 

perfection 

philanthropy 
phonography 
plaintiff 


182 


VOCABULABY  OF  "WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGNS. 


Pleasure 

political 

popular 

posterity 

postmark 

post-offlce 

poverty 

practicable 

practice-al 

principle-al 
probable-ly 
profit,  prophet 

proof,  prove 

proper-ty 

prosperity 

Providence 
providential 
public-isii-ed 

punish-ed-ment 

quality 

question 

quick 
quiet 
railroad 

railway-car 

rather-than 

reality 

real-ly,  rely 

recollect 

recompense 

reconsider 

reduction 

reform 

reformation 

regular 

reliable 

religion 

religious 

relinquish 

remark-able,  Mr. 

re-member 

represent 

representation 

republic 

respect-able 


respectability 

revelation 

revolution 

rule,  2  roll 

said-to-have 

salvation 

sanction 

scripture,  describe 
second 

secure 
senior 
set-off,  set-forth 

several.  Savior 

shall 

short-hand 


South-America 
speak,  speech 
special,  spoke 

spirit, 

spoken 

square 

Streng.h 

Student 

subject 

subjection 

substantial 

such-a-one 

such-are 

Buch-were 

such-are-not 

such-were-not 

such-ought-to-have-had 

8uch-would-have-hK.d 

sufficient 
suggestion 
surprise,  3  suppress 


VOCABULARY  OF  WORD  AND  PHRASK  SIGNS. 


183 


Takes-US 

temperance-ate 

temptation 

territory 

Testament 

testimony 

tbank,  oath,  youth 

that 

the 

their,  there,  they-are 
t  lem,  they 
therefore 

they-will 

they-are-not 

thing 

think 

this-is,  themselves 

this-system 

those,  thus 
though,  thou 
three,  3  through 

to 

to-be 

together 

too,  two 

true 

truth 

try-to-have 

twelve 

unaware 

uncommon 

unconscious 

under 

understand 

union 

unite-y 

United-States 

universal 

university 

unless 

until 

until-it 

upon-it 
upon-bis 
US'  use 


usual-ly 

virtue 

was 

watch,  each 

water 

we 

we-are 
we-are-not 
we-will,  while 

we-may 

we-may-be 

we-must 

welcome 
well,  3  awhile 
what 

whatever 

when 

whensoever 

where,  H  aware 

wherefore 

which 

which-ever,  which,  have 
which  will-not 
which- would-have 

which-ought-not 

wliich-not 

which-  w'd  (or  had)  not 

which-are 
which-are-not 
which-ough  t-to-ha  ve 

which-were-n  ot 
which-will-have 
while,  we-will 

white 

who 

whoever,  who-have 

whole 

whom,  home 
whose,  use 

will 

will-not 

wisdom 

wish,  3  issue 

with 

with-regard-to 


184 


VOCABULARY  OF  WORD  AND  PHRASE  SIGXS. 


With-him,  1  with-me 

with-reierence-to 

with-respect-to 

within,  heathen 

without 

wilnesa 

word,  heard 
Wortl-of-God 
world 


t-\  t.'-A^'J-'X 

.^..j^...::... 

c  ^  u> 

Vl...v..^.^.. 

...n...>r..frr.. 

o^;.:^-^' 

worship 

would 

ye,  year-s 

yesterday 

yer, 

young 

young-man 

young-woman 

yourself. 


ADDENDA. 


Children 
nevertheless. 


.../:-^....L..c 


■F-^' 


■will  (noun) 
ours-truly. 


NOTE  TO  THE  THIRD  EDITION. 

The  author  respectfully  requests  the  address  of  every  person 
into  whose  hands  this  volume  may  come.  To  every  such  name 
circulars  descriptive  of  tlie  reporting  field,  containing  also  vari- 
ous matters  of  interest  to  the  student  of  Short-hand,  will  be 
sent  from  time  to  time. 

After  having  learned  the  first  lesson,  you  are  kindly  asked  to 
write  out  Exercise  1,  and  send  to  the  School  of  Short-hand  for 
examination.  It  will  be  corrected  and  returned  without  delay. 
We  will  cheerfully  make  any  suggestions  we  are  able  as  to  the 
improvement  of  your  style  of  writing. 

i^ early  five  hundred  students,  living  in  all  parts  of  the  United 
States,  are  now  enrolled  in  the  department  of  postal  instruction. 
Thoroughly  prr.ctlcal  lessons,  both  in  the  art  of  Stenography  and 
the  reporting  profession,  are  given  by  mail.  Theseare  received 
at  intervals  to  suit  the  student.  Young  ladies  and  gentlemen 
are  given  letters  of  introduction,  and  derive  much  benefit  from 
the  correspondence  carried  on  in  Short-hand.  The  Eeporters' 
Bureau,  managed  in  connection  with  the  Scliool,  seci;res  situa- 
tions for  graduates. 

Please  state  whether  you  wish  to  learn  stenography  as  a 
business  or  as  an  accomplishment.  Further  information,  or 
copies  of  the  trial  lesson  pamphlet,  will  be  sent  upon  applica- 
tion 

The  "  Sign-Book  "  is  a  handy  little  work,  containing  all  the 
word  and  phrase  contractions  arranged  alphabetically.  The 
"Manual  for  Correspondence  Students"  contains  many  valua- 
ble suggestions,  and  directions  for  gaining  verbatim  reporting 
speed.  These  books  are  of  convenient  size  to  be  carried  in  the 
pocket.    Price  25  cents  each. 

Reporters^  Bureau,  Iowa  City,  la.,  Ju7ie,  18S5. 

£185] 


STATE   UNIVERSITY    OF    IOWA    SCHOOL   OF    SHORT- 
HAND. 

Full  course  given  in  the  Reportine  Style.  Young  ladies  and  gentlemen  pre- 
pared for  secretaryships  in  twelve  to  eighteen  weeks.  Sessions  continue 
throughout  the  year.  Students  may  enter  at  any  time.  Classes  begin  the  first 
week  in  January,  April,  July  and  October.  The  type-writer  is  taught  by  an  expert 
operator.     No  assistants  employed  who  are  not  practical  reporters. 

A  few  of  its  graduates  are  referred  to:  W.  A.  Shepfer,  with  Glidden,  Griggs  & 
Co.,  St.  Paul,  Minn.;  Prof.  A.  A.  Ladd,  Instructor  Cornell  College  School  of  Short- 
Hand,  Mt.  Vernon,  la.;  Marion  Grayson,  Sec'y  to  Gov.  Buren  R.  Sherman,  Des 
Moines,  la. ;  Brina  Archibald,  Stenographer  to  State  Insane  Asylum,  Lincoln,  Neb. ; 
Jenny  Griffiths,  with  Acme  Ins.  Co.,  Des  Moines,  la.;  Myron  E.  Wheeler,  Official 
Court  Reporter,  4th  Judicial  Dist.,  Columbus,  Neb.;  Clay  Peters,  Sec'y  to  "Our 
Home  on  the  Hillside,"  Dansville,  N.  Y.;  Isaac  Bennett,  Court  Reporter,  Carroll- 
ton,  111.;  Ada  Gaston,  Stenographer  to  the  Union  Pacific  Ry.  Co.,  Omaha,  Neb.; 
W.  H.  Martin, C.  R.  Brown,  Stenographers,  Davenport,  la.;  W.  I.  Earhart,  Council 
Bluffs,  la.;  Coralie  S.  Roth,  Fred  Wright,  Omaha,  Neb.;  Anna  Goodell,  Otto 
Burckle,  Cedar  Rapids,  la.;  Geo.  H.  Bain,  Ft.  Dodge,  la.;  Lillian  Cooley,  Bessie 
Gardner,  Nellie  Strong,  Samuel  Stophlet  and  Will  H.  Miller,  St.  Paul,  Minn.:  W. 
F.  La  Bonta,  Peru,  Ind.;  H.  W.  Seaman,  Clinton,  la.;  Addie  Rayhouser,  Frank 
Olds,  Ft.  Wayne,  Ind.;  R.  B.  Williams,  Denison,  la.;  Nellie  V.  Hutchinson,  Addie 
Dickey,  F.  A.  Remley,  Iowa  City,  la.;  Lide  Cameron,  Topeka,  Kan.;  F.  L.  White, 
Kansas  City,  Mo.;  H.  C.  Truesdale,  Minneapolis,  Minn.;  Kenny  Landis,  Logans- 
port,  Ind. 

THE  REPORTING  STYLE  OF  SHORT-HAND. 

The  very  latest  and  most  improved  text-book  of  stenography.  The  Reporting 
Style  of  the  American  Pitman  System  is  taught,  the  method  now  employed  by 
nine-tenths  of  the  professional  reporters.  The  subject  is  so  clearly  and  logically 
presented  that  no  one  can  fail  to  understand  it.  This  work  unquestionably  pos- 
sesses the  following  points  of  superiority: 

1.  The  Corresponding  Style  is  discarded,  which  greatly  facilitates  the  ac- 
quirement of  the  art. 

2.  The  learner  is  instructed  how  to  execute  the  characters  rapidly,  and  given 
such  assistance  as  will  enable  him  to  become  practicaUy  efficient. 

3.  No  word  is  introduced  until  every  principle  has  been  explained 
upon  which  the  formation  of  its  most  approved  outline  depends. 

4.  The  course  of  instruction  is  distinctively  progressive,  and  every  lesson 
accompanied  with  appropriate  reading  and  writing  exercises.  , 

5.  Word  and  phrase  signs  are  introduced  early  in  the  course. 

6.  A  series  of  lessons  are  added  on  professional  reporting,  such  as  are  found 
in  no  other  text-book  ir)uit€iter. 

Price,  in  cloth,  11.50.    Stenographic  Practice  Book,  25  cents. 


PERFECTED  METHOD  OF  POSTAL  STENOGRAPHY. 

By  the  aid  of  this  Course  of  Lessons  students  in  all  parts  of  the  United 
States  are  successfully  acquiring  the  art.  The  only  complete  method  of  postal 
instruction  ever  devised.     Some  of  the  features  which  recommend  it  are: 

1.  A  system  of  writing  can  be  taught  by  mail  far  more  successfully  than  any 
other  art  or  science. 

2.  The  student  runs  no  risk — is  not  obliged  to  leave  home  or  give  up  his  busi- 
ness. 

3.  Lessons  are  received  at  whatever  intervals  are  most  convenient. 

4.  Corrected  exercises  are  invariably  sent  back  by  return  mail. 

5.  Lessons  are  carrisd  in  the  pockst  and  learned  at  leisure  moments. 

6.  Traveling  does  not  interfere  in  the  least  with  this  method  of  taac'.iing. 

7.  Short-hand  is  best  learned  by  devoting  to  it  only  a  fraction  of  one's  time 
daily,  a  plan  suited  to  tlie  convenience  of  busy  people,  who  have  most  occasion  to 
use  a  brief  system  of  writing. 

8.  Students  are  re  luired  to  write  and  read  the  exercises  with  gradually 
increased  speed.  This  is  the  only  certain  way  of  gaining  proficiency  in  a  short 
space  of  time. 

9.  Not  only  is  the  art  thoroughly  taught,  but  full  directions  are  given  as  to  its 
use  in  the  business  of  Amanuensis,  Court,  and  Legislative  reporting,  etc. 

10.  The  intelligent  student  can  as  certainly  learn  by  this  means  as  by  attend- 
ing a  college,  and  with  but  a  fraction  of  the  expense. 

Specimen  Lessons  Free  on  Trial. 

THE  SHORT-HAND  CORRESPONDENT. 

A  monthly  journal  devoted  to  the  interests  of  students  and  reporters.  Per 
annum,  50  cents. 

THE  REPORTERS'  BUREAU. 

^^^~ Situations  secured  for  competent  Short-hand  writers. 

Eldon  Moran,  verbatim  reporter,  assisted  by  an  able  corps  of  stenographers, 
will  make  reports  in  any  state  or  territory  of  conventions,  speeches,  lectures,  law- 
suits, referred  cases,  depositions,  debates,  etc.  Will  respond  on  short  notice  to 
orders  by  mail  or  telegraph.    All  transcripts  printed.     Correspondence  solicited. 

STENOGRAPHIC   SJPPLY  AGENCY. 

All  styles  of  Type  Writers,  ribbons,  duplicate  paper,  note  books,  gold  reporting 
pens,  etc.,  etc.,  kept  constantly  on  hand. 
All  communications  should  be  addressed  to 

ELDON  MORAN,  Principal  Instructor, 

Iowa  City,  Ijwa. 


COMMENDATIONS. 


THE     "reporting     STYLE." 

A  thoroughly  practical  Instruction  book.-^  Home  and  School  Visitor,  Green- 
field, Ind. 

This  is  a  brief,  simple  and  satlsfacttry  treatise. — School  Bulletin,  Syracuse, 
New  York. 

In  many  respects  the  best  work  on  Phonography  that  has  appeared  for  several 
years. — D.  P.  Lindsley,  Inventor  of  Takigraphy. 

A  complete  and  systematic  treatise  on  Stenography  and  the  reporting  business. 
— The  Teacher,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Contains  all  that  is  of  value  in  qualifying  the  learner  for  practical  reporting-  — 
The  Normal  Teacher,  Danville,  Ind. 

This  book  teaches  the  Pitman  style  of  reporting  direct,  discarding  the  corre- 
sponding style.  It  is  a  briaf,  simple  and  satisfactory  treatise. — State  Educa- 
tional Journal.  Syracuse  N.  Y. 

INSTRUCTION    BY    MAIL. 

The  most  efficient  method  extant  of  gaining  a  practical  knowledge  of  short- 
hand.   I  speak  from  experience. — U.  G.  Morrow,  Stenographer,  Milan,  Mo. 

I  have  mastered  short-hand  in  six  months,  taking  lessons  by  mail.  I  have  thus 
acquired  a  paying  business  at  leisure  hours  that  otherwise  would  have  been 
wasted. — W.  H.  Jenkins,  Swan  Lake,  la. 

While  trying  to  learn  Dy  means  of  self-instruction,  I  went  astray  a  thousand 
times.  I  and  this  method  entirely  satisfactory,  and  especially  serviceable  to  me, 
as  1  am  allowed  to  receive  lessons  slowly  at  times  when  pressed  with  other  work 
—Rev.  W.  C.  Madison,  Dubuque,  la. 

I  do  not  see  how  it  would  be  possible  to  make  the  Course  more  complete  or  in- 
teresting. I  find  the  lessons  entirely  satisfactory,  and  sincerely  believe  that 
any  person  can  become  a  proficient  stenographer  by  this  means,  if  he  is  capable 
of  learning  at  all. —  T.J.  Rollman,  Superintendent  Public  Schools,  Brookvi'le, 
Kansas.] 

B>  means  of  this  plan  I  have  been  able  to  learn  short-hand,  devoting  to  it  only 
my  leisure  moments.  I  cannot  recommend  it  too  highly. — HATTIK  Lewis,  Sten 
ograpner  to  the  Homestead  Pub.  Co.,  Des  Moines,  la. 

I  can  now  write  very  rapidly,  and  what  is  equally  Important,  read  what  is  writ- 
ten. I  learned  entirely  by  mail,  and  at  a  trifling  expense.  Prof.  Moran's  scheme 
of  postal  instruction  is  simply  unparalleled — nothing  could  be  better.  I  have 
examined  various  text  books,  but  his  instruction  book   on  the  Reporting  Style, 

[188] 


which  is  the  basis  of  this  p!in,  i;  th3  most  free  from  useless  matter,  clearest,  the 
most  concise,  and  best  arranged  of  alJ.— Cyecjs  L.  Phelps,  Stenographer,  Mar- 
shdlltown,  la. 

A  systematized  series  of  lessons  that  will  no  doubt  prove  very  acceptable  to 
both  instractors  and  pupils  as  ii  text-book,  and  will  be  found  particularly  useful 
to  those  who  are  undergoing  a  course  of  self-instruction. —  Chicago  Evening 

JO0UNAL. 

The  character  of  the  work  is  aptly  described  by  its  title,  and  it  possesses  the 
great  merit  of  clearly  presenting  the  reporting  style  of  the  American  Pitman 
System,  divested  of  that  useless  appendage,  the  Corresponding  Style,  so-called 
The  direct  result  of  this  is  a  saving  of  at  least  half  the  labor  commonly  spent  in 
learning  the  art.  -  S.  W.  Journal  of  Education. 

The  systemfl  and  methods  of  teaching  Short  hand  have  been  greatly  improved 
lately,  and  it  is  not  strange  to  find  in  this  book  concise  and  logical  instruction 
for  learning  the  art.  The  mechanical  execution  of  the  book  is  excellent. — 
DAVENPORT  Gazette. 

This  is  a  very  complete  text-book  of  Pitman's  System  of  Short-hand  rearranged 
aad  presented  in  an  excellent  manner,  the  principal  features  of  which  are  the 
introduction  of  position,  word  signs  and  phrasing  in  the  early  part  of  the  study, 
making  but  oue  style  of  writing,  and  omitting  what  is  called  the  corresponding 
style. 

The  book  ia  worth  a  careful  perusal  by  all  short-handers,  especially  the  lessons 
on  the  snb.iect  of  amanuensis,  convention  and  law  reporting,  which  contain  many 
valuable  suggesti.ns  and  forms  — Short-hand  News,  Chicago,  Ills. 

It  has  several  features  of  superiority.  The  autfior's  aim  has  evidently  been  to 
produce  a  thoroughly  practical  instruction  book. —  TEE  School  Journajl,  New 
York. 

The  progress  of  every  new  science  is  impeded  by  the  necessity  of  leamint;  its 
principles  from  crude  and  unmethodic  insiruction  books.  Short-hand  has  had  to 
contend  with  this  disadvantage.  But  the  system  and  methods  of  teaching  are 
being  constantly  Improved,  and  a  concise  and  logically  arranged  instruction  book 
cannot  but  be  weic  imed  by  the  public.  No  word  is  introduced  until  every  princi- 
ple has  been  explained  upon  which  the  formation  of  its  approved  outline  de- 
pends. Word  and  phrase  signs  are  given  early  in  the  course,  which  enables  the 
student  to  use  Short-hand  to  advantage  in  taking  notes  as  soon  as  half  a  dozen 
lessons  are  learned.— Christian-Evangelist,  St.  Louis,  Mo 

By  a  nicely  graduated  time  schedule,  a  series  of  printed  and  engraved  exercises 
are  required  to  be  written  and  read  with  constantly  increased  speed.  Since  facility 
in  executing  the  characters  is  more  difficult  to  acquire  than  the  theory,  the  ad- 
vantage of  beginning  to  "get  up  speed  "  early  in  the  course  becomes  apparent. 
A  series  of  lessons  are  added  on  Professional  Reporiing,  such  as  are  f^jund  in  no 
other  text  book  whatever.  These  contain  practical  hints  to  young  reporters  and 
abundant  explanations  of  the  methods  made  use  of  in  performing  the  work  of 
an  amanuensis,  or  in  reporting  speech's,  conventions,  and  legislative  and  court 
proceedingB.— Christian  Standard,  Cincinnati. 

[189] 


Prof.  Eldon  Moran,  the  principal  instrjctor  in  the  St:;".:  University  of  Iowa 
School  of  Short-hand,  has  lately  issued  a  very  practical  book,  which  embodies  the 
resv.!t  of  kiD  experience  in  teaching  the  system  of  Pitman  Phonosraphy  in 
Its  simplicity,  wliile  at  the  same  time  it  takf^s  a  stand  directly  on  those  abbrevia- 
tions and  shortenings  necessary  to  rapid  writing. —  Daily  Commonwealth,  To- 
pel^a,  Ka:isus. 

The  plan  cf  some  recent  writers  of  incorporating  a  number  of  hooks  and 
croolis  of  t-eir  own  manufacture  for  the  sake  of  mere  novelty,  is  not  adopted, but 
the  general  uniformity  of  the  system  is  maintained.  Ti.is  work  is  designed  es- 
pecially as  a  Self-Instructor,  and  is  beyond  all  question  far  superior  to  any  other 
of  the  kind  published.  The  rules  and  explanations  are  concise  and  to  the  point, 
and  its  pages  are  not  lumbered  with  unnecessary  matter.— Daily  Republican, 
Iowa  City 

KANSAS  State  IIistorical  Society,  I 
TOPEKA,  July  25,  1884.      f 
Prof.  Eldon  moran.  State  University  of  lowar 

My  Dear  Sir: — I  am  pleased  with  your  plan  of  instruction  and  am  making  some 
test  of  it.  It  does  away  with  long  forms,  afterwards  to  be  unlearned,  which  will 
result  In  the  saving  of  much  labor  in  learning  the  art.  I  have  written  phonogra- 
phy for  more  than  thirty  years;  was  in  the  class  with  Elias  Longley  when  he  took 
his  first  lessons,  E.  Webster,  instructor. 

Yours  truly,  F.  G.  Adams,  Librarian. 

I  admire  your  work  exceedingly.  It  is  not  so  voluminous  as  most  Short-banc 
books,  although  containing  all  the  rules  known  to  the  art;  and  it  is  so  cunningly 
arranged  that  it  cannot  help  but  please  one.  In  all,  it  is  the  best  work  of  the  kind 
I  have  ever  seen.  R.  E  Williams, 

Stenographer  to  Conner  &  Shaw,  Denison,  Iowa. 

The  lessons  are  so  clearly  and  simply  explained  that  a  teacher  is  almost  unnec- 
essary except  to  dictate  for  rapid  work.  The  fact  that  each  exercise  is  timed  fur- 
nishes an  incentive  to  thorough  work,  and  to  guard  against  the  danger  of  simply 
drawing  the  outlines,  which  leaves  all  the  practical  part  of  the  science  to  be  ac- 
quired after  the  theoretical  is  learned.  It  seems  to  me  a  pupil  could  hardly  get 
"off  the  track"  while  using  this  text-book.  I  take  pleasure  in  recommending  it  to 
all  I  meet  who  intend  studying  phonography. 

MARION  C.  Grayson, 
Stenographic  Secretary  to  Gov.  Sherman.  Des  Moines,  Iowa. 

Since  its  publication  in  1884,  this  work  has  been  adopted  as  the  standard  text 
book  in  teaching  classes  in  the  following  named  institutions:  Drake  University, 
Des  Moines,  la.;  Michigan  University,  Ann  Arbor,  Mich.;  Iowa  College,  Grinnell, 
la.;  Coe  College,  Cedar  Rapids,  la.;  Bowen's  Business  College,  Jennings'  Business 
College,  and  the  Capital  City  Commercial  College,  Des  Moines,  la.;  Iowa  State 
University,  Iowa  City,  la. ;  Cornell  College,  Mt.  Vernon,  la.;  Orchard  City  Busi- 
ness College,  Burlington,  la.;  Evening  School,  Boston,  Mass.;  Lincoln  (Neb.) 
Commercial  College;  Collegiate  Institute,  Wilton,  la.;  State  Industrial  School, 
Eldora,  la.,  and  nearly  twenty  other  schools. 

[190] 


CORRESPONDENCE  CLASSES. 

1 

These  are  formed  and  conducted  in  the  following  manner:  A.  number  o 
students  who  live  in  the  same  locality,  and  begin  the  study  all  at  one  time,  meet 
together  at  appointed  hours  with  an  older  and  more  advanced  student,  who  serves 
as  leader  or  dictation  drill  master.  The  object  of  these  meetings  is  to  keep  alive 
an  enthusiastic  interest  in  the  work,  and  to  secure  intelligent  and  systemat  c 
practice  in  writing  and  reading.  Each  student  receives  personal  lessons  from  the 
School,  with  which  he  maintains  the  same  connection  as  other  correspondence 
students.  The  class  meets  one  evening  each  week,  and  the  recitation  occupies 
one  hour  and  a  half. 

These  classes  range  in  s'ze  from  five  to  thirty  members,  and  are  organized  in 
towns  and  village <  in  all  parts  of  the  United  States.  To  secure  thorough  prepara- 
tion on  the  part  of  the  leader,  he  is  given  special  instruction  in  both  the  theory 
and  practice  of  this  art-science.  He  is  also  provided  with  a  set  ef  full,  printed 
directions,  and  all  needed  information  to  guide  him  in  the  work  of  giving  perfect 
dictation  drills.  By  this  means  his  own  knowledge  of  the  principles  and  signs  of 
the  system  becomes  more  firmly  fixed,  and  his  skill  in  executing  and  translating 
the  characters  is  increased.  As  Stenography  Is  comparatively  a  new  study,  the 
progr<  ss  of  the  class  will  be  regarded  by  the  public  with  considerable  interest, and 
its  successful  leadership  will  tend  to  increase  the  reputation,  social  and  business 
standing  of  whomsoever  performs  this  wo:k. 

It  is  the  purpose  of  this  Institution  to  form  Correspondence  Classes  in  all 
cities  and  towns  in  which  good  facilities  for  instruction  are  not  already  provided. 
'Those  desiring  to  be  appointed  leaders  should  write  at  once.  Thd  person  first  ap- 
plying, if  thoroughly  competent  and  responsible,  will  receive  the  appointment 
We  will  famish  full  directions  how  to  proceed,  and  how  to  present  the  matter  to 
the  public  in  such  a  way  as  to  secure  as  large  a  membership  as  possible. 

A  cert  'in  amount  of  judgment  and  skill  is  needed  by  the  leader,  and  persons 
only  who  are  rendered  competent  by  intelligence  and  education  will  be  appointed. 
Liberal  terms  are  offered  to  those  who  are  properly  qualified.  Circulars  contain- 
ing full  information  will  be  sent  upon  application. 

Nearly  thirty  such  classes  are  now  in  successful  operation,  and  many  others 
are  in  process  of  organization.  The  work  of  the  leader  in  forming  and  conduct- 
ing such  a  class  need  not  interfere  seriously  with  his  usual  business  or  occupa- 
tion. 

Any  other  information  which  may  be  requested  concerning   the  course  of  in- 
struction, or  the  business  of  stenographic  reponing,  will  be  cheerfully  given. 
Address,   SCHOOL  OF  SHORT-HAND,   Iowa  City,  Iowa. 
[1911 


—24— 


THE   REPORTERS'   BUREAU 

Assists  graduates  in  obtaining  suitable  situations.  The 
manaKCr  is  often  able  to  secure  a  position  in  whatever  local- 
ity the  student  wishes  to  live.  This  Bureau  was  established 
for  the  sole  purpose  of  assisting  the  students  whom  we  our- 
selves instruct,  and  for  whose  qualifications  we  can  vouch. 
Since  we  present  the  names  of  our  own  students  only,  whose 
skill  we  are  able  to  certify  to,  business  men  give  credit  to 
our  recommendations,  and  often  employ  our  graduates  cut- 
right  without  the  preliminary  trial  month. 

Young  men  and  women  who  have  taken  this  Course  are 
now  occupying  lucrative  situations  in  all  the  principal  cities. 
A  few  of  the  employers  of  our  graduates  are  referred  to: 

Governor  Buren  R.  Sherman,  Des  Moines,  Iowa. 

Judge  Norval,  District  Court,  Columbus,  Neb. 

Dr.  J  as.  C.  Jackson,  Superintendent  "Home  on  the  Hill- 
side," Dansville,  N.  Y. 

C.  H.  Bigelow,  Pres.  Fire  and  Marine  Ins.  Co.,  St.  Paul, 
Minn. 

Geo.  W.  Crane  &  Co.,  Topeka,  Kan. 

Wright,  Cummins  &  Wright,  Des  Moines,  Iowa, 

N.  G.  Olds  &  Co.,  Ft.  Wayne,  Ind. 

GUdden,  Griggs  &  Co.,  St.  Paul,  Minn. 

C.  Tower,  Jr.,  Pres.  Duluth  &  Iron  Range  Ry.,  Duluth, 
Minn. 

Davison  &  Lane,  Davenport,  Iowa. 

Dyer  &  Howard,  St.  Paul.  Minn. 

W.  S.  Wing,  Auditor  Pass.  Accts.,  TJ.  P.  Ry.,  Omaha,  Neb. 

Henderson,  Hurd  &  Daniels,  Dubuque,  Iowa. 

J.  B.  Utt,  Gen.  Frt.  Agt.,  B.  C.  R.  &  N.  Ry.,  Cedar  Rapids, 
Iowa. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 

This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


Form  L9-25w-9,'47(A5618)444 


m. 


■0«,?«!sA 


LOS  ANGEL£S 
UBRARY 


Mi.yi. 


Z^6        Moran- 

1.17 93 r     The  reporting     ;^ 

188:^ at:ylo  of  short-'^ 

hand. 


UCLA-Young   Research    Library 

Z56   .M793r  1885 
yr 


L  009   568  888 


Z56 
1885 


